User Guide
MSO7000/DS7000 Series Digital
Oscilloscope
Jul. 2020
RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide I
Guaranty and Declaration
Copyright
© 2020 RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All Rights Reserved.
Trademark
Information
RIGOL
®
is the trademark of RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Publication
Number
UGA22104-1110
Software
Version
00.01.02.00.06
Software upgrade might change or add product features. Please acquire the latest
version of the manual from RIGOL website or contact RIGOL to upgrade the
software.
Notices
⚫ RIGOL products are covered by P.R.C. and foreign patents, issued and pending.
⚫ RIGOL reserves the right to modify or change parts of or all the specifications
and pricing policies at the company’s sole decision.
⚫ Information in this publication replaces all previously released materials.
⚫ Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.
⚫ RIGOL shall not be liable for either incidental or consequential losses in
connection with the furnishing, use, or performance of this manual, as well as
any information contained.
⚫ Any part of this document is forbidden to be copied, photocopied, or rearranged
without prior written approval of RIGOL.
Product
Certification
RIGOL guarantees that this product conforms to the national and industrial
standards in China as well as the ISO9001:2015 standard and the ISO14001:2015
standard. Other international standard conformance certifications are in progress.
Contact
Us
If you have any problem or requirement when using our products or this manual,
please contact RIGOL.
E-mail: servi[email protected]m
Website: www.rigol.com
RIGOL
II MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Safety Requirement
General Safety Summary
Please review the following safety precautions carefully before putting the
instrument into operation so as to avoid any personal injury or damage to the
instrument and any product connected to it. To prevent potential hazards, please
follow the instructions specified in this manual to use the instrument properly.
Use Proper Power Cord.
Only the exclusive power cord designed for the instrument and authorized for use
within the local country could be used.
Ground the Instrument.
The instrument is grounded through the Protective Earth lead of the power cord. To
avoid electric shock, connect the earth terminal of the power cord to the Protective
Earth terminal before connecting any input or output terminals.
Connect the Probe Correctly.
If a probe is used, the probe ground lead must be connected to earth ground. Do not
connect the ground lead to high voltage. Improper way of connection could result in
dangerous voltages being present on the connectors, controls or other surfaces of
the oscilloscope and probes, which will cause potential hazards for operators.
Observe All Terminal Ratings.
To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings and markers on the instrument and
check your manual for more information about ratings before connecting the
instrument.
Use Proper Overvoltage Protection.
Ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning) can reach the
product. Otherwise, the operator might be exposed to the danger of an electric
shock.
Do Not Operate Without Covers.
Do not operate the instrument with covers or panels removed.
Do Not Insert Objects into the Air Outlet.
Do not insert anything into the holes of the fan to avoid damaging the instrument.
Use Proper Fuse.
Please use the specified fuses.
RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide III
Avoid Circuit or Wire Exposure.
Do not touch exposed junctions and components when the unit is powered on.
Do Not Operate with Suspected Failures.
If you suspect that any damage may occur to the instrument, have it inspected by
RIGOL authorized personnel before further operations. Any maintenance,
adjustment or replacement especially to circuits or accessories must be performed
by RIGOL authorized personnel.
Provide Adequate Ventilation.
Inadequate ventilation may cause an increase of temperature in the instrument,
which would cause damage to the instrument. So please keep the instrument well
ventilated and inspect the air outlet and the fan regularly.
Do Not Operate in Wet Conditions.
To avoid short circuit inside the instrument or electric shock, never operate the
instrument in a humid environment.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
To avoid personal injuries or damage to the instrument, never operate the
instrument in an explosive atmosphere.
Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.
To avoid dust or moisture from affecting the performance of the instrument, keep the
surfaces of the instrument clean and dry.
Prevent Electrostatic Impact.
Operate the instrument in an electrostatic discharge protective environment to avoid
damage induced by static discharges. Always ground both the internal and external
conductors of cables to release static before making connections.
Use the Battery Properly.
Do not expose the battery (if available) to high temperature or fire. Keep it out of the
reach of children. Improper change of a battery (lithium battery) may cause an
explosion. Use the RIGOL specified battery only.
Handle with Caution.
Please handle with care during transportation to avoid damage to keys, knobs,
interfaces, and other parts on the panels.
RIGOL
IV MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Safety Notices and Symbols
Safety Notices in this Manual:
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not
avoided, will result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not
avoided, could result in damage to the product or loss of important data.
Safety Terms on the Product:
DANGER
It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could
result in injury or hazard immediately.
WARNING
It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could
result in potential injury or hazard.
CAUTION
It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could
result in damage to the product or other devices connected to the
product.
Safety Symbols on the Product:
Hazardous
Voltage
Safety Warning
Protective Earth
Terminal
Chassis Ground
Test Ground
RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide V
Measurement Category
Measurement Category
MSO7000/DS7000 series digital oscilloscopes can make measurements in
Measurement Category I.
WARNING
This oscilloscope can only be used for measurements within its specified
measurement categories.
Measurement Category Definitions
Measurement category I is for measurements performed on circuits not directly
connected to MAINS. Examples are measurements on circuits not derived from
MAINS, and specially protected (internal) MAINS derived circuits. In the latter case,
transient stresses are variable. Thus, you must know the transient withstand
capability of the equipment.
Measurement category II is for measurements performed on circuits directly
connected to low voltage installation. Examples are measurements on household
appliances, portable tools and similar equipment.
Measurement category III is for measurements performed in the building installation.
Examples are measurements on distribution boards, circuit-breakers, wiring
(including cables, bus-bars, junction boxes, switches and socket-outlets) in the fixed
installation, and equipment for industrial use and some other equipment. For
example, stationary motors with permanent connection to a fixed installation.
Measurement category IV is for measurements performed at the source of a
low-voltage installation. Examples are electricity meters and measurements on
primary overcurrent protection devices and ripple control units.
Ventilation Requirement
This oscilloscope uses a fan to force cooling. Please make sure that the air intake and
exhaust areas are free from obstructions and have free air. When using the
oscilloscope in a bench-top or rack setting, provide at least 10 cm clearance beside,
above and behind the instrument for adequate ventilation.
WARNING
Inadequate ventilation may cause an increase of temperature in the
instrument, which would cause damage to the instrument. So please
keep the instrument well ventilated and inspect the air outlet and the fan
regularly.
RIGOL
VI MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Working Environment
Temperature
Operating: 0℃ to +50℃
Non-operating: -30℃ to +70℃
Humidity
Operating:
Below +30℃: ≤95%RH (without condensation)
+30℃ to +40℃: ≤75%RH (without condensation)
+40℃ to +50℃: ≤45%RH (without condensation)
Non-operating:
Below 65℃: ≤95% RH (without condensation)
WARNING
To avoid short circuit inside the instrument or electric shock, never
operate the instrument in a humid environment.
Altitude
Operating: below 3 km
Non-operating: below 15 km
Installation (Overvoltage) Category
This product is powered by mains conforming to installation (overvoltage) category
II.
WARNING
Ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning)
can reach the product. Otherwise, the operator might be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
Installation (Overvoltage) Category Definitions
Installation (overvoltage) category I refers to signal level which is applicable to
equipment measurement terminals connected to the source circuit. Among these
terminals, precautions are done to limit the transient voltage to a low level.
Installation (overvoltage) category II refers to the local power distribution level
which is applicable to equipment connected to the AC line (AC power).
Pollution Degree
Pollution Degree 2
RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide VII
Pollution Degree Definition
Pollution Degree 1: No pollution or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. The
pollution has no effect. For example, a clean room or air-conditioned office
environment.
Pollution Degree 2: Normally only nonconductive pollution occurs. Temporary
conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected. For example, indoor
environment.
Pollution Degree 3: Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that
becomes conductive due to condensation occurs. To be found in industrial
environment or construction sites (harsh environments). For example, sheltered
outdoor environment.
Pollution Degree 4: The pollution generates persistent conductivity caused by
conductive dust, rain, or snow.
For example, outdoor areas.
Safety Class
Class 1 – Grounded Product
Care and Cleaning
Care
Do not store or leave the instrument where it may be exposed to direct sunlight for
long periods of time.
Cleaning
Clean the instrument regularly according to its operating conditions.
1. Disconnect the instrument from all power sources.
2. Clean the external surfaces of the instrument with a soft cloth dampened with
mild detergent or water. Avoid having any water or other objects into the chassis
via the heat dissipation hole. When cleaning the LCD, take care to avoid
scarifying it.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the instrument, do not expose it to caustic liquids.
WARNING
To avoid short-circuit resulting from moisture or personal injuries, ensure
that the instrument is completely dry before connecting it to the power
supply.
RIGOL
VIII MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Environmental Considerations
The following symbol indicates that this product complies with the WEEE Directive
2002/96/EC.
Product End-of-Life Handling
The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or
human health. To avoid the release of such substances into the environment and
avoid harm to human health, we recommend you to recycle this product
appropriately to ensure that most materials are reused or recycled properly. Please
contact your local authorities for disposal or recycling information.
You can click on the following link
https://int.rigol.com/services/declaration.html to
download the latest version of the RoHS&WEEE certification file.
RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide IX
MSO7000/DS7000 Series Overview
MSO7000/DS7000 series is a multifunctional and high-performance digital
oscilloscope designed on the basis of the unique Ultra Vision II technique developed
by RIGOL. Integrating 7 independent instruments into one, the MSO7000/DS7000
series is equipped with super sample bandwidth ratio, extremely high memory depth,
clear display, excellent waveform capture rate, and powerful data analysis functions.
Many of its specifications have reached the top level in the industry. It provides
sound solutions for mainframes, optional & accessories, and application software. It
has aroused great attention from customers in the areas such as industrial control,
power supply, and automotive electronics.
Main Features:
⚫ Analog bandwidth: 500 MHz, 350 MHz, 200 MHz, and 100 MHz; bandwidth
upgrade option supported
⚫ 4 analog channels, 1 EXT channel, and 16 optional digital channels
⚫ Up to 10 GSa/s real-time sample rate
⚫ Up to 500 Mpts memory depth (option)
⚫ High waveform capture rate (over 600,000 wfm/s)
⚫ Up to 450,000 frames of hardware real-time and ceaseless waveforms recording
and playing functions
⚫ Integrates 7 independent instruments into 1, including digital oscilloscope,
16-channel logic analyzer, spectrum analyzer, dual-channel Function/Arbitrary
Waveform Generator, digital voltmeter, 6-digit frequency counter and totalizer,
and protocol analyzer
⚫ A variety of serial protocol triggers and decodes
⚫ Auto measurement of 41 waveform parameters; full-memory hardware
measurement function
⚫ A variety of math operations, built-in enhanced FFT analysis, and peak search
function
⚫ Waveform histogram analysis (standard)
⚫ Independent search, navigation keys, and event table
⚫ Built-in advanced power analysis software (option)
⚫ User-defined one-key quick operation
⚫ 10.1-inch capacitive multi-touch screen, 256-level intensity grading display, with
color persistence
⚫ Multiple interfaces available: USB HOST & DEVICE, LAN(LXI), HDMI, TRIG OUT,
and USB-GPIB
⚫ Web Control remote command
⚫ Unique online version upgrade
⚫ Novel and delicate industrial design, easy to operate
RIGOL
X MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Document Overview
Main Topics of this Manual:
Chapter 1 Quick Start
Introduces the preparations before using the oscilloscope and provides a basic
introduction of the instrument.
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
Introduces the vertical system functions of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
Introduces the horizontal system functions of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
Introduces the sample system functions of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Introduces the trigger mode, trigger coupling, trigger holdoff, external trigger, and
various trigger types of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
Introduces how to make math operation, auto measurement, and cursor
measurement.
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter
Introduces how to use the digital voltmeter and the frequency counter.
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option)
Introduces the power quality and output ripple noise of the input power.
Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis
Introduces the histogram analysis function.
Chapter 10 Digital Channel
Introduces how to use the digital channels of the mixed signal digital oscilloscope.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
Introduces how to decode the input signal by using those common protocols.
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform
Introduces how to compare the input waveform with the reference waveform.
Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test
Introduces how to monitor the input signal by using the Pass/Fail test.
RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide XI
Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing
Introduces the waveform recording & playing function.
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function
Introduces the navigation function and how to quickly search the relevant events.
Chapter 16 Display Control
Introduces how to control the display of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option)
Introduces how to use the built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator option.
Chapter 18 Store and Load
Introduces how to store and load the measurement results and the setting of the
oscilloscope.
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
Introduces how to set the remote interfaces and system-related functions.
Chapter 20 Remote Control
Introduces how to control the oscilloscope remotely.
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting
Introduces how to deal with the common failures of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 22 Appendix
Provides the basic information for the options and accessories.
RIGOL
XII MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Format Conventions in this Manual:
1. Key
The key on the front panel is denoted by the format of "Key Name (Bold) + Text
Box" in the manual. For example, Utility denotes the "Utility" key.
2. Menu
The menu items are denoted by the format of "Menu Word (Bold) + Character
Shading". For example, System denotes the "System" menu item under
Utility.
3. Operation Procedures:
→ denotes the next step of operation. For example, Utility → System denotes
that first press Utility, and then press the System key.
4. Connector:
The connectors on the front or rear panel are usually denoted by the format of
"Connector Name (Bold) + Square Brackets (Bold)". For example, [TRIG OUT].
5. Knob
Label
Knob
Label
Knob
Horizontal SCALE
Horizontal Time
Base Knob
Vertical SCALE
Vertical Scale
Knob
Horizontal
POSITION
Horizontal Position
Knob
Vertical
OFFSET
Vertical
Offset Knob
Wave Vertical
SCALE
Waveform Vertical
Scale Knob
Trigger LEVEL
Trigger Level
Knob
Wave Vertical
POSITION
Waveform Vertical
Position Knob
Multifunction
Knob
Content Conventions in this Manual:
MSO7000/DS7000 series includes the following models. Unless otherwise specified,
this manual takes MSO7054 as an example to illustrate the functions and operation
methods of MSO7000/DS7000 series.
Model
Analog
Bandwidth
No. of
Analog
Channels
No. of
Channels of
Function/AWG
No. of Digital
Channels
DS7054
500 MHz
4
——
——
DS7034
350 MHz
4
——
——
DS7024
200 MHz
4
——
——
DS7014
100 MHz
4
——
——
MSO7054
500 MHz
4
2, Opt.
16
MSO7034
350 MHz
4
2, Opt.
16
MSO7024
200 MHz
4
2, Opt.
16
MSO7014
100 MHz
4
2, Opt.
16
RIGOL Contents
XIV MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Contents
Guaranty and Declaration ......................................................................... I
Safety Requirement ................................................................................. II
General Safety Summary........................................................................... II
Safety Notices and Symbols ..................................................................... IV
Measurement Category ............................................................................. V
Ventilation Requirement ............................................................................ V
Working Environment .............................................................................. VI
Care and Cleaning .................................................................................. VII
Environmental Considerations ................................................................. VIII
MSO7000/DS7000 Series Overview ....................................................... IX
Document Overview ................................................................................ X
Chapter 1 Quick Start ........................................................................ 1-1
General Inspection ................................................................................. 1-2
Appearance and Dimensions ................................................................... 1-3
To Prepare for Use ................................................................................. 1-4
To Adjust the Supporting Legs .......................................................... 1-4
To Connect to AC Power ................................................................... 1-4
Turn-on Checkout ............................................................................ 1-5
To Replace the Fuse ......................................................................... 1-5
To Connect the Probe ....................................................................... 1-6
Function Inspection ......................................................................... 1-9
Probe Compensation ...................................................................... 1-10
Front Panel Overview ........................................................................... 1-11
Rear Panel Overview ............................................................................ 1-12
Front Panel Function Overview .............................................................. 1-15
Vertical ......................................................................................... 1-15
Horizontal ..................................................................................... 1-16
Wave ............................................................................................ 1-17
Trigger ......................................................................................... 1-18
Clear ............................................................................................ 1-18
Auto ............................................................................................. 1-18
RUN/STOP .................................................................................... 1-18
Single ........................................................................................... 1-19
Multifunction knob ......................................................................... 1-19
Function Menu .............................................................................. 1-20
Touch Lock Key ............................................................................. 1-20
Quick Key (Shortcut Key) ................................................................ 1-21
User Interface ...................................................................................... 1-22
Touch Screen Controls .......................................................................... 1-26
Tap .............................................................................................. 1-26
Pinch & Stretch ............................................................................. 1-27
Contents RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide XV
Drag ............................................................................................. 1-27
Rectangle Drawing ......................................................................... 1-28
Parameter Setting Method ..................................................................... 1-30
To Use the Security Lock ....................................................................... 1-31
To Use the Built-in Help System ............................................................. 1-32
To View the Option Information and the Option Installation ...................... 1-33
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System ................................................. 2-1
To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel ................................................. 2-2
To Adjust the Vertical Scale .................................................................... 2-3
Vertical Expansion ................................................................................. 2-4
To Adjust the Vertical Offset ................................................................... 2-4
Channel Coupling .................................................................................. 2-5
Bandwidth Limit .................................................................................... 2-6
Probe Ratio ........................................................................................... 2-6
Input Impedance ................................................................................... 2-7
Waveform Invert ................................................................................... 2-8
To Set the Probe ................................................................................... 2-9
Passive Probe ................................................................................. 2-9
Active Probe ................................................................................... 2-9
Amplitude Unit ..................................................................................... 2-10
Channel Delay ...................................................................................... 2-10
Offset Cal ............................................................................................ 2-11
Channel Label ...................................................................................... 2-12
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System ............................................. 3-1
To Adjust the Horizontal Time Base ......................................................... 3-2
To Adjust the Horizontal Position ............................................................. 3-3
Delayed Sweep ..................................................................................... 3-4
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System .................................................. 4-1
Timebase Mode ..................................................................................... 4-2
YT Mode ........................................................................................ 4-2
XY Mode ........................................................................................ 4-2
ROLL Mode .................................................................................... 4-4
Acquisition Mode ................................................................................... 4-5
Normal .......................................................................................... 4-5
Average ......................................................................................... 4-5
Peak .............................................................................................. 4-6
High Resolution .............................................................................. 4-7
Sampling Mode ..................................................................................... 4-7
Sample Rate ......................................................................................... 4-7
LA Sample Rate ..................................................................................... 4-9
Memory Depth ...................................................................................... 4-9
LA Memory Depth ................................................................................. 4-11
Anti-Aliasing ......................................................................................... 4-11
Horizontal Expansion ............................................................................ 4-11
RIGOL Contents
XVI MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope ................................................ 5-1
Trigger Source ....................................................................................... 5-2
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level ................................................................ 5-3
Trigger Mode ......................................................................................... 5-4
Trigger Coupling..................................................................................... 5-6
Trigger Holdoff ....................................................................................... 5-6
Noise Rejection ...................................................................................... 5-7
Trigger Type .......................................................................................... 5-8
Edge Trigger ................................................................................... 5-9
Pulse Trigger ................................................................................. 5-10
Slope Trigger ................................................................................. 5-12
Video Trigger................................................................................. 5-15
Pattern Trigger .............................................................................. 5-17
Duration Trigger ............................................................................ 5-19
Timeout Trigger ............................................................................. 5-22
Runt Trigger .................................................................................. 5-23
Window Trigger ............................................................................. 5-25
Delay Trigger ................................................................................ 5-27
Setup/Hold Trigger......................................................................... 5-29
Nth Edge Trigger ........................................................................... 5-32
RS232 Trigger (Option) .................................................................. 5-33
I2C Trigger (Option) ....................................................................... 5-36
SPI Trigger (Option) ....................................................................... 5-38
CAN Trigger (Option) ..................................................................... 5-40
FlexRay Trigger (Option) ................................................................ 5-43
LIN Trigger (Option) ...................................................................... 5-45
I2S Trigger (Option) ....................................................................... 5-47
MIL-STD-1553 Trigger (Option) ....................................................... 5-50
Zone Trigger ........................................................................................ 5-52
Trigger Output Connector...................................................................... 5-54
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements .......................................... 6-1
Math Operation ...................................................................................... 6-2
Addition .......................................................................................... 6-2
Subtraction ..................................................................................... 6-3
Multiplication ................................................................................... 6-4
Division .......................................................................................... 6-5
FFT ................................................................................................ 6-6
"AND" Operation ........................................................................... 6-10
"OR" Operation ............................................................................. 6-11
"XOR" Operation ............................................................................ 6-12
"NOT" Operation............................................................................ 6-14
Intg.............................................................................................. 6-15
Diff .............................................................................................. 6-16
Sqrt .............................................................................................. 6-17
Lg (Base 10 Exponential) ................................................................ 6-18
Contents RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide XVII
Ln ................................................................................................ 6-19
Exp .............................................................................................. 6-20
Abs .............................................................................................. 6-21
Low Pass ....................................................................................... 6-22
High Pass ...................................................................................... 6-23
Band Pass ..................................................................................... 6-24
Band Stop ..................................................................................... 6-25
AX+B ............................................................................................ 6-26
Math Operation Label ..................................................................... 6-27
Auto Measurement ............................................................................... 6-28
Quick Measurement after AUTO....................................................... 6-28
Measurement Parameter ................................................................. 6-30
Measurement Settings .................................................................... 6-36
Remove the Measurement Result ..................................................... 6-39
Statistical Function ......................................................................... 6-39
All Measurement ............................................................................ 6-40
Cursor Measurement............................................................................. 6-40
Manual Mode ................................................................................. 6-42
Track Mode ................................................................................... 6-46
XY Mode ....................................................................................... 6-48
Measure Mode ............................................................................... 6-50
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter ............... 7-1
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) ......................................................................... 7-2
To Enable or Disable DVM Measurement............................................ 7-2
To Select the Measurement Source ................................................... 7-2
To Select Measurement Mode ........................................................... 7-3
To Set the Limits ............................................................................. 7-3
Frequency Counter ................................................................................ 7-4
To Enable or Disable the Frequency Counter ...................................... 7-4
To Select the Measurement Source ................................................... 7-4
To Select the Measurement Item ...................................................... 7-4
To Set Resolution ............................................................................ 7-5
To Clear Count ................................................................................ 7-5
To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function ...................................... 7-5
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option) ..................................................... 8-1
Power Quality ....................................................................................... 8-2
Ripple .................................................................................................. 8-4
Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis ............................................................ 9-1
To Enable or Disable the Histogram Function ............................................ 9-2
To Select the Histogram Type ................................................................. 9-2
To Select the Histogram Source .............................................................. 9-2
To Set the Histogram Height ................................................................... 9-3
To Set the Histogram Range ................................................................... 9-3
To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function............................................. 9-3
RIGOL Contents
XVIII MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Reset ................................................................................................ 9-4
Chapter 10 Digital Channel ................................................................ 10-1
To Select the Digital Channel ................................................................. 10-2
To Enable/Disable the Digital Channel .................................................... 10-2
To Set the Threshold ............................................................................ 10-3
Auto Arrangement Setting ..................................................................... 10-4
To Set the Waveform Display Size .......................................................... 10-4
To Set the Label ................................................................................... 10-4
Group Setting ...................................................................................... 10-5
Waveform Color of the Digital Channel ................................................... 10-6
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding ........................................................... 11-1
Parallel Decoding ................................................................................. 11-2
RS232 Decoding (Option) ..................................................................... 11-7
I2C Decoding (Option) ........................................................................ 11-14
SPI Decoding (Option) ........................................................................ 11-19
LIN Decoding (Option) ........................................................................ 11-23
CAN Decoding (Option) ....................................................................... 11-29
FlexRay Decoding (Option) .................................................................. 11-33
I2S Decoding (Option) ........................................................................ 11-37
1553B Decoding (Option) .................................................................... 11-42
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform ....................................................... 12-1
To Enable Ref Function ......................................................................... 12-2
To Select the Reference Channel ............................................................ 12-2
To Select the Ref Source ....................................................................... 12-2
To Adjust the Ref Waveform Display ....................................................... 12-2
To Save to Internal Memory .................................................................. 12-3
To Clear the Display of the Reference Waveform ..................................... 12-3
To View Details of the Reference Waveform ............................................ 12-3
To Reset the Reference Waveform ......................................................... 12-4
Color Setting........................................................................................ 12-4
Label Setting ....................................................................................... 12-4
To Export to Internal or External Memory ............................................... 12-5
To Import from Internal or External Memory ........................................... 12-5
Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test .................................................................. 13-1
To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test Function ...................................... 13-2
To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation ........................................... 13-2
To Select the Source ............................................................................. 13-2
To Create a Mask ................................................................................. 13-3
To Save the Mask ................................................................................. 13-3
To Load a Mask .................................................................................... 13-3
To Set the Output Form of the Test Results ............................................. 13-4
To Enable or Disable the Display of the Statistics of the Test Results ......... 13-5
Statistics Reset .................................................................................... 13-5
Contents RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide XIX
Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing ........................................ 14-1
Common Settings ................................................................................. 14-2
Record Options .................................................................................... 14-3
Play Options ........................................................................................ 14-4
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function ....................................... 15-1
Search Function ................................................................................... 15-2
Navigation Function .............................................................................. 15-4
Chapter 16 Display Control ................................................................. 16-1
To Select the Display Type ..................................................................... 16-2
To Set the Persistence Time .................................................................. 16-2
To Set the Waveform Intensity ............................................................... 16-3
To Set the Screen Grid .......................................................................... 16-3
To Set the Grid Brightness ..................................................................... 16-4
Scale ................................................................................................... 16-4
Color Grade ......................................................................................... 16-4
Waveform Freeze ................................................................................. 16-4
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option)
......................................................................................... 17-1
To Output Basic Waveforms ................................................................... 17-2
To Output Sine .............................................................................. 17-2
To Output Square .......................................................................... 17-3
To Output Ramp ............................................................................ 17-4
To Output Pulse ............................................................................. 17-4
To Output DC ................................................................................ 17-5
To Output Noise ............................................................................. 17-5
Sinc .............................................................................................. 17-6
Exp.Rise ........................................................................................ 17-6
Exp.Fall ......................................................................................... 17-7
ECG .............................................................................................. 17-7
Gauss ........................................................................................... 17-7
Lorentz ......................................................................................... 17-8
Haversine ...................................................................................... 17-8
To Output the Arbitrary Waveform .......................................................... 17-9
To Load the Channel and Waveform ................................................. 17-9
To Create the Waveform ............................................................... 17-10
To Edit Waveforms ....................................................................... 17-12
Modulation ........................................................................................ 17-13
AM ............................................................................................. 17-14
FM ............................................................................................. 17-15
FSK ............................................................................................ 17-15
Sweep ............................................................................................... 17-16
Burst ................................................................................................. 17-18
Chapter 18 Store and Load ................................................................. 18-1
Storage System .................................................................................... 18-2
RIGOL Contents
XX MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Storage Type ....................................................................................... 18-2
Load Type ........................................................................................... 18-4
Internal Storage and Load..................................................................... 18-4
External Storage and Load .................................................................... 18-6
Binary Data Format (.bin) ..................................................................... 18-6
Binary Header Format .................................................................... 18-7
Disk Management ................................................................................ 18-9
To Select a File Type .................................................................... 18-10
To Create a Folder ....................................................................... 18-10
To Delete a File or Folder .............................................................. 18-14
To Copy and Paste a File or Folder ................................................. 18-15
To Rename a File or Folder ........................................................... 18-15
To Clear the Internal Memory Safely .............................................. 18-15
Factory Settings ................................................................................. 18-16
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting ....................................... 19-1
Remote Interface Configuration ............................................................. 19-2
LAN Configuration .......................................................................... 19-2
To Set mDNS ................................................................................. 19-5
To Set Host Name .......................................................................... 19-5
To Set the GPIB Address ................................................................ 19-6
To Set HDMI ................................................................................. 19-6
USB Connection ............................................................................. 19-6
System-related .................................................................................... 19-7
Beeper ......................................................................................... 19-7
Language ..................................................................................... 19-7
System Information ....................................................................... 19-7
Power On ...................................................................................... 19-7
Power Status ................................................................................. 19-8
Aux Output ................................................................................... 19-8
Help ............................................................................................. 19-8
Self-calibration .............................................................................. 19-9
Auto Config ................................................................................. 19-10
Print Setting ................................................................................ 19-10
Email .......................................................................................... 19-12
Key Locker .................................................................................. 19-13
Quick Operation .......................................................................... 19-13
Screen Saver ............................................................................... 19-17
Self-check ................................................................................... 19-17
System Time ............................................................................... 19-19
Default Option ............................................................................. 19-19
Chapter 20 Remote Control ............................................................... 20-1
Remote Control via USB ........................................................................ 20-2
Remote Control via LAN ........................................................................ 20-6
Remote Control via GPIB ....................................................................... 20-7
Contents RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide XXI
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting ............................................................... 21-1
Chapter 22 Appendix .......................................................................... 22-1
Appendix A: Accessories and Options ..................................................... 22-1
Appendix B: Warranty ........................................................................... 22-3
Index .............................................................................................. 1
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-1
Chapter 1 Quick Start
This chapter introduces the precautions when using the oscilloscope for the first time,
the front/rear panels of the oscilloscope, the user interface, touch screen controls,
and how to use the built-in help system.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ General Inspection
◼ Appearance and Dimensions
◼ To Prepare for Use
◼ Front Panel Overview
◼ Rear Panel Overview
◼ Front Panel Function Overview
◼ User Interface
◼ Touch Screen Controls
◼ Parameter Setting Method
◼ To Use the Security Lock
◼ To Use the Built-in Help System
◼ To View the Option Information and the Option Installation
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
General Inspection
1
． Inspect the packaging
If the packaging has been damaged, do not dispose the damaged packaging or
cushioning materials until the shipment has been checked for completeness and
has passed both electrical and mechanical tests.
The consigner or carrier shall be liable for the damage to the instrument
resulting from shipment. RIGOL would not be responsible for free
maintenance/rework or replacement of the instrument.
2
． Inspect the instrument
In case of any mechanical damage, missing parts, or failure in passing the
electrical and mechanical tests, contact your RIGOL sales representative.
3． Check the accessories
Please check the accessories according to the packing lists. If the accessories
are damaged or incomplete, please contact your RIGOL sales representative.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Prepare for Use
To Adjust the Supporting Legs
Adjust the supporting legs properly to use them as stands to tilt the oscilloscope
upwards for stable placement of the oscilloscope as well as better operation and
observation. Users can also fold the supporting legs when the instrument is not in
use for easier storage or shipment, as shown in Figure 1-3.
(a) To unfold the supporting legs
(b) To fold the supporting legs
Figure 1-3 To Adjust the Supporting Legs
To Connect to AC Power
The input AC power requirements of the oscilloscope are 100~240 V, 45~440 Hz.
Please use the power cord provided in the accessories to connect the oscilloscope to
the AC power source via the power cord connector, as shown in Figure 1-4. After you
turn on the power switch, the oscilloscope is connected to power, and the Power key
located at the lower-left corner of the front panel is blinking.
AC 100-240V , 45-440Hz
~Line:200W Max
~Fuse:AC 250V T3.15A
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE INSIDE
DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER UNLESS BY SPECIFIED PERSONNEL.
WARNING: MAINTAIN GROUND TOAVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK
EXT TRIG
TRIG OUT
HOST
DEVICE
LAN
Figure 1-4 To Connect to AC Power
CAUTION
To avoid electric shock, ensure that the instrument is correctly grounded.
Power Cord Connector
Supporting Legs
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-5
Turn-on Checkout
When the oscilloscope is connected to power, press the Power key at the lower-left
corner of the front panel to start the oscilloscope. (You can also press Utility →
System → Power status, and select "Switch On". After the instrument is
connected to power source, it will start directly. You can also enable the touch screen
to perform the above operations.) During the start-up process, the oscilloscope
performs a series of self-tests. After the self-test, the welcome screen is displayed.
To Replace the Fuse
If you need to replace the fuse, use only the specified fuse (AC 250V, T3.15A;
5.2mm×20mm) and perform the following operations (as shown in Figure 1-5):
1． Turn off the instrument, cut off the power and remove the power cord.
2． Insert a slotted screwdriver into the slot of the fuse holder to pry it out.
3． Take out the fuse.
4． Replace the old fuse with a specified fuse.
5． Install the fuse holder.
Tip
Restart and Shutdown:
1. Enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon
at the
lower-left corner of the screen to enable the function navigation.
2. Tap the "Restart" icon, and then the "Restart" selection menu is displayed,
as shown in the figure below:
3. If you tap the "Restart" icon
, the oscilloscope will be powered off and
then automatically restart again. If you tap the "Shutdown" icon
, the
oscilloscope is powered off (you can also press the Power key at the
lower-left corner of the front panel to turn off the oscilloscope).
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-6 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Figure 1-5 To Replace the Fuse
WARNING
To avoid electric shock, please ensure that the instrument has been turned
off, the power source has been cut off, and the fuse to be used conforms
to the fuse rating.
To Connect the Probe
RIGOL provides the passive probe, the active probe, and the logic probe for
MSO7000/DS7000 series. For specific probe models, please refer to
MSO7000/DS7000 Series Datasheet
. For detailed technical information of the probes,
please refer to the specified Probe User Guide.
Connect the passive probe:
1. Connect the BNC terminal of the probe to an analog channel input terminal of
the oscilloscope on the front panel, as shown in Figure 1-6.
2. Connect the ground alligator clip or spring of the probe to the circuit ground
terminal, and then connect the probe tip to the circuit point to be tested.
Figure 1-6 To Connect the Passive Probe
After you connect the passive probe, check the probe function and probe
compensation adjustment before making measurements. For detailed procedures,
Fuse Holder
Fuse
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-7
refer to "Function Inspection" and "Probe Compensation".
Connect the active probe:
Take RP7080 (active differential probe head) as an example.
1. Connect the probe head to the preamp of the active probe, as shown in Figure
1-7.
Figure 1-7 To Connect the Probe Head to the Preamp of the Active Probe
2. Connect the other end of the preamp to an analog channel input terminal of the
oscilloscope on the front panel, as shown in Figure 1-8. Note that you should
push the probe to the end to ensure that it is tightly connected.
Figure 1-8 To Connect the Active Probe
3. Use the probe auxiliary equipment to connect the probe front to the circuit
under test. For details about the probes, refer to
RP7000 Series Active Probe
User Guide
.
After connecting the active probe, you can perform probe calibration and offset
voltage adjustment if necessary. For detailed procedures, refer to the "Active
Probe" section.
Connect the logic probe:
1. Connect the single-wire terminal of the logic probe to the digital channel input
terminal on the front panel of the oscilloscope in the correct direction, as shown
in Figure 1-9.
2. Connect the other terminal of the logic probe to the signal terminal under test.
RIGOL's MSO7000 series has a standard configuration of a logic probe RPL2316.
To apply to different application scenarios, RPL2316 provides three connection
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-8 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
methods to connect the signal under test. For details, refer to
RPL2316 Logic
Probe User Guide
.
Figure 1-9 To Connect the Logic Probe
Note:
⚫ Before you connect the logic probe to the signal under test, connect logic
probe's adapter provided in the accessories to its corresponding channel group.
⚫ The digital channel input terminal does not support hot plugging. Please do not
insert or pull out the logic probe when the instrument is in power-on state.
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-9
Function Inspection
1. Press Default on the front panel, then a prompt message "Restore default?" is
displayed. Press OK or tap OK to restore the instrument to its factory default
settings.
2. Connect the ground alligator clip of the probe to the "Ground Terminal" as
shown in Figure 1-10 below.
3. Use the probe to connect the input terminal of CH1 of the oscilloscope and the
"Compensation Signal Output Terminal" of the probe, as shown in Figure 1-10.
Figure 1-10 To Use the Compensation Signal
4. Set the probe attenuation to 10X, and then press AUTO.
5. Observe the waveform on the display. In normal condition, the square waveform
as shown in Figure 1-11 should be displayed.
Figure 1-11 Square Waveform Signal
6. Use the same method to test the other channels. If the square waveforms
actually shown do not match that in the figure above, please perform "Probe
Compensation" introduced in the next section.
WARNING
To avoid electric shock when using the probe, please make sure that the
insulated wire of the probe is in good condition. Do not touch the
metallic part of the probe when the probe is connected to high voltage
source.
Compensation Signal Output Terminal
Ground Terminal
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-10 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Probe Compensation
When the probes are used for the first time, you should compensate the probes to
make them match the input channels of the oscilloscope. Non-compensated or
poorly compensated probes may cause measurement inaccuracy or errors. The
probe compensation procedures are as follows:
1. Perform Step 1, 2, 3 and 4 specified in "Function Inspection".
2. Check the displayed waveforms and compare them with Figure 1-12.
Figure 1-12 Probe Compensation
3. Use a nonmetallic screwdriver to adjust the low-frequency compensation
adjustment hole on the probe until the waveform is displayed as "Perfectly
compensated" in the figure above.
Tip
The probe compensation signal can only be used for probe compensation
adjustment and cannot be used for calibration.
Over compensated Perfectly compensated Under compensated
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-11
Front Panel Overview
Figure 1-13 Front Panel
Table 1-1 Front Panel Description
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
Capacitive Touch Screen
11
RUN/STOP Key
2
Function Menu Operation Keys
12
Single Trigger Control Key
3
Quick Key (Shortcut Key)
13
Trigger Control System
4
Multifunction Knob
14
Vertical Control System
5
Common Operation Keys
15
Analog Channel Input
Terminals
6
Touch Lock Key
16
Probe Compensation Signal
Output Terminal/Ground
Terminal
7
Horizontal Control System
17
Digital Channel Input
Interface
[1]
8
CLEAR Key
18
Dual-channel
Function/Arbitrary
Waveform Generator Output
Terminals
[2]
9
Auto Waveform Display Key
19
USB HOST Interface
10
Waveform Control System
20
Power Key
Note:
[1]
This function is only available for the MSO7000 model.
Note:
[2]
This function is only available for the MSO7000 model installed with the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator option.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
20 19 18 17 16 15 14
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-12 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Rear Panel Overview
Figure 1-14 Rear Panel
1. Handle
Rotate the handle upright to carry the instrument easily. Rotate it
downward if you do not need to carry it.
2. LAN Interface
Connect the instrument to network via this interface. The instrument is in
compliance with the standards specified in LXI Device Specification 2011. It
can be used to set up a test system.
When you access to the Internet, you can use the Web Control or PC
software Ultra Scope to send the SCPI commands or use the user-defined
programming to control the instrument. When update is available, you can
perform online upgrading for the system software of the instrument via the
LAN interface. After it is connected to the network, you can print the
waveform displayed on the screen when you use the network printer.
1 2 3 4 5
10 9 8 7 6
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-13
3. USB DEVICE Interface
You can connect the instrument to the PC via this interface. Then you can
use the PC software Ultra Scope to send the SCPI commands or use the
user-defined programming to control the instrument.
4. USB HOST Interface
You can connect the storage device that is compatible with the USB to the
instrument via the USB HOST interface.
Connecting the storage device can save or recall the waveform files and
setup files; as well as save the data and screen image. When update is
available, you can perform local upgrading for the system software of the
instrument via the USB HOST interface.
5. HDMI Video Output
You can connect the instrument to an external display equipped with the
HDMI interface (e.g. monitor or projector) via the Video Output interface
to better observe the waveform display clearly. At this time, you can also
view the waveforms on the LCD of the instrument.
Tip
After the oscilloscope is connected to network (if you do not have the access
to the Internet, please ask the administrator to open the specified network
authority), you can perform online upgrading for the system software:
1) Enable the touch screen function. Tap the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the touch screen to enable the function
navigation.
2) Tap the "Help" icon, and then the "Help" menu is displayed on the
screen.
3) Press Online upgrade or enable the touch screen to tap "Online
upgrade", then a "System Update Information" window is displayed,
requesting you whether to accept or cancel "RIGOL PRODUCT ONLINE
UPGRADE SERVICE TERMS". Tap "Accept" to start online upgrade. Tap
"Cancel" to cancel the online upgrade.
Tip
Perform local upgrading for the system software:
1) Insert the USB storage device (stored with upgrading files under its root
directory) into the USB HOST interface, and then the "Help" menu is
automatically displayed.
2) Press Local upgrade or enable the touch screen to tap "Local
upgrade", then a dialog box "Upgrade system firmware?" is displayed.
3) Press OK or enable the touch screen to tap "OK" to start local upgrade
for the oscilloscope. If you tap "Cancel", the local upgrade will be
cancelled.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-14 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
6. EXT TRIG
Inputs the external signal via the external input terminal.
7. Trigger Out and Pass/Fail
⚫ TRIG OUT:
The oscilloscope can output a signal that can reflect the current
capture rate of the oscilloscope at each trigger via this interface.
Connect the signal to a waveform display device and measure the
frequency of the signal. The measurement result is the same as the
current capture rate.
⚫ Pass/Fail
The instrument can output a pulse from the [TRIG OUT] connector
when a pass/failed event is detected during the pass/fail test.
8. Lock Hole
You can lock the instrument to a fixed location by using the security lock
(please purchase it by yourself) via the lock hole.
9. Fuse
If you need to replace the fuse, use only the specified fuse. For details, refer
to descriptions in "To Replace the Fuse".
10. AC Power Cord Connector
Indicates the input terminal where AC power source is connected. The
power supply requirements of the instrument are: 100 V~240 V; 45
Hz~440 Hz. Please use the power cord provided in the accessories to
connect the oscilloscope to the AC power source.
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-15
Front Panel Function Overview
Vertical
⚫ 1, 2, 3, 4: indicates the analog channel switch key. The four channels are
marked by different colors which are also used to mark both the corresponding
waveforms of the specified channel on the screen and the channel input
connectors.
⚫ GI, GII: indicates the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator setting key.
Press GI to enable or disable the output of the [GI] connector on the front
panel; press GII to enable or disable the output of the [GII] connector on the
front panel; and then enter the corresponding Function/Arbitrary Waveform
Generator setting interface. Enable or disable the status display of the current
signal.
Note: This function is only available for the MSO7000 model installed with the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator option.
⚫ Default: indicates the default setting key. Press this key to restore the
instrument to its factory default settings.
⚫ Vertical
OFFSET: indicates the channel vertical offset knob. You can
rotate the knob to modify the vertical offset of the current channel waveform.
Each analog channel is configured with an independent vertical offset
adjustment knob. Turn it clockwise to increase the offset, and turn it
counterclockwise to decrease the offset. During the modification, the waveform
would move up and down. Meanwhile, the offset information in the
corresponding status label would change accordingly. Press down this knob to
quickly reset the vertical offset to zero.
⚫ Vertical
SCALE: indicates the channel vertical scale knob. Modify the
vertical scale of the current channel. Each analog channel is configured with an
independent vertical scale adjustment knob. Turn it clockwise to decrease the
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-16 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
scale, and turn it counterclockwise to increase the scale. During the
modification, the display amplitude of the waveform will enlarge or reduce. The
scale information in the corresponding status label will change accordingly.
Press down this knob to quickly switch the vertical scale adjustment mode
between "Coarse" and "Fine".
Horizontal
⚫ Zoom: indicates the delayed sweep key. Press this key to enable or disable the
delayed sweep function.
⚫ Search: indicates the Search key. Press this key to enter the search setting
menu. The search function allows you to search for relevant events from the
collected data based on the search condition that you set.
⚫
: indicates the navigation combination key. With the
combination keys, you can perform recording & playing navigation, time
navigation, and event navigation.
⚫ Horizontal
POSITION: indicates the horizontal position knob. You can
rotate the knob to modify the horizontal position (i.g. trigger position). The
trigger point would move left or right relative to the center of the screen when
you rotate the knob. During the modification, waveforms of all the channels
would move left or right, and the horizontal position message (e.g. )
at the upper-right corner of the screen would change accordingly. Press down
this knob to quickly reset the horizontal position (or the delayed sweep
position).
⚫ Horizontal
SCALE: indicates the horizontal time base knob. You can rotate
the knob to modify the horizontal time base. Turn it clockwise to decrease the
time base, and turn it counterclockwise to increase the time base. During the
modification, waveforms of all the channels will be displayed in expanded or
compressed form, and the time base message (e.g. ) at the upper
section of the screen would change accordingly. Press down this knob to quickly
switch the horizontal time base adjustment mode between "Coarse" and "Fine".
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-17
Wave
⚫ Math: indicates the math operation key. Press this key to enable the math
operation function. The math operations include A+B, A-B, A×B, A/B, FFT, and
etc. Besides, you can also set the math operation label.
⚫ LA: indicates the logic analyzer key. Press this key to open the logic analyzer
control menu. You can enable or disable any channel or channel group, modify
the waveform sizes of the digital channel, modify the threshold of the digital
channel, and group the 16 digital channels. Besides, you can also set a label for
each digital channel.
Note: This function is only available for the MSO7000 model.
⚫ Ref: indicates the reference waveform key. Press this key to open the reference
waveform setting menu. You can compare the actually measured waveform with
the reference waveform to locate the circuit failure.
⚫ Decode: indicates the decode key. Press this key to open the decode setting
menu, and then you can set the decode options. MSO7000/DS7000 series
supports the parallel decoding and many protocol decodings. (For details, refer
to the descriptions in "Protocol Decoding").
⚫ Wave Vertical
POSITION: indicates the waveform vertical position knob.
Rotate the knob to adjust the vertical position of the current digital channel
waveform, the vertical position of the math operation waveform, the vertical
position of the reference waveform, or the vertical display position of the bus
decoding.
⚫ Wave Vertical SCALE: indicates the waveform vertical scale knob. Rotate
the knob to adjust the vertical scale of math operation waveform or the vertical
scale of the reference waveform, and also can adjust the size of the displayed
digital channel waveforms.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-18 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Trigger
⚫ Menu: Press this key to open the trigger operation menu.
This oscilloscope provides various trigger types.
⚫ Mode: Press this key to switch the trigger mode to Auto
Normal, or Single.
⚫ Force: Press this key to generate a trigger signal
forcefully.
⚫ Trigger
LEVEL: modifies the trigger level/threshold
level. Turn it clockwise to increase the level, and turn it
counterclockwise to decrease the level. During the
modification, the trigger level line would move up and
down and the trigger level/threshold level value at the
upper-right corner of the screen would change accordingly.
Press down the knob to quickly set the trigger level to 50%
of the waveform peak-peak value.
Clear
Press this key to clear all the waveforms on the screen. If the
oscilloscope is in the "RUN" state, new waveforms will
continue being displayed.
Auto
Press this key to enable the waveform auto setting function.
The oscilloscope will automatically adjust the vertical scale,
horizontal time base, and trigger mode according to the input
signal to realize optimal waveform display.
RUN/STOP
Press this key to set the operating state of the oscilloscope to
"RUN" or "STOP". In the "RUN" state, the key is illuminated
in yellow. In the "STOP" state, the key is illuminated in red.
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-19
Single
Press this key to set the trigger mode to "Single".
Multifunction knob
⚫ Non-menu Operation:
In non-menu-operation mode, rotate this knob to adjust the brightness of
waveform display. The settable screen brightness ranges from 1% to 100%.
Turn it clockwise to increase the brightness, and turn it counterclockwise to
decrease the brightness. Press Display → Intensity to adjust the waveform
brightness. You can also use the knob to adjust it.
⚫ Menu Operation:
When you operate on the menu, the backlight of the knob is illuminated. For the
menu item that has multiple parameters under it, when you press the menu
softkey, rotate the knob to select the parameter item, then press down the knob
to select it (sometimes, the specified parameter item can be selected by rotating
the knob). The knob can also be used to modify parameters, input the filename,
etc.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-20 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Function Menu
Measure: Press this key to enter the measurement setting menu. You can set the
measurement source, enable or disable the all measurement function, the statistical
analysis function, and etc. You can make a quick measurement for 41 waveform
parameters.
Acquire: Press this key to enter the acquisition setting menu. You can set the time
base mode, the acquisition mode, memory depth, and etc.
Storage: Press this key to enter the file or waveform storage and load interface. The
file types for storage include image, waveform, and setups. Besides, waveform load
and setup load are supported. The disk management and file auto naming function
are also supported in this menu.
Cursor: Press this key to enter the cursor measurement menu. The oscilloscope
provides four cursor modes: Manual, Track, XY, and Measure. Note that XY cursor
mode is only available when the horizontal time base is set to "XY".
Display: Press this key to enter the display setting menu. You can set the display
type, persistence time, wave intensity, and etc.
Utility: Press this key to enter the system function setting menu. You can set
system-related functions or parameters, such as I/O, sound, language, and etc.
Besides, some advanced functions (such as the pass/fail test, waveform recording,
and self-calibration) are also supported.
Touch Lock Key
Press this key to disable the touch screen function.
Note: By default, the touch screen function of the oscilloscope is always enabled. If
you disable the function, press the key again to enable it.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-22 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
User Interface
MSO7000/DS7000 series has a 10.1-inch WSVGA (1024×600) LCD, with 256 level
gray-scale display. The user interface displays the acquired waveforms, the setting
information, and the measurement results.
Figure 1-15 User Interface
1. Digital Channel Label/Waveform
The logic high and low level of the digital waveform are displayed in green. Its
edge is displayed in white. The color of the currently selected waveform of the
digital channel is consistent with that of the channel label, being displayed in red.
The grouping setting function under the logic analyzer function menu can divide
the digital channels into 4 channel groups. The channel label of the same
channel group is displayed in the same color; different channel groups are
marked with different colors.
Note: This function is only available for the MSO7000 model.
2. Operating Status
Available states include RUN, STOP, T’D (triggered), WAIT, and AUTO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-23
3. Horizontal Time Base
⚫ Represents the time length per grid in the horizontal axis of the screen.
⚫ Use Horizontal
SCALE to modify this parameter. The adjustable range
of the horizontal time base is different for different models.
4. Sample Rate/Memory Depth
⚫ Displays the current sample rate and memory depth of the analog channel.
⚫ The sample rate and the memory depth will change along with the
horizontal time base.
5. Auto Measurement Label
Enable the touch screen, and then tap the label. Up to 41 waveform parameters
are available for auto measurement. It also offers full-memory hardware
measurement function.
6. Waveform Memory
Provides a diagram of the position of the screen waveform in the memory.
7. Trigger Position
Displays the trigger position of the screen waveform and that of the waveform in
the memory.
8. Run/Stop Label
In the run state, the label is displayed in green; while in the stop state, it is
displayed in red. You can enable the touch screen to tap the icon "STOP/RUN" to
control its operating status.
9. Horizontal Position
Use Horizontal
POSITION to modify this parameter. Press down this knob
to quickly reset the horizontal position.
10. Trigger Type
Displays the currently selected trigger type and trigger condition setting. When
you select different trigger types, different labels are displayed. For example,
represents triggering on the rising edge in "Edge" trigger.
11. Trigger Source
Displays the currently selected trigger source (CH1-CH4, AC Line, EXT, or
D0-D15). When you select different trigger sources, different labels are
displayed. For example,
denotes that CH1 is selected as the trigger source.
screen waveform
waveform in the memory
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-24 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
12. Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
⚫ When CH1-CH4 or EXT is selected as the trigger source, you need to set a
proper trigger level.
⚫ When D0-D15 is selected as the trigger source, you need to set a proper
threshold level.
⚫ The trigger level label is displayed at the left section of the screen, and
the trigger level/threshold level value is displayed at the upper-right corner
of the screen.
⚫ When you use Trigger
LEVEL to modify the trigger level/threshold
level, the trigger level/threshold level value will change with the up and
down of
.
Note: In Slope Trigger, Runt Trigger, and Window trigger, you need to set the
upper and lower limits of the trigger level, and two trigger level labels ( and
) are displayed.
13. Operation Menu
Press any softkey on the front panel to activate the corresponding menu.
14. Notification Area
Displays the beeper icon, the USB storage device icon, time, and the LAN
connection icon.
⚫ Beeper icon: Press Utility → Beeper to turn on or off the beeper. When
the beeper is turned on, will be displayed; when off, will be
displayed.
⚫ USB storage device icon: When a USB storage device is detected, will be
displayed.
⚫ Time: displays the system time. For the system time setting, refer to
descriptions in "System Time".
⚫ LAN connection icon: When the LAN interface is successfully connected,
will be displayed.
15. AWG 2
⚫ Displays the on/off status of AWG 2.
⚫ Displays the waveform type set for the current AWG2.
⚫ It is only available for the MSO7000 model installed with the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator option.
16. AWG 1
⚫ Displays the on/off status of AWG 1.
⚫ Displays the waveform type set for the current AWG1.
⚫ It is only available for the MSO7000 model installed with the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator option.
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-25
17. Digital Channel Status Area
Displays the current status of the 16 digital channels. The digital channels
currently turned on are displayed in green, and the currently selected digital
channel is highlighted in red. The digital channels turned off are displayed in
gray.
Note: This function is only available for the MSO7000 model.
18. CH4 Status Label
⚫ Displays the status of CH4.
⚫ Displays the vertical scale of CH4. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH4
in the vertical axis.
⚫ Displays the offset of CH4, i.g. the vertical offset of CH4 waveform.
⚫ Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting.
For example, if you select "DC" for channel coupling,
is displayed; if you
enable the bandwidth limit,
is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for
impedance,
is displayed.
19. Message Box
Displays the prompt messages.
20. CH3 Status Label
⚫ Displays the status of CH3.
⚫ Displays the vertical scale of CH3. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH3
in the vertical axis.
⚫ Displays the offset of CH3, i.g. the vertical offset of CH3 waveform.
⚫ Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting.
For example, if you select "DC" for channel coupling,
is displayed; if you
enable the bandwidth limit,
is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for
impedance,
is displayed.
21. CH2 Status Label
⚫ Displays the status of CH2.
⚫ Displays the vertical scale of CH2. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH2
in the vertical axis.
⚫ Displays the offset of CH2, i.g. the vertical offset of CH2 waveform.
⚫ Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting.
For example, if you select "DC" for channel coupling, is displayed; if you
enable the bandwidth limit, is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for
impedance,
is displayed.
22. CH1 Status Label
⚫ Displays the status of CH1.
⚫ Displays the vertical scale of CH1. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH1
in the vertical axis.
⚫ Displays the offset of CH1, i.g. the vertical offset of CH1 waveform.
⚫ Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-26 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
For example, if you select "DC" for channel coupling, is displayed; if you
enable the bandwidth limit,
is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for
impedance,
is displayed.
23. Analog Channel Label/Waveform
Different channels are marked with different colors. The color of the channel
label is the same as that of the waveform.
24. Function Navigation
Enable the touch screen and then tap this icon to enable the function navigation.
Touch Screen Controls
MSO7000/DS7000 series provides a 10.1-inch super large capacitive touch screen,
which supports multi-touch and gesture operation. It has strong waveform display
capability and excellent user experience. It features great convenience, high
flexibility, and great sensitivity. The actions supported by the touch screen controls
include tapping, pinching & stretching, dragging, and rectangle drawing.
Tap
Use one finger to touch the symbol or characters on the screen slightly, as shown in
Figure 1-16. The functions of the tap action include:
⚫ Tap the menu displayed on the screen to operate on the menu.
⚫ Tap the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the touch screen
to enable the function navigation.
⚫ Tap the displayed numeric keypad to set the parameters.
⚫ Tap the virtual keypad to set the label name and the filename.
⚫ Tap the close button at the upper-right corner of the message box to close the
prompt window.
⚫ Tap other windows on the touch screen and operate on the windows.
Tip
The touch screen function is available for all the menus displayed on the screen
and the buttons enabled. In this manual, key operation descriptions are illustrated
in details, and as for the touch screen function about some operations, refer to
descriptions in relevant chapters.
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-27
Figure 1-16 Tap Gesture
Pinch & Stretch
Pinch or stretch two points on the screen with two fingers to zoom in or out the
waveform. To zoom in the waveform, first pinch the two fingers and then stretch the
fingers; to zoom out the waveform, first stretch the two fingers, and then pinch the
fingers together, as shown in Figure 1-17. The functions of the pinch & stretch action
include:
⚫ Pinching & stretching in the horizontal direction can adjust the horizontal time
base of the waveform.
⚫ Pinching & stretching in the vertical direction can adjust the vertical scale of the
waveform.
Figure 1-17 Pinch & Stretch Gesture
Drag
Use one finger to select the object, and then drag the object to a destination place,
as shown in Figure 1-18. The functions of the drag action include:
⚫ Drag the waveform to change its position or offset.
⚫ Drag the window controls to change the positions of the window (e.g. numeric
keypad).
⚫ Drag the marker to change the position of the marker.
Figure 1-18 Drag Gesture
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-28 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Rectangle Drawing
Enable the function navigation, and then tap the "Draw rect" icon to switch to the
rectangle drawing mode. Drag a finger from upper left to lower right across the
screen to draw a rectangle on the screen, as shown in Figure 1-19 (a). Move your
finger away from the screen, and then a menu is displayed on the screen. At this time,
you can tap to select "Trigger zone A", "Trigger zone B", "Histogram", "Horizontal
zoom in", "Vertical zoom in", or "Waveform zoom in". Drag a finger from lower right
to upper left across the screen to draw a rectangle on the screen, as shown in Figure
1-19 (b). Move your finger away from the screen, and then a menu is displayed on
the screen. At this time, you can tap to select "Trigger zone A", "Trigger zone B",
"Histogram", "Horizontal zoom out", "Vertical zoom out", or "Waveform zoom out".
(a) (b)
Figure 1-19 Rectangle Drawing Gesture
⚫ Select "Trigger zone A":
➢ Draw the region for Trigger zone A;
➢ Open Trigger zone A;
➢ Open the "Zone Trigger" menu.
⚫ Select "Trigger zone B":
➢ Draw the region for Trigger zone B;
➢ Open Trigger zone B;
➢ Open the "Zone Trigger" menu.
⚫ Select "Histogram":
➢ Draw the region for the histogram;
➢ Open the "Histogram" menu.
⚫ Select "Horizontal zoom in": expands the waveforms in the horizontal direction.
Select "Horizontal zoom out": compresses the waveforms in the horizontal
direction.
⚫ Select "Vertical zoom in": expands the waveforms in the vertical direction. Select
"Vertical zoom out": compresses the waveforms in the vertical direction.
⚫ Select "Waveform zoom in": expands the waveforms both in the horizontal and
vertical direction. Select "Waveform zoom out": compresses the waveforms both
in the horizontal and vertical direction.
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-29
Tip
Tap the "Draw rect" icon to switch between the rectangle drawing and waveform
operation modes.
Tap the "Draw rect" icon, if
is displayed, it indicates that the rectangle
drawing mode is enabled. Tap the "Draw rect" icon, if is displayed, it indicates
that the waveform operation mode is enabled. By default, the waveform operation
mode is enabled.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-30 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Parameter Setting Method
You can use the knob or enable the touch screen to set the parameters of
MSO7000/DS7000 series. The common parameter setting methods are as follows:
Method 1:
For the parameters with the sign
, rotate the multifunction knob on the front
panel directly to select the parameter item or modify the parameter value.
Method 2:
For the parameters with the sign
, rotate the multifunction knob on the front
panel and press it down to select the parameter item or modify the parameter value.
Method 3:
For the parameters with
displayed on the menu, rotate the multifunction knob
on the front panel directly to set the parameter, or press down the multifunction
knob
or the specified menu softkey, and then the numeric keypad is shown in
Figure 1-20 below.
Figure 1-20 Numeric Keypad
In the numeric keypad, rotate the multifunction knob to select the parameter,
then press down the knob to select it. Then input the value or the unit. You can also
enable the touch screen and tap the value or unit in the numeric keypad to input
them. After you input all the values and select the desired units, the numeric keypad
is turned off automatically. This indicates that you have completed parameter setting.
Besides, after you have input the values, you can also press OK directly to close the
numeric keypad. At this time, the unit of the parameter is the default unit. In the
numeric keypad, you can also perform the following operations:
⚫ Delete the parameter value that has been input.
⚫ Set the parameter to a maximum or minimum value (sometimes, the maximum
or minimum value are the specified one for the current state).
⚫ Set the parameter to a default value.
⚫ Clear the parameter input field.
Parameter
Input Field
Delete key
Max. value
Min. value
Default
Clear key
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-31
Method 4:
For the parameters without the above signs, press the desired menu softkey to
switch between the parameter items. This method is applicable to the parameters
with only two available options.
To Use the Security Lock
If necessary, you can lock the instrument to a fixed location by using the security lock
(please purchase it by yourself), as shown in Figure 1-21. The method is as follows:
align the lock with the lock hole and plug it into the lock hole vertically, turn the key
clockwise to lock the oscilloscope and then pull the key out.
Figure 1-21 To Use the Security Lock
Note: Please do not insert other objects into the security lock hole to avoid
damaging the instrument.
Tip
The above method is commonly used for the parameter settings of the
oscilloscope. For other methods of parameter settings, refer to details in relevant
chapters.
Security Lock Hole
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-32 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Use the Built-in Help System
The help system of this oscilloscope provides instructions for all the function keys on
the front panel and their corresponding menu keys. The steps for opening the built-in
help system are as follows:
1. Press Utility → System → Help, and then the "Help" menu is displayed
on the screen. You can also use the touch screen function, tap the function
navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the touch screen to enable the
function navigation. Tap the "Help" icon, and then the "Help" menu is displayed
on the screen.
2. Press Content or tap the "Content" menu item, and then the help information is
displayed on the screen, as shown in Figure 1-22. The help interface mainly
consists of two sections. The left section lists "Help Options", and the right
section is the "Help Display Area".
Figure 1-22 Help Information
After opening the help interface, you can get its help information in the "Help Display
Area" through the following three methods:
Method 1: For the keys, you can directly press the front-panel keys (except the
Power key, the Menu Off key, and the Back key) to obtain the help information. For
the buttons, you can rotate the knob or press down the knob to get the help
information (except the multifunction knob
, Wave Vertical POSITION
knob, and Wave Vertical SCALE knob). As the function of rotating the knob is
different from that of pressing down the knob, these two operations will give you
different help information.
Method 2: In the "Help Options", rotate the multifunction knob to switch
among the help options to get the corresponding help information.
Help Options Help Display Area
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-33
Method 3: Enable the touch screen and tap the desired help option to get the
corresponding help information.
To View the Option Information and the Option
Installation
MSO7000/DS7000 series oscilloscope provides multiple options to fulfill your
measurement requirements. If you need any of these options, order them according
to the Order No. available in "Appendix A: Accessories and Options", and then
install the options according to this section. Besides, you can also view the options
currently installed on the oscilloscope or activate the newly purchased option.
1. View the installed option
The instrument is installed with the trial versions of the options before leaving
factory. When you power on the instrument for the first time, the trial time is
about 2,160 minutes. If your instrument has currently installed the option,
perform the following operations to view the name of the installed option and
other detailed information about the option from the option list.
Tip
⚫ Help information for other keys and buttons:
➢ Power key: powers on/off the instrument.
➢ Menu Off key: displays or hides menus. Pressing this key can hide the
menus.
➢ Back key: returns to the previous menu or last set function menu.
➢ Multifunction knob : In non-menu-operation mode, rotate this knob to
adjust the brightness of waveform display. When you operate on the
menu, this knob is illuminated. For the menu that has multiple
sub-menus, press the corresponding softkey of the sub-menu, and then
rotate this knob to select the specified parameter item and press down
the knob to select it (sometimes you need to rotate the knob to select the
parameter item). It can also be used to modify parameters, input a
filename, etc.
➢ Wave Vertical
POSITION: rotating the knob can adjust the
vertical position of the waveform of the current digital channel, the
vertical position of the math operation waveform, the vertical position of
the reference waveform, or the vertical display position of the decoding
bus.
➢ Wave Vertical
SCALE: rotating the knob can adjust the vertical
scale of the math operation waveform or the vertical scale of the
reference waveform; adjust the display size of the waveform of the digital
channel.
⚫ If the menu item is grayed out, you cannot press the corresponding
front-panel menu key to obtain the help information. What you can do is only
to follow the above Method 2 or 3 to get the help information.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-34 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
(1) Press Utility → System → Help, and then the "Help" menu is displayed
on the screen. You can also use the touch screen function, tap the function
navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the touch screen to enable
the function navigation. Tap the "Help" icon, and then the "Help" menu is
displayed on the screen.
(2) Press the Option list key or tap the Option list menu item, and then a list
of the options installed is displayed on the screen for users to view.
2. Install the option
The option license is a string of fixed characters. Each instrument has one
unique license. The license file should be in specific format, with the filename
extension ".lic". After you purchase an option, you will obtain a key (used for
obtaining the license). Then, you can install the option according to the
following steps.
1) Obtain an option license
(1) Log in to the RIGOL official website (www.rigol.com), click License
Activation to enter the "Registered product license code" interface.
(2) In the software license registration interface, input the correct key,
serial number (press Utility → System → About to obtain the serial
number of the instrument. You can also open the "Help" function menu,
and then press About to obtain the serial number), and the
verification code. Click Generate to obtain the download link of the
option license file. If you need to use the option license file, please click
the link to download the file to the root directory of the USB storage
device.
2) Install the option
(1) Confirm that the option license file is located in the root directory of the
USB storage device, and connect the USB storage device to the
oscilloscope properly.
(2) The Option install key is activated, and press this menu key to start
installing the option.
(3) After installation, a prompt message "Option activated successfully" is
displayed.
Note: After the option has been installed, you are recommended to restart
the instrument.
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1-35
Tip
⚫ Only 1 option license file of one instrument is allowed to be stored in the
same USB storage device, but the USB storage device can store the option
license file of several different instruments. You are not allowed to modify
the licensed filename.
⚫ During the installation process, you are not allowed to power off the
instrument or pull out the USB storage device.
⚫ Sending the SCPI commands to install options is supported. For details, refer
to the :SYSTem:OPTion:INSTall command. Installing options by inputting
the license code manually is not supported.
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 2-1
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
MSO7000/DS7000 series provides four analog input channels (CH1-CH4), and each
channel is equipped with an independent vertical control system. The setting
methods for the vertical systems of the four channels are the same. This chapter
takes CH1 as an example to introduce the setting method for the vertical system. For
this oscilloscope, only CH1 is enabled by default.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel
◼ To Adjust the Vertical Scale
◼ Vertical Expansion
◼ To Adjust the Vertical Offset
◼ Channel Coupling
◼ Bandwidth Limit
◼ Probe Ratio
◼ Input Impedance
◼ Waveform Invert
◼ To Set the Probe
◼ Amplitude Unit
◼ Channel Delay
◼ Offset Cal
◼ Channel Label
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
2-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel
Enable the analog channel:
Connect a signal to the channel connector of CH1, and then press 1 in the vertical
control area (Vertical) on the front panel to enable CH1. Then, the backlight of the
channel is illuminated. At this point, the channel setting menu is displayed at the
right section of the screen and the channel is activated. The channel status label at
the bottom of the screen is shown in the figure below. You can also enable the touch
screen to tap the channel status label to enable the channel.
The information displayed in the channel status label is related to the current channel
setting but irrelevant with the on/off status of the channel. After the channel is
turned on, modify the parameters such as the vertical scale, horizontal time base,
trigger mode, and trigger level according to the input signal for easy observation and
measurement of the waveform.
If CH1 is enabled but not activated, the channel status label is shown in the following
figure. To activate the channel, press 1 on the front panel in the vertical control area
(Vertical) or enable the touch screen to tap the waveform activation channel
displayed on the screen.
Disable the analog channel:
If the setting menu of the channel that needs to be disabled (the current channel is
activated) is displayed at the right section of the screen, press the channel key to
disable the channel. If the setting menu of the channel that needs to be disabled is
not displayed at the right section of the screen, first open the setting menu of the
channel to be disabled (activate the channel), then press the channel key to disable
the channel. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the channel status label to
disable the channel. For example, if CH1 and CH2 are enabled, and CH2 channel
setting menu is displayed on the screen, then if you need to disable CH1, first
activate CH1, and then press 1 or enable the touch screen to tap the CH1 channel
status label to disable CH1. If CH1 is disabled, the channel status label is shown in
the following figure.
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 2-3
To Adjust the Vertical Scale
Vertical scale indicates the voltage value per grid in the vertical axis of the screen. It
is often expressed in V/div. While you adjust the vertical scale, the display amplitude
of the waveform would enlarge or reduce. The scale information of the channel
status label (e.g. as shown in the following figure) at the lower section of the screen
would change accordingly.
The adjustable range of the vertical scale is related to the currently set probe ratio
and input impedance. By default, the probe ratio is 1X and the input impedance is 1
MΩ. In this case, the adjustable range of the vertical scale is from 500 μV/div to 10
V/div.
When CH1 is turned on, you can adjust the vertical scale with the following three
methods:
⚫ Rotate Vertical
SCALE that corresponds to CH1 to adjust the vertical scale
(clockwise to reduce the scale and counterclockwise to increase).
⚫ Enable the touch screen function and adjust the vertical scale with the pinch &
stretch gesture on the touch screen. For details, refer to the "Pinch & Stretch"
section.
⚫ Enable the touch screen function, and tap the channel status label at the bottom
of the screen. The following window is displayed. Tap the
icon at the
right side of the Scale input field to decrease or increase the scale. You can also
tap the Scale input field to input a specific value with the displayed numeric
keypad.
In the vertical control area (Vertical) on the front panel, press Vertical SCALE
to adjust the vertical scale in "Coarse" (by default) or "Fine" mode. You can also
press 1 → More → Fine to enable or disable fine adjustment.
⚫ Fine adjustment: Rotate Vertical SCALE to further adjust the vertical scale
within a relatively smaller range to improve vertical resolution. If the amplitude
of the input waveform is a little bit greater than the full scale under the current
scale and the amplitude would be a little bit lower if the next scale is used, fine
adjustment can be used to improve the amplitude of waveform display to view
signal details.
Vertical Scale
Value Input Field Decrease Increase
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
2-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
⚫ Coarse adjustment (take counterclockwise as an example): Rotate Vertical
SCALE to set the vertical scale at 1-2-5 step, i.e. 500 μV/div, 1 mV/div, 2 mV/div,
5 mV/div, 10 mV/div…10 V/div.
Vertical Expansion
When changing the vertical scale of the analog channel by rotating the Vertical
SCALE knob, you can select to expand or compress the waveform around the
"Center" or "GND" (Ground). By default, "GND" is selected under Expand.
Press 1 → More, then press Expand continuously to select "Center" or "GND".
⚫ Center: when the vertical scale is changed, the waveform will be expanded or
compressed around the screen center.
⚫ GND: when the vertical scale is changed, the waveform will be expanded or
compressed around the signal ground level position.
To Adjust the Vertical Offset
Vertical offset indicates the offset of the signal ground level position of the waveform
from the screen center in the vertical direction. Its unit is consistent with the
currently selected amplitude unit (refer to "Amplitude Unit"). When adjusting the
vertical offset, the waveforms of the corresponding channel moves up and down.
The vertical offset information (as shown in the following figure) in the channel
status label at the bottom of the screen will change accordingly.
The adjustable range of the vertical offset is related to the current input impedance,
probe ratio, and vertical scale.
When CH1 is turned on, you can adjust the vertical offset with the following four
methods:
⚫ Rotate Vertical OFFSET that corresponds to CH1 to adjust the vertical
offset within the adjustable range. Rotate this knob clockwise to increase the
vertical offset, and rotate it counterclockwise to reduce the vertical offset.
Pressing down the knob can quickly reset the vertical offset (set the vertical
offset to 0).
⚫ Menu setting: Press 1 → More → Offset, and then the numeric keypad is
displayed. Input the offset value with the numeric keypad.
⚫ Enable the touch screen, and then adjust the vertical offset with the drag
gesture. For details, refer to the "Drag" section.
⚫ Enable the touch screen function, and tap the channel status label at the bottom
Vertical Offset
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 2-5
of the screen. The following window is displayed. Tap the icon at the
right side of the Offset input field to decrease or increase the offset. You can
also tap the Offset input field to input a specific value with the displayed
numeric keypad.
Channel Coupling
The undesired signals can be filtered out by setting the coupling mode. For example,
the signal under test is a square waveform with DC offset.
⚫ When the coupling mode is "DC": the DC and AC components of the signal under
test can both pass the channel.
⚫ When the coupling mode is "AC": the DC components of the signal under test
are blocked.
⚫ When the coupling mode is "GND", the DC and AC components of the signal
under test are both blocked.
Press 1 to open the setting menu of CH1. Then, press Coupling continuously or
rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired coupling mode (by default, it
is DC). The current coupling mode is displayed in the channel status label at the
bottom of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You can also enable the touch
screen, and then touch the CH1 setting menu to select the desired coupling mode.
DC AC GND
Note:
⚫ When the input impedance is set to "50 Ω", the channel coupling is set to DC
coupling by force, and the Coupling menu is grayed out and cannot be
modified.
⚫ When the coupling mode is "AC", the input impedance is set to 1 MΩ by force,
and the Impedance menu is grayed out and cannot be modified.
Value Input Field Decrease Increase
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
2-6 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Bandwidth Limit
MSO/DS7000 series supports the bandwidth limit function. Setting the bandwidth
limit can reduce the noises in the displayed waveforms. For example, the signal
under test is a pulse with high frequency oscillation.
⚫ When the bandwidth limit is disabled, the high frequency components of the
signal under test can pass the channel.
⚫ When you enable the bandwidth limit and limit it to 20 MHz or 250 MHz, the high
frequency components found in the signal under test that are greater than 20
MHz or 250 MHz are attenuated.
Press 1 to open the setting menu of CH1.Then, press BW Limit continuously or
rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired bandwidth limit. Press down
the knob to select it. By default, it is OFF. When the bandwidth limit is enabled, the
character "B" will be displayed in the channel status label at the bottom of the screen,
as shown in the figure below. You can also enable the touch screen, and then tap the
CH1 setting menu to select the desired bandwidth limit.
The bandwidth limit that you select is based on the bandwidth of your oscilloscope
model, as shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Bandwidth Limit
Bandwidth of the Oscilloscope
Model
Available Bandwidth Limit
100 M (MSO7014/DS7014)
20 M
200 M (MSO7024/DS7024)
20 M
350 M and 500 M
(MSO7034/MSO7054/DS7034/DS7054)
20 M, 250 M
Note:
Bandwidth limit can not only reduce the noise, but also can attenuate or
eliminate the high frequency components of the signal.
Probe Ratio
MSO/DS7000 series allows you to set the probe attenuation manually. To obtain the
correct measurement results, you must set the probe ratio properly. By default, the
probe ratio is 1X.
Press 1 to open the setting menu of CH1.Then, press Attenuation continuously or
rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired probe ratio. You can also
enable the touch screen, and then touch the CH1 setting menu to select the desired
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 2-7
probe ratio. The probe ratio values available are as shown in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Probe Ratio
Menu
Attenuation Ratio
(display amplitude of the signal: actual amplitude
of the signal)
0.0001X
0.0002X
0.0005X
0.001X
0.002X
0.005X
0.01X
0.02X
0.05X
0.1X
0.2X
0.5X
1X (default)
2X
5X
10X
20X
50X
100X
200X
500X
1000X
2000X
5000X
10000X
20000X
50000X
0.0001:1
0.0002:1
0.0005:1
0.001:1
0.002:1
0.005:1
0.01:1
0.02:1
0.05:1
0.1:1
0.2:1
0.5:1
1:1
2:1
5:1
10:1
20:1
50:1
100:1
200:1
500:1
1000:1
2000:1
5000:1
10000:1
20000:1
50000:1
Note: After the oscilloscope auto-recognized certain probes with a fixed attenuation
ratio, the probe ratio will also be auto recognized. You do not have to set it
manually.
Input Impedance
To reduce the circuit load between the oscilloscope and the circuit under test, this
oscilloscope provides two input impedance modes: 1 MΩ (default) and 50 Ω.
⚫ 1 MΩ: The input impedance of the oscilloscope is very high, and the current
flowed from the circuit under test can be ignored.
⚫ 50 Ω: makes the oscilloscope match with the device whose input impedance is
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
2-8 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
50 Ω.
Press 1 to open the setting menu of CH1. Then, press Impedance continuously to
select the input impedance of the oscilloscope. If you select "50 Ω", the channel
status label at the bottom of the screen will display the icon
.
Note:
⚫ After the oscilloscope recognizes the probe automatically, the input impedance
will also be auto recognized. You do not have to set it manually.
⚫ The setting of the input impedance will affect the ranges of channel vertical
scale and offset.
Waveform Invert
Press 1 to open the setting menu of CH1. Then, press Invert continuously to enable
or disable the waveform invert. When enabled, the channel label is displayed, as
shown in the following figure.
When disabled, the waveform is displayed normally; when enabled, the voltage
values of the displayed waveform are inverted (as shown in Figure 2-1). Enabling the
waveform invert will also change the result of math function and waveform
measurement.
(a) "Invert" Off
(b) "Invert" On
Figure 2-1 Waveform Invert
Note: When the waveform invert is enabled, the trigger edge or the trigger polarity
will change (e.g. Edge trigger, Pulse trigger, or Slope trigger).
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 2-9
To Set the Probe
The analog channel of this oscilloscope not only supports the common passive probe,
but also the active probe. It can automatically recognize the currently connected
probe type and its probe ratio. For detailed technical information of the probes,
please refer to the corresponding Probe User’s Guide.
Press 1 to open the setting menu of CH1. Then, press Probe to open the probe
menu. If different probes are connected to the oscilloscope, different information
about the probe will be displayed, and you can perform the different operations on
the menu.
Passive Probe
If a passive probe is connected, for example, when RIGOL's RP3500A probe model
is connected to the oscilloscope, press Probe to open the probe menu. Its
sub-menus are grayed out and disabled.
Active Probe
If an active probe is connected, for example, when RIGOL's RP7150 probe model is
connected to the oscilloscope, press Probe to open the probe menu, and you can
operate on the menu item.
⚫ Probe Delay
To avoid measurement result errors arising from the transmission delay of the
probe cable, the oscilloscope provides the probe delay adjustment function for
the active probe. Press Skew, and then rotate the multifunction knob or
use the numeric keypad to set the probe delay time.
Tip
For some of the ordinary passive probes, the oscilloscope can recognize their
probe ratio automatically. If not recognized, please refer to "Probe Ratio" to set
the probe ratio.
Tip
⚫ When a 50 Ω active probe is connected, the input impedance (refer to "Input
Impedance") of the channel will be automatically set to "50 Ω".
⚫ For the active probe, the oscilloscope can recognize the probe ratio
automatically. If the currently connected probe supports a variety of probe
ratios, please refer to "Probe Ratio" to set the probe ratio.
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
2-10 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
⚫ Bias Voltage
The oscilloscope provides the bias voltage adjustment function for active probes.
This function is used to adjust the signal under test that exceeds the input
dynamic range of the probe amplifier to an appropriate range to ensure the
integrity of the signal under test. Press Bias, rotate the multifunction knob
or use the numeric keypad to set the DC bias voltage.
⚫ Probe Information
Press About to view information about the probe currently connected, such as
the manufacturer, model, serial number, and the last calibration date.
⚫ Probe Calibration
Press Calibration to start zero calibration automatically for the probe.
Amplitude Unit
Select the amplitude display unit for the current channel. The available units are W, A,
V, and U. When the unit is changed, the unit related to the relevant functions of the
channel will change accordingly.
Press 1 → More → Unit, press Unit continuously or rotate the multifunction knob
to select a unit. You can also enable the touch screen to select the desired unit
with touch gestures. The default unit for the value is V.
Channel Delay
When using an oscilloscope for actual measurement, the transmission delay of the
probe cable may bring relatively greater errors (zero offset). MSO7000/DS7000
allows you to set a delay time for calibrating the zero offset of the corresponding
channel. Zero offset is defined as the offset of the crossing point of the waveform
and trigger level line relative to the trigger position, as shown in Figure 2-2.
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 2-11
Figure 2-2 Zero Offset
Press 1 → More → Ch-Ch Skew, rotate the multifunction knob or use the
numeric keypad to set the desired delay calibration time. The available range of the
delay calibration time is from -100 ns to 100 ns.
Note: This parameter is related to the instrument model and the current horizontal
time base setting. The larger the horizontal time base is, the larger the setting
step will be.
Offset Cal
When you use an oscilloscope to make actual measurements, a small offset that
arises from the temperature drift of the component or external environment
disturbance may occur on the zero-cross voltage of the channel, which will affect the
measurement results of the vertical parameters. MSO7000/DS7000 allows you to set
an offset calibration voltage for calibrating the zero point of the corresponding
channel, so as to improve the accuracy of the measurement results.
Note: If the zero-cross voltage of the channel has a larger amplitude offset that
exceeds the adjustable null range, please perform self-calibration for the
instrument to ensure the measurement accuracy. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Self-calibration".
Press 1 → More → Offset Cal, rotate the multifunction knob or use the
numeric keypad to set the offset calibration value.
Actual Trigger Position
Trigger
Level
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
2-12 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Channel Label
The instrument uses the channel number to mark the corresponding channel by
default. For ease of use, you can also set a label for each channel. For example,
"
".
Press 1 → More → Label to enter the label setting menu. You can use the built-in
label or manually input a label. Three input methods are available for you to input a
label name, including Chinese, English, and Traditional Chinese.
The label setting menu includes the following menu items.
⚫ Press Display to turn on or off the display of the channel label. If it is enabled,
the label will be displayed at the left side of the waveform. When on, CH1 is, by
default, displayed to be the channel label.
⚫ Press Library to select the preset labels such as CH1, ACK, ADDR, BIT, CLK, CS,
DATA, IN, MISO, MOSI, OUT, RX and TX.
⚫ Press Label and the label editing interface is automatically displayed as shown in
Figure 2-3. You can input the label manually. For the label input method, refer to
"To Create a Folder".
Figure 2-3 Label Editing Interface
For example, set the label to "
". In the virtual keypad, rotate the multifunction
knob
to select "Caps" (only available to be selected for English input method)
and press down the knob to switch the uppercase or lowercase mode. Rotate the
multifunction knob and select "C", press down the knob to input "C". Use the same
method to input "hn1". After finishing the input, press OK to finish the editing. You
can also enable the touch screen to operate by touch gestures. If Display is enabled,
the label
will be displayed at the left of CH1 waveform.
Label Input Area Input Selection Area Virtual Keypad Delete Key
Upper-lower
Case Switch
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 2-13
To delete or modify the input characters, rotate the multifunction knob or enable
the touch screen to realize it.
⚫ Rotate the multifunction knob
: use the delete key to delete or modify the
characters. To modify the characters, input the desired characters again.
⚫ Enable the touch screen: use the touch gestures to directly move the cursor to
the right side of the character required to be deleted or modified, and then tap
the delete key to delete the character. To modify the characters, input the
desired character again or delete the character.
The "Input Selection Area" is only available when you select the Chinese input
method.
RIGOL Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
3-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Adjust the Horizontal Time Base
Horizontal time base, also called the horizontal scale, refers to the time of each grid
in the horizontal direction of the screen. It is usually expressed in s/div. The
adjustable range of the horizontal time base is related to the model type.
While you change the horizontal time base, the displayed waveforms of all channels
are expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the current selected horizontal
reference baseline (refer to "Horizontal Expansion"). The horizontal time base at
the upper-left corner of the screen will be changed accordingly, as shown in the
figure below.
You can adjust the horizontal time base with the following three methods:
⚫ Rotate Horizontal
SCALE to adjust the horizontal time base within the
available range (clockwise to reduce the horizontal time base and
counterclockwise to increase).
⚫ Enable the touch screen function and adjust the horizontal time base with the
pinch & stretch gesture on the touch screen. For details, refer to the "Pinch &
Stretch" section.
⚫ Enable the touch screen function, and tap the horizontal time base label
at the top of the screen. The following window is displayed. Tap the
icon at the right side of the Scale input field to decrease or increase
the horizontal time base. You can also tap the Scale input field to input a
specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.
In the Horizontal control area (Horizontal), rotate the Horizontal SCALE knob
to switch the adjustment mode between "Coarse" and "Fine" (by default, it is Coarse).
You can also press Acquire → Fine to enable or disable the fine adjustment of the
horizontal time base.
⚫ Coarse adjustment: Rotate the Horizontal
SCALE knob will adjust the
horizontal time base of the waveforms of all channels at 1-2-5 step within the
adjustable range. Rotate it clockwise to reduce the horizontal time base, and
counterclockwise to increase the horizontal time base.
⚫ Fine adjustment: Rotate the Horizontal
SCALE knob will adjust the
horizontal time base of the waveforms of all channels with a minor step value
Decrease the timebase Increase the timebase
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 3-3
within the adjustable range. Rotate it clockwise to reduce the horizontal time
base, and counterclockwise to increase the horizontal time base.
Note: When the delayed sweep is enabled, rotate the Horizontal SCALE knob
to adjust the time base for the delayed sweep. The delayed sweep time base
displayed in the center of the screen will be changed accordingly, as shown in
the following figure.
To Adjust the Horizontal Position
Horizontal position, also called trigger position, refers to the trigger point position of
the waveforms of all channels in the horizontal direction relative to the screen center.
When the waveform trigger point is at the left (right) side of the screen center, the
horizontal position is a positive (negative) value.
While you change the horizontal position, the waveform trigger points and the
displayed waveforms of all channels are moved left and right. The horizontal position
at the right-upper corner of the screen changes accordingly, as shown in the figure
below.
You can adjust the horizontal position with the following three methods:
⚫ Rotate Horizontal
POSITION to adjust the horizontal position of the
waveforms of all channels. When you rotate it clockwise, the waveform trigger
point moves right on the screen; when you rotate it counterclockwise, the
waveform trigger point moves left on the screen. Pressing down the knob can
quickly reset the horizontal position (reset to 0).
⚫ Enable the touch screen function and adjust the horizontal position with the
drag gesture on the touch screen. For details, refer to the "Drag" section.
⚫ Enable the touch screen function, and tap the horizontal position label
at the top of the screen. The following window is displayed. Tap the
icon at the right side of the Pos input field to decrease or increase the horizontal
position. You can also tap the Pos input field to input a specific value with the
displayed numeric keypad.
Decrease the position Increase the position
RIGOL Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
3-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Note: When the delayed sweep is enabled, rotate the Horizontal POSITION
knob to adjust the horizontal position of the delayed sweep (press down the knob to
quickly reset it). The horizontal position of the delayed sweep at the upper-right
corner of the screen changes accordingly.
Delayed Sweep
Delayed sweep can be used to enlarge a length of waveform horizontally to view
waveform details.
In the horizontal control area on the front panel, press Zoom to enable or disable
the delayed sweep. By default, it is disabled. You can also press Acquire → More →
Zoom to enable or disable the delayed sweep function.
Note:
To enable the delayed sweep, you must ensure that the current time base
mode is "YT".
In delayed sweep mode, the screen is divided into two display areas as shown in
Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 Delayed Sweep Mode
Waveform Before Enlargement
Horizontal Position of the
Delayed Sweep
Main
Time
Base
Time
Base of
the
Delayed
Sweep
Waveform After Enlargement
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 3-5
Waveform before enlargement:
The waveform in the area that is not covered by subtransparent blue in the upper
part of the screen is the waveform before enlargement. Its horizontal time base (also
called main time base) is displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen. You can
rotate the Horizontal POSITION knob to move the area left and right or rotate
the Horizontal SCALE knob to enlarge or reduce this area.
Note: If you need to modify the horizontal time base (also called main time base) of
the normal sweep, please disable the delayed sweep function first. Rotate the
Horizontal
SCALE knob to set the required main time base, and then
enable the delayed sweep function.
Waveform after enlargement:
The waveform in the lower part of the screen is the horizontally expanded delayed
sweep waveform. Its horizontal time base (also called the time base of the delayed
sweep) is displayed on the screen. Compared with the main time base, the time
based of the delayed sweep has increased the waveform resolution, as shown in
Figure 3-1. At this time, you can rotate the Horizontal
SCALE knob to adjust
the time base of the delayed sweep, and rotate the Horizontal POSITION
knob to adjust the horizontal position of the delayed sweep.
Note: The time base of the delayed sweep should be smaller than or equal to the
main time base.
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
4-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Timebase Mode
MSO7000/DS7000 series supports three available time base modes: YT mode, XY
mode, and ROLL mode. By default, the time base mode is YT.
Press Acquire → Timebase Mode on the front panel, and then rotate the
multifunction knob to select the desired time base mode. Then, press down the
knob to select the mode. You can also press Timebase Mode continuously to select
the mode or enable the touch screen to tap the desired mode and select it.
YT Mode
In this mode, the Y axis represents voltage, and the X axis represents time.
Note: Only when this mode is enabled, can delayed sweep be turned on. In this
mode, when the horizontal time base is equal to or greater than 200 ms/div,
the instrument enters slow sweep mode. For details, refer to descriptions in
"ROLL Mode".
XY Mode
In this mode, both the X axis and the Y axis represent the voltage. The mode
changes the display from voltage-time display mode to voltage-voltage display. You
can use the Lissajous method to measure the phase deviation of the two input
signals whose frequencies are the same. The following figure shows the
measurement schematic diagram of phase deviation.
Figure 4-1 Measurement Schematic Diagram of Phase Deviation
According to sin=A/B or C/D, is the phase deviation angle between the two
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 4-3
channels. The definitions of A, B, C, and D are shown in the above figure. The phase
deviation angle is obtained, that is:
=arcsin(A/B) or arcsin(C/D)
If the principal axis of the ellipse is within Quadrant I and III, the phase deviation
angle obtained should be within Quadrant I and IV, namely within (0 to π/2) or (3π/2
to 2π). If the principal axis of the ellipse is within Quadrant II and IV, the phase
deviation angle obtained should be within Quadrant II and III, namely within (π/2 to
π) or (π to 3π/2).
The XY function can be used to measure the phase deviation occurred when the
signal under test passes through a circuit network. Connect the oscilloscope to the
circuit to monitor the input and output signals of the circuit.
Application example: measures the phase deviation between the input signals of
two channels.
Use Lissajous method
1. Connect one sine signal to CH1, and then connect another sine signal (with the
same frequency and amplitude as the previous one but a 90° phase deviation
from the previous one) to CH2.
2. Press AUTO, after you select "XY" mode, rotate the Horizontal SCALE to
adjust the sample rate properly to obtain a better view of Lissajous graph for
observation and measurement.
3. Rotate the Vertical
SCALE knob that corresponds to CH1 and CH2
respectively to make the signals easy to observe. Then, a circle, as shown in the
figure below, should be displayed.
4. Observe the measurement result shown in the figure above. According to the
measurement schematic diagram of the phase deviation (as shown in Figure
4-1), A/B(C/D)=1. Thus, the phase deviation angle of the two channel input
signals is
=arcsin1=90°.
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
4-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Note:
⚫ The maximum sample rate in XY mode is 2.5 GSa/s. In this mode, CH1 and CH2
are forced to be enabled; CH3 and CH4 are forced to be disabled. Generally, a
longer sample waveform can ensure better display effect of Lissajous figure. But
due to the limitation of the memory depth, you have to reduce the waveform
sample rate to acquire a longer waveform (refer to the introduction in "Memory
Depth"). Therefore, during the measurement, reducing the sample rate
properly can achieve better display effect of Lissajous figure.
⚫ The following functions are disabled in XY mode:
"Delayed Sweep", "Vector display", "Scale", "Protocol Decoding",
"Pass/Fail Test", "Waveform Recording & Playing", "Digital Channel",
and "To Set the Persistence Time".
ROLL Mode
In this mode, the waveform scrolls from right to left to update the display. The
available range of the horizontal scale is from 200 ms to 1 ks. Press More → Auto
ROLL to select "ON". The system automatically enters the ROLL mode, and there is
no slow sweep.
Note:
⚫ If the current delayed sweep is enabled, then when you enable the ROLL mode,
the delayed sweep is disabled automatically. When you re-enable the "YT" mode,
the delayed sweep will be re-enabled.
⚫ The following functions cannot be set in ROLL mode:
"To Adjust the Horizontal Position" (available when the oscilloscope is in
"Stop" operating status), "Delayed Sweep", "To Trigger the Oscilloscope",
"Protocol Decoding", "Pass/Fail Test", "Waveform Recording &
Playing", and "To Set the Persistence Time".
Slow Sweep
It is similar to the ROLL mode. In YT mode, when the horizontal time base is set to
200 ms/div or smaller, the instrument enters the "slow sweep" mode in which the
instrument first acquires the data at the left of the trigger point and then waits for
a trigger event. After the trigger occurs, the instrument continues to finish the
waveform at the right of the trigger point. When observing the low-frequency
signal in the slow sweep mode, it is recommended that you set "Channel
Coupling" to "DC".
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 4-5
Acquisition Mode
The acquisition mode is used to control how to generate waveform points from the
sample points.
MSO7000/DS7000 supports the following four acquisition modes: Normal, Average,
Peak, and High Resolution. By default, the acquisition mode is Normal.
Press Acquire → Acquisition on the front panel, and then rotate the multifunction
knob to select the desired acquisition mode. Then, press down the knob to
select the mode. You can also press Acquisition continuously to select the mode or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired mode and select it.
Normal
In this mode, the oscilloscope samples the signal at a specified fixed time interval to
rebuild the waveform. For most of the waveforms, using this mode can produce the
optimal display effects.
Average
In this mode, the oscilloscope averages the waveforms from multiple samples to
reduce the random noise of the input signal and improve the vertical resolution.
Greater number of averages can lower the noise and increase the vertical resolution;
while at the same time, it will slow the response of the displayed waveform to the
waveform changes.
When you select "Average" mode, press Averages and rotate the multifunction
knob
or use the numeric keypad to set the desired number of averages. You can
also use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the average count. When the average
count value is not in power-of-2 increments, a prompt message "Truncation average
error" will be displayed. At this time, a value that is smaller than the one you input
and the closest to power-of-2 increments will be input automatically. For example, if
you input 9 with the numeric keypad, the average count will be input 8 automatically.
The number of averages can be set to 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048,
4096, 8192, 16384, 32768, or 65536. By default, it is 2.
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
4-6 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Figure 4-2 Waveforms before Averaging
Figure 4-3 Waveforms after 128 Times of Averaging
Peak
In this mode, the oscilloscope acquires the maximum and minimum values of the
signal within the sample interval to get the envelope of the signal or the narrow pulse
that might be lost. In this mode, signal aliasing can be prevented, but the noise
displayed would be larger.
In this mode, the oscilloscope can display all the pulses whose pulse widths are at
least the same as the sample period.
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 4-7
High Resolution
This mode uses an over-sample technique to average the neighboring points of the
sample waveform. This reduces the random noise on the input signal, generates a
much smoother waveform on the screen and improves the vertical resolution. This is
generally used when the sample rate of the digital converter is greater than the
storage rate of the acquisition memory.
Note:
⚫ The "Average" and "High Res" modes use different averaging methods. The
former uses "Multi-sample Average"
and the latter uses "Single-sample
Average".
⚫ In "High Res" mode, the oscilloscope improves the measurement accuracy at
the cost of bandwidth. Each time the sampling rate changes, a window
displaying the current bandwidth appears at the lower-left corner of the screen.
⚫ In "High Res" mode, the highest waveform refresh rate mode is not supported.
Sampling Mode
This oscilloscope only supports the real-time sampling mode. In this mode, the
oscilloscope produce the waveform display from samples collected during one trigger
event. The highest real-time sample rate on the analog channel of MSO7000/DS7000
series is 10 GSa/s. The current sample rate is displayed under CH SampleRate.
Sample Rate
Sampling is the process of converting the analog signal into the digital signal at a
specified time interval and then restoring them in sequence. The sample rate is the
reciprocal of the time interval.
The sample rate of the analog channel is related to the current channel mode. The
maximum real-time sample rate in the single-channel mode of the oscilloscope is 10
GSa/s. The maximum real-time sample rate in the dual-channel mode is 5 GSa/s, and
the maximum real-time sample rate in the 4-channel mode is 2.5 GSa/s.
Tip
Press RUN/STOP on the front panel to stop sampling, and then the oscilloscope
will maintain its last captured graph. You can still expand or zoom the waveforms
by using the horizontal and vertical control knobs.
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
4-8 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Note:
The sample rate is displayed both in the status bar at the upper part of the
screen and in the CH SampleRate menu. To indirectly modify the sample
rate, rotate the Horizontal
SCALE knob to adjust the horizontal time
base or modify the memory depth.
The impact of low sample rate on the waveform:
1. Waveform Distortion: when the sample rate is too low, some waveform
details are lost, and the sample waveform displayed is rather different from the
actual waveform of the signal.
2. Waveform Aliasing: when the sample rate is twice lower than the actual
signal frequency (Nyquist Frequency), the frequency of the waveform rebuilt from
the sample data is smaller than the actual signal frequency.
3. Waveform Leakage: when the sample rate is too low, the waveform rebuilt
from the sample data does not reflect all the actual signal information.
Tip
Single-channel mode: only one of the four channels (CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4) is
enabled.
Dual-channel mode: either CH1 or CH2 is enabled; and either CH3 or CH4 is
enabled.
4-channel mode: CH1/CH2 are both enabled or CH3/CH4 are both enabled.
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 4-9
LA Sample Rate
LA sampling is the process of sampling on the compared digital signals at a certain
time interval. LA sample rate is the reciprocal of the time interval. For example, if the
LA sample rate is 500 MSa/s, it indicates that the oscilloscope will make data
acquisition on the digital signals at an interval of 2 ns. The maximum LA sample rate
of the oscilloscope is 1.25 GSa/s, and its display value is related to the sample rate of
the current analog channel.
Note:
1. The digital signals here mentioned refers to the signal obtained from the
comparison between the input signal and the user-defined threshold level. The
rule of the comparison is that when the amplitude of the input signal is greater
than the threshold level, it is judged to be the logic high level; when the
amplitude of the input signal is smaller than the threshold level, it is judged to
be the logic low level.
2. LA sample rate is displayed under the LA SampleRate menu. To indirectly
modify the LA sample rate, rotate the Horizontal
SCALE knob to adjust
the horizontal time base or modify the memory depth.
Memory Depth
Memory depth refers to the number of points of the oscilloscope that can store in one
trigger acquisition. It reflects the storage capability of the acquisition storage. This
oscilloscope is equipped with a standard memory depth of up to 500 Mpts.
Pulse
disappeared
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
4-10 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
T
Trigger Point
Pre-sample Delayed Sample
Memory Depth
Figure 4-4 Memory Depth
The following equation shows the relations among memory depth, sample rate, and
horizontal time base scale:
MDepth SRate TScale HDivs=
MDepth
——indicates the memory depth. The unit is pts.
SRate
——indicates the sample rate. The unit is Sa/s.
TScale
——indicates the horizontal time base scale. The unit is s/div.
HDivs
——indicates the number of grids in the horizontal direction. The unit is div.
Therefore, under the same horizontal time base scale, a higher memory depth can
ensure a higher sample rate.
Press Acquire → Mem Depth, then rotate the multifunction knob to switch to
the desired memory depth, and then press down the knob to select the option. You
can also press the Mem Depth key continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the memory depth. By default, the memory depth is Auto.
⚫ For analog channels:
― In single-channel mode, the memory depths available include Auto, 1 Kpts,
10 Kpts, 100 Kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 25 Mpts, 50 Mpts, 100 Mpts, 125 Mpts
(optional), 250 Mpts (optional), and 500 Mpts (optional).
― In dual-channel mode, the memory depths available include Auto, 1 Kpts,
10 Kpts, 100 Kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 25 Mpts, 50 Mpts, 100 Mpts, 125 Mpts
(optional), and 250 Mpts (optional).
― In 4-channel mode, the memory depths available include Auto, 1 Kpts, 10
Kpts, 100 Kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 25 Mpts, 50 Mpts, 100 Mpts, and 125 Mpts
(optional).
Note:
In "Auto" mode, the oscilloscope selects the memory depth automatically
according to the current sample rate.
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 4-11
LA Memory Depth
Press Acquire → More to view the memory depth of the current digital channel
under LA Mem Depth. The LA memory depth will change with the memory depth of
the analog channel, and cannot be set separately. The maximum LA memory depth is
62.5 Mpts.
Anti-Aliasing
At a slower sweep speed, the sample rate is reduced, and a dedicated display
algorithm can be used to minimize the possibility of aliasing.
Press Acquire → Anti-aliasing to enable or disable the anti-aliasing function. By
default, anti-aliasing is disabled. In this case, it is more likely to generate waveform
aliasing.
Note: This function should be enabled when the horizontal time base has a large
deviation from the period of the signal under test (e.g. when the horizontal
time base is greater than five-fold the period of the signal under test).
Horizontal Expansion
Horizontal expansion indicates the reference position that the screen waveform is
referenced to when it is horizontally expanded or compressed in adjusting the
Horizontal SCALE knob. In YT mode, press Acquire → More → Expand and
then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired reference position. Press
down the knob to select it. You can also press Expand continuously to select it or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired reference. The horizontal expansion
reference supported by the oscilloscope includes Center, Left, Right, Trigger, and User.
The default is "Center".
⚫ Center: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be
expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the screen center.
⚫ Left: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be expanded
or compressed horizontally relative to the leftmost position of the screen.
⚫ Right: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be
expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the rightmost position of the
screen.
⚫ Trigger: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be
expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the trigger point.
⚫ User: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform displayed will be
expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the user-defined reference
position.
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
4-12 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
After you select "User", press Expand User and then rotate the multifunction
knob
to set the expansion reference. Its available range is from the
rightmost position of the screen to the leftmost position of the screen. By default,
it is the screen center. Pressing down the multifunction knob
can quickly
reset the user-defined reference position to 0.
Note: This function is unavailable in YT mode with the delayed sweep being enabled,
XY mode, and ROLL mode.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-1
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
As for trigger, you set certain trigger condition according to the requirement and
when a waveform in the waveform stream meets this condition, the oscilloscope
captures this waveform as well as the neighboring part, and displays them on the
screen. For the digital oscilloscope, it samples waveform continuously no matter
whether it is stably triggered, but only stable trigger can be stably displayed. The
trigger module ensures that every time base sweep or acquisition starts from the
user-defined trigger condition, namely every sweep is synchronous with the
acquisition and the waveforms acquired is overlapped so as to display the stable
waveforms.
Trigger settings should be based on the features of the input signal. To quickly
capture the desired waveform, you need to understand the signal under test. This
oscilloscope provides abundant trigger types that help you focus on the desired
waveform details.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Trigger Source
◼ Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
◼ Trigger Mode
◼ Trigger Coupling
◼ Trigger Holdoff
◼ Noise Rejection
◼ Trigger Type
◼ Zone Trigger
◼ Trigger Output Connector
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Trigger Source
In the trigger control area (Tr igger) on the front panel, press Menu → Source to
select the desired source, or rotate the multi-function knob to select a desired
source, then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Source
continuously to select the trigger source or enable the touch screen to tap the
desired trigger source and select it.
Analog channels (CH1-CH4), digital channels (D0-D15, available for the MSO7000
series), EXT (external trigger), or AC Line can all be selected as the trigger source.
Analog channel input:
Signals input from analog channels CH1-CH4 can all be used as trigger sources. No
matter whether the channel selected is enabled, the channel can work normally.
Digital channel input:
Signals input from digital channels D0-D15 can all be used as trigger sources. No
matter whether the channel selected is enabled, the channel can work normally.
External trigger input:
The external trigger source can be used to trigger on the fifth channel while all the
other four channels are acquiring data. The trigger signal (e.g. external clock or
signal of the circuit under test) will be connected to EXT trigger source via the
external trigger input terminal [EXT TRIG] connector. You can set the trigger
conditions within the range of the trigger level (from -8 V to +8 V).
AC line input:
The trigger signal is obtained from the AC power input of the oscilloscope. AC trigger
is usually used to measure signals relevant to the AC power frequency. For example,
stably triggering the waveform output from the transformer of a transformer
substation. It is mainly used in related measurements of the power industry.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-3
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level
The adjustment of the trigger level/threshold level is related to the type of the trigger
source.
⚫ When the trigger source is selected from CH1 to CH4, rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level. During the adjustment, a trigger level
line (the color of the trigger level line should be consistent with that of the
channel color) and a trigger label "
" are displayed on the screen, and they
move up and down with the variation of the trigger level. When you stopping
modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line disappears in about 2 s. The
current trigger level value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: In Runt Trigger, Slope Trigger, and Window trigger, you need to set the
upper and lower limits of the trigger level. You can modify the level by rotating
the Trigger
LEVEL knob. The difference between the current upper limit
and lower limit of the trigger level is displayed at the upper-right side of the
screen. Two trigger level labels ( and ) are displayed at the left side of the
screen. Meanwhile, the real-time trigger level information is displayed at the
lower-left side of the screen, as shown in the figure below. H indicates the upper
limit of the trigger level, L indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △
indicates the deviation of the trigger level.
⚫ When the trigger source is EXT, rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust
the trigger level. The current trigger level value is displayed at the upper-right
corner of the screen.
Note: For this trigger source, only the variation of the trigger level value is
displayed on the screen during the adjustment of the trigger level, without
displaying the trigger level lines on the screen.
⚫ When the trigger source is AC Line, there is no trigger level.
⚫ When the trigger source is selected from D0 to D15, rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the threshold level. The current threshold level value is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen. In addition, you can also press
LA to enter the LA logic analysis setting menu. Then set the threshold level of
the digital channel in the sub-menu threshold setting. For the setting method,
refer to "To Set the Threshold".
You can also enable the touch screen function to adjust the trigger
level/threshold level. Two methods are available for you:
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Method 1: Enable the touch screen and drag the trigger level line to adjust the
trigger level. For details about the operations, refer to descriptions in "Drag"
section.
Method 2: Enable the touch screen function, and tap the trigger setting label
at the upper-right corner of the screen. The following window is
displayed. Tap the icon at the right side of the Level input field to
decrease or increase the trigger level. You can also tap the Level input field to
input a specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.
Trigger Mode
The following is the schematic diagram of the acquisition memory. To easily
understand the trigger event, we classify the acquisition memory into the pre-trigger
buffer and post-trigger buffer.
Figure 5-1 Schematic Diagram of the Acquisition Memory
After the system runs, the oscilloscope operates by first filling the pre-trigger buffer.
It starts searching for a trigger after the pre-trigger buffer is filled. While searching
for the trigger, the data sampled will still be transmitted to the pre-trigger buffer (the
new data will continuously overwrite the previous data). When a trigger is found, the
pre-trigger buffer contains the data acquired just before the trigger. Then, the
oscilloscope will fill the post-trigger buffer and display the data in the acquisition
memory. If the acquisition is activated via RUN/STOP, the oscilloscope will repeat
this process; if the acquisition is activated via SINGLE, the oscilloscope will stop
after finishing a single acquisition (you can pan and zoom the currently displayed
waveform).
Pre-trigger Buffer
Post-trigger Buffer
Trigger Event
Acquisition Memory
Level Input Field Decrease the level Increase the level
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-5
MSO7000/DS7000 provides three trigger modes: Auto, Normal, and Single. The
default is Auto.
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. The trigger mode is displayed at the upper-right corner of
the screen: A (Auto), N (Normal), and S (Single).
⚫ Auto: In this trigger mode, if the specified trigger conditions are not found,
triggers are forced and acquisitions are made so as to display the waveforms.
This trigger mode should be used when the signal level is unknown or the DC
should be displayed as well as when forcible trigger is not necessary as the
trigger condition always occurs.
⚫ Normal: In this trigger mode, triggers and acquisitions only occur when the
specified trigger conditions are found. This trigger mode should be used when
the signal is with low repetition rate or only the event specified by the trigger
setting needs to be sampled as well as when auto trigger should be prevented to
acquire stable display.
⚫ Single: In this trigger mode, the oscilloscope performs a single trigger and
acquisition when the specified trigger conditions are found, and then stops. This
trigger mode should be used when you need to perform a single acquisition of
the specified event and analyze the acquisition result (you can pan and zoom
the currently displayed waveform, and the subsequent waveform data will not
overwrite the current waveform). After a single trigger mode is initiated, the
operating status of the oscilloscope is in "STOP" state.
Note: In "Normal" and "Single" trigger modes, pressing Force can generate a
trigger signal forcibly.
In addition, you can enable the touch screen to set the trigger mode. Enable the
touch screen and tap the trigger setting label
at the upper-right
corner of the screen. Then the following window is displayed. Tap to select "Auto",
"Normal", or "Single" as the trigger mode.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-6 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Trigger Coupling
Trigger coupling decides which kind of components will be transmitted to the trigger
module. Please distinguish it from "Channel Coupling".
Note: Trigger coupling is only valid when the trigger type is Edge and the trigger
source is an analog channel.
Press Menu → Coupling in the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel.
Then, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired coupling mode (by
default, it is DC). You can also press Coupling continuously to select it or enable the
touch screen to select the desired coupling mode with touch gestures.
⚫ DC: allows DC and AC components to pass the trigger path.
⚫ AC: blocks the DC components and attenuates signals.
⚫ LFR: blocks the DC components and rejects the low-frequency components.
⚫ HFR: rejects the high frequency components.
Trigger Holdoff
Trigger holdoff can be used to stably trigger on complex repetitive waveforms that
have multiple edges (or other events) between waveform repetitions (such as pulse
series). Holdoff time indicates the time that the oscilloscope waits for re-arming the
trigger module after generating a correct trigger. The oscilloscope will not trigger
even if the trigger condition is met during the holdoff time and will only re-arm the
trigger module after the holdoff time expires.
For example, to stably trigger the repetitive pulse series as shown in the figure below,
the holdoff time should be set to a value that is greater than t1 and smaller than t2.
Figure 5-2 Schematic Diagram of Trigger Holdoff
Tip
When "AC" or "LFR" is selected under Coupling, no trigger level lines and trigger
icons are displayed. When you adjust the trigger level, you can only see the changes
of the trigger level values at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Holdoff Time
Trigger Position
t1
t2
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-7
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Menu → Holdoff (for
some trigger, Holdoff is a sub menu under More, at this time, press Menu → More
→ Holdoff) and then rotate the multifunction knob at a small step to modify the
holdoff time (the holdoff to this time when the waveforms are stably triggered; by
default, the holdoff time is 8 ns). Also, you can use the numeric keypad to set the
holdoff time. The adjustable range of holdoff time is from 8 ns to 10 s.
Noise Rejection
Noise rejection can reject the high frequency noise in the signal and reduce the
possibility of miss-trigger of the oscilloscope.
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Menu to enter the
trigger setting menu, then press Noise Reject continuously (for some trigger,
Noise Reject is a sub menu under More, at this time, press Menu → More →
Noise Reject) to enable or disable noise rejection.
Note: This function is only available when the trigger source is an analog channel.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-8 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Trigger Type
MSO7000/DS7000 series ocilloscope provides the following trigger functions (all the
triggers are hardware triggers, except the zone trigger).
⚫ Edge Trigger
⚫ Pulse Trigger
⚫ Slope Trigger
⚫ Video Trigger
⚫ Pattern Trigger
⚫ Duration Trigger
⚫ Timeout Trigger
⚫ Window Trigger
⚫ Delay Trigger
⚫ Setup/Hold Trigger
⚫ Nth Edge Trigger
⚫ RS232 Trigger (Option)
⚫ I2C Trigger (Option)
⚫ SPI Trigger (Option)
⚫ CAN Trigger (Option)
⚫ FlexRay Trigger (Option)
⚫ LIN Trigger (Option)
⚫ I2S Trigger (Option)
⚫ MIL-STD-1553 Trigger (Option)
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-9
Edge Trigger
Triggers on the trigger level/threshold level of the specified edge of the input signal.
Trigger Type:
Press Menu → Type in the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel and
rotate the multifunction knob to select "Edge", then press down the knob to
select it. You can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to tap the
desired trigger type and select it. At this time, the current trigger setting information
(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level/threshold level) is displayed
at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The
information will change based on the trigger settings.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4, AC Line, EXT, or
D0-D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger
source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press Slope, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the input signal
the edge on which the oscilloscope triggers. Then, the current edge type is displayed
at the upper-right corner of the screen. You can also press the Slope key
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the desired edge type.
⚫
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
⚫
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
⚫
Either: triggers on the rising or falling edge of the input signal when the
voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger coupling, trigger holdoff, and noise rejection)
under this trigger type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Coupling",
"Trigger Holdoff", and "Noise Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level or threshold level.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-10 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Please refer to descriptions in "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current
trigger level/threshold level value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Pulse Trigger
Triggers on the positive or negative pulse with a specified width. In this mode, the
oscilloscope will trigger when the pulse width of the input signal satisfies the
specified pulse width condition.
In this oscilloscope, positive pulse width is defined as the time difference between
the two crossing points of the trigger level and positive pulse; negative pulse width is
defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of the trigger level
and negative pulse, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-3 Positive Pulse Width/Negative Pulse Width
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Pulse". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press the Type key continuously or enable the touch
screen to select the desired trigger type.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger
Level
Trigger
Level
+Width
A
B
-Width
A
B
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-11
Polarity:
Press Polarity continuously to select the desired polarity. The polarities available are
positive polarity (
) and negative polarity ( ).
Trigger Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the trigger condition,
and then press down the knob to select the trigger condition. You can also press
When continuously to select the trigger condition or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired trigger condition and select it.
⚫ When you select "Positive" for polarity, ">" for trigger condition, the oscilloscope
triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater than the
specified pulse width.
⚫ When you select "Positive" for polarity, "<" for trigger condition, the oscilloscope
triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is smaller than the
specified pulse width.
⚫ When you select "Positive" for polarity, "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater
than the specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified upper
limit of pulse width.
⚫ When you select "Negative" for polarity, ">" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater
than the specified pulse width.
⚫ When you select "Negative" for polarity, "<" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is smaller
than the specified pulse width.
⚫ When you select "Negative" for polarity, "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater
than the specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified upper
limit of pulse width.
Pulse Width Setting:
⚫ When ">" or "<" is set to the trigger condition, press Lower or Upper, and
then rotate the multifunction knob to set the desired value; or press down the
multifunction knob
to set the lower limit value or the upper limit value. You
can also use the pop-up numeric keypad to set it. The pulse range available is
from 800 ps to 10 s.
⚫ When "<>" is set to the trigger condition, press Upper and Lower, and then
rotate the multifunction knob
to set the lower limit value and the upper limit
value. You can also use the pop-up numeric keypad to set them.
Note: The lower limit of the pulse width must be smaller than the upper limit.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-12 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level or threshold level.
Please refer to descriptions in "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current
trigger level/threshold level value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Slope Trigger
In Slope trigger, the oscilloscope triggers on the positive or negative slope of the
specified time. This trigger mode is applicable to ramp and triangle waveforms.
In this oscilloscope, positive slope time is defined as the time difference between the
two crossing points of trigger level line A and B with the rising edge; negative slope
time is defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of trigger level
line A and B with the falling edge, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-4 Positive Slope Time/Negative Slope Time
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Slope". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Upper Limit of Trigger Level
(Up Level)
Lower Limit of Trigger Level
(Low Level)
A
B
Positive Slope Time
Negative Slope Time
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-13
Edge Type:
Press Slope continuously to select the input signal edge on which the oscilloscope
triggers.
⚫
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal.
⚫
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal.
Slope Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the trigger condition,
and then press down the knob to select the trigger condition. You can also press
When continuously to select the trigger condition or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired trigger condition and select it.
⚫ When you select "Rising" for the edge type, ">" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified time.
⚫ When you select "Rising" for the edge type, "<" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is smaller
than the specified time.
⚫ When you select "Rising" for the edge type, "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified lower limit time and smaller than the specified upper limit
time.
⚫ When you select "Falling" for the edge type, ">" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified time.
⚫ When you select "Falling" for the edge type, "<" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is smaller
than the specified time.
⚫ When you select "Falling" for the edge type, "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified lower limit time and smaller than the specified upper limit
time.
Slope Time Setting:
⚫ When ">" or "<" is set to trigger condition, press Lower or Upper, and then
rotate the multifunction knob
to set the lower limit value or the upper limit
value. You can also use the pop-up numeric keypad to set it. The available range
of the slope time is from 800 ps to 10 s.
⚫ When "<>" is set to trigger condition, press Upper and Lower, and then rotate
the multifunction knob
to set the upper limit value and the lower limit value.
You can also use the pop-up numeric keypad to set them.
Note: The lower slope time limit must be smaller than the upper slope time
limit.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-14 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Press Level Select
(when "<>" is selected as the trigger condition, Level Select is a sub-menu under
More), then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired level type for
adjustment, and then press down the knob to select the type. You can also press
Level Select continuously to select the level type or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired level type and select it.
⚫ Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
⚫ Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
⚫ Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,
and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower
limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.
Note: In Slope trigger, pressing Trigger LEVEL can quickly switch the current
level adjustment type.
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the corresponding trigger level.
During the adjustment of trigger level, two trigger level lines appear on the screen,
and they move up and down with the change of the trigger level. At the same time,
the real-time trigger level information is displayed at the lower-left corner of the
screen (as shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger level,
L indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level
deviation). When you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and
the trigger level information at the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about
2 s. The current trigger level deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-15
Video Trigger
The video signal can include image information and timing information, which adopts
different standards and formats. MSO7000/DS7000 series can trigger on the
standard video signal field or line of NTSC (National Television Standards Committee),
PAL (Phase Alternating Line), or SECAM (Sequential Couleur A Memoire).
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Video". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Video Polarity:
Press Polarity continuously to select the desired video polarity. The polarities
available are positive polarity (
) and negative polarity ( ).
Video Standard:
Press Standard and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired video
standard. You can also press Standard continuously to select the video standard or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired video standard and select it.
Video Standard
Frame Frequency
(Frame)
Scan Type
TV Scan Line
NTSC
30
Interlaced Scan
525
PAL/SECAM
25
Interlaced Scan
625
480p/60Hz
60
Progressive Scan
525
576p/50Hz
50
Progressive Scan
625
720p/60Hz
60
Progressive Scan
750
720p/50Hz
50
Progressive Scan
750
720p/30Hz
30
Progressive Scan
750
720p/25Hz
25
Progressive Scan
750
720p/24Hz
24
Progressive Scan
750
1080p/60Hz
60
Progressive Scan
1125
1080p/50Hz
50
Progressive Scan
1125
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-16 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
1080p/30Hz
30
Progressive Scan
1125
1080p/25Hz
25
Progressive Scan
1125
1080p/24Hz
24
Progressive Scan
1125
1080i/60Hz
60
Interlaced Scan
1125
1080i/50Hz
50
Interlaced Scan
1125
Sync:
Press Sync, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the sync type, and then
press down the knob to select the type. You can also press Sync continuously to
select the sync type or enable the touch screen to tap the desired sync type and
select it.
⚫ All Lines: triggers on the first line found.
⚫ Line: triggers on the specified line.
When this sync type is selected, you can specify a line number. Press Line, then
rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to modify
the line number. The range of the line number is related to the currently selected
video standards. The range is from 1 to 525 (NTSC), 1 to 625 (PAL/SECAM), 1 to
525 (480p), 1 to 625 (576p), 1 to 750 (720p), and 1 to 1125 (1080p/1080i).
⚫ Odd: triggers on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the odd field. It is only
available when the video standard is set to "NTSC", "PAL/SECAM", or "1080i".
⚫ Even: triggers on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the even field. It is
only available when the video standard is set to "NTSC", "PAL/SECAM", or
"1080i".
Noise Rejection:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Setting:
Press Noise Reject to set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Use Trigger
LEVEL to modify the level. For details, refer to descriptions in
"Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level".
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-17
Pattern Trigger
Identifies a trigger condition by searching for a specified pattern. This pattern is a
logical "AND" combination of channels. Each channel can be set to H (high), L (low),
or X (don't care). A rising or falling edge (you can only specify a single edge) can be
specified for one channel included in the pattern. When an edge is specified, the
oscilloscope will trigger at the edge specified if the pattern set for the other channels
are true (namely the actual pattern of the channel is the same as the preset pattern).
If no edge is specified, the oscilloscope will trigger on the last edge that makes the
pattern true. If all the channels in the pattern are set to "X", the oscilloscope will not
trigger.
Figure 5-5 Pattern Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Pattern". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Tip
⚫ For a better observation of the waveform details in the video signal, you can
set a larger memory depth first.
⚫ In the trigger debugging process of video signals, the frequency in different
part of the signal can be reflected by a different brightness, as RIGOL digital
oscilloscope provides the intensity graded color display function. Experienced
users can quickly judge the signal quality and discover abnormalities during
the debugging process.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-18 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Pattern Setting:
Press Code, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the pattern of the
currently selected channel. Press down the knob to select the pattern. You can also
press Code continuously to select the pattern or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available patterns include the following five types:
⚫ H: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "1", i.g. the voltage level is higher
than the trigger level/threshold level of the channel.
⚫ L: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "0", i.g. the voltage level is lower
than the trigger level/threshold level of the channel.
⚫ X: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "X", i.g. this channel is not used as
a part of the pattern. When all channels in the pattern are set to "X", the
oscilloscope will not trigger.
⚫
Rising: sets the pattern to the rising edge ( ) of the channel selected.
⚫ Falling: sets the pattern to the falling edge ( ) of the channel selected.
The corresponding pattern is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The patterns of
channels CH1-CH4 and D0-D15 are presented from left to right, as shown in the
figure below.
You can also set the pattern with the virtual keypad. The setting methods are as
follows:
Enable the touch screen to tap the channel pattern. Then, a virtual keypad is
displayed. Set the channel pattern with the keypad. For example, tap CH2 pattern,
then the virtual keypad for setting the channel pattern is displayed, as shown in
Figure 5-6. Tap the left arrow key
to move the cursor to the left or tap the right
arrow key
to move the cursor to the right. Then select a pattern. After the
pattern of the current channel is set completely, the cursor goes to the next pattern
bit automatically. Set them respectively. After all the pattern bits are set completely,
tap OK to confirm the setting, and close the virtual keypad. You can also tap All to
apply the current pattern to all the channels. This key function the same as the All
Bits menu key.
Figure 5-6 Virtual Keypad for Pattern Setting
Confirmation Key
All Bits
Move the cursor to
the left
Move the cursor to
the right
Pattern
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-19
Note: Only one edge (rising or falling edge) can be specified in the pattern. If one
edge item is currently defined and then another edge item is defined in another
channel in the pattern, then a prompt message "Invalid input" is displayed. Then the
latter defined edge item will be replaced by X.
All Bits:
Press All Bits to set the patterns of all channels to the currently selected pattern.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Duration Trigger
In duration trigger, the instrument identifies a trigger condition by searching for the
duration of a specified pattern. This pattern is a logical "AND" combination of the
channels. Each channel can be set to H (high), L (low), or X (don't care). When the
duration (△T) of this pattern meets the preset time, the oscilloscope initiates a
trigger, as shown in the figure below.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-20 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Figure 5-7 Duration Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Duration". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Pattern Setting:
Press Code, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the pattern of the
currently selected channel. Press down the knob to select the pattern. The
corresponding pattern is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The patterns of
channels CH1-CH4 and D0-D15 are presented from left to right, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Code continuously to select the pattern or enable
the touch screen to select it.
⚫ H: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "H", i.g. the voltage level is higher
than the trigger level/threshold level of the channel.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-21
⚫ L: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "L", i.g. the voltage level is lower
than the trigger level/threshold level of the channel.
⚫ X: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "X", i.g. this channel is not used as
a part of the pattern. When all channels in the pattern are set to "X", the
oscilloscope will not trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the trigger condition,
and then press down the knob to select the trigger condition. You can also press
When continuously to select the trigger condition or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired trigger condition and select it.
⚫ >: triggers when the duration of the pattern is greater than the preset time.
Press Lower to set the lower limit of the duration of the pattern. Its range is
from 800 ps to 10 s.
⚫ <: triggers when the duration of the pattern is smaller than the preset time.
Press Upper to set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern. Its range is
from 800 ps to 10 s.
⚫ <>: triggers when the duration of the pattern is smaller than the upper limit of
the preset time and greater than the lower limit of the preset time. Press Upper
to set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern, and the range is from 801 ps
to 10 s. Press Lower to set the lower limit of the duration of the pattern, and
the range is from 800 ps to 9.9 s.
⚫ ><: triggers when the duration of the pattern is greater than the upper limit of
the preset time or smaller than the lower limit of the preset time. Press Upper
to set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern, and the range is from 801 ps
to 10 s. Press Lower to set the lower limit of the duration of the pattern, and
the range is from 800 ps to 9.9 s.
Note: The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.
All Bits:
Press All Bits to set the pattern of all trigger sources to the pattern setting selected
currently.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-22 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Timeout Trigger
In Timeout trigger, the oscilloscope triggers when the time interval (△T) (the time
from when the rising edge (or falling edge) of the input signal passes through the
trigger level to the time from when the neighboring falling edge (or rising edge)
passes through the trigger level) is greater than the preset timeout value, as shown
in the figure below.
Time Out
T
Time Out< T
Figure 5-8 Timeout Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Timeout". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press Slope and rotate the multifunction knob to select the edge type of the
input signal that starts to pass through the trigger level. You can also press Slope
continuously to enable the touch screen to select the edge type.
⚫
Rising: starts timing when the rising edge of the input signal passes through
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-23
the trigger level.
⚫
Falling: starts timing when the falling edge of the input signal passes
through the trigger level.
⚫
Either: starts timing when either edge of the input signal passes through the
trigger level.
Timeout Value:
Timeout value represents the maximum time that the signal remains idle before the
signal passes through the trigger level. Press Timeout, and then rotate the
multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the timeout value of
Timeout trigger. The available range is from 16 ns to 10 s.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Runt Trigger
This trigger mode is used to trigger pulses that pass through one trigger level but fail
to pass through another trigger level, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-9 Runt Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Runt". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
Lower Limit of
the Trigger Level
Upper Limit of the
Trigger Level
Negative Runt Pulse
Positive Runt Pulse
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-24 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or enable the touch
screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Polarity:
Press Polarity continuously to select the pulse polarity of Runt trigger.
⚫
Positive: triggers on the positive runt pulse.
⚫
Negative: triggers on the negative runt pulse.
Trigger Condition:
Press When and rotate the multifunction knob to set the trigger conditions of
Runt trigger. You can also press When continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it.
⚫ None: indicates not setting the trigger condition of Runt trigger.
⚫ >: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit of pulse
width. Press Lower to set the minimum pulse width of Runt trigger.
⚫ <: triggers when the runt pulse width is smaller than the upper limit of pulse
width. Press Upper to set the maximum pulse width of Runt trigger.
⚫ <>: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit and
smaller than the upper limit of pulse width. Press Upper to set the maximum
pulse width of Runt trigger. Press Lower to set the minimum pulse width of
Runt trigger.
Note: The lower limit of the pulse width must be smaller than the upper limit.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Press Level Select
(when "<>" is selected as the trigger condition, Level Select is a sub-menu under
More), then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired level type for
adjustment, and then press down the knob to select the type. You can also press
Level Select continuously to select the level type or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired level type and select it.
Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of the
trigger level remains unchanged.
Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of the
trigger level remains unchanged.
Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time, and
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-25
the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower limit of
the trigger level) remains unchanged.
Note: In Runt trigger, pressing Trigger LEVEL can quickly switch the current
level adjustment type.
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the corresponding trigger level.
During the adjustment of trigger level, two trigger level lines appear on the screen,
and they move up and down with the change of the trigger level. At the same time,
the real-time trigger level information is displayed at the lower-left corner of the
screen (as shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger level,
L indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level
deviation). When you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and
the trigger level information at the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about
2 s. The current trigger level deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
Window Trigger
Window trigger provides a high trigger level and a low trigger level. The instrument
triggers when the input signal passes through the high trigger level or the low trigger
level.
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Window". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-26 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press Slope, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the input signal
the edge on which the oscilloscope triggers. You can also press the Slope key
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the desired edge type.
⚫
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level
is higher than the preset high trigger level.
⚫
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level
is lower than the preset low trigger level.
⚫
Either: triggers on the rising or falling edge of the input signal when the
voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
Trigger Position:
After selecting the window type, press Position and then rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the trigger position so as to further specify the time point of
trigger. Press down the knob to select the trigger position. You can also press
Position continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Enter: triggers when the input signal enters the specified trigger level range.
⚫ Exit: triggers when the input signal exits the specified trigger level range.
⚫ Time: triggers when the accumulated hold time since the input signal entered
the specified trigger level range is equal to the window time. When this type is
selected, press Time and rotate the multifunction knob to set the window
time. You can also use the numeric keypad to set it. Its available range is from 8
ns to 10 s.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Press Level Select,
then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the desired level type for adjustment,
and then press down the knob to select the type. You can also press Level Select
continuously to select the level type or enable the touch screen to tap the desired
level type and select it.
⚫ Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
⚫ Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
⚫ Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,
and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower
limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-27
Note: In Window trigger, pressing Trigger LEVEL can quickly switch the
current level adjustment type.
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the corresponding trigger level.
During the adjustment of trigger level, two trigger level lines appear on the screen,
and they move up and down with the change of the trigger level. At the same time,
the real-time trigger level and slope information is displayed at the lower-left corner
of the screen (as shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger
level, L indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level
deviation). When you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and
the trigger level information at the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about
2 s. The current trigger level deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
Delay Trigger
In Delay trigger, you need to set Source A and Source B. The oscilloscope triggers
when the time difference (△T) between the specified edges of Source A (Edge A) and
Source B (Edge B) meets the preset time limit, as shown in the figure below.
Note: Edge A and Edge B must be two neighboring edges.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-28 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
T
Source A
Source B
Edge A=
Edge B=
Figure 5-10 Delay Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then use the multifunction knob to select "Delay". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or enable the touch
screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Source A:
Press SourceA to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15 as the trigger source of Source A. For
details, please refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source
is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge A:
Press EdgeA continuously to select the trigger edge type of Source A in Delay trigger.
It can be set to "Rising"
or "Falling" .
Source B:
Press SourceB to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15 as the trigger source of Source B. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge B:
Press EdgeB continuously to select the trigger edge type of Source B in Delay trigger.
It can be set to "Rising"
or "Falling" .
Trigger Condition:
Press When to set the time limit condition of Delay trigger.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-29
⚫ >: triggers when the time difference (△T) between the specified edges of
Source A and Source B is greater than the preset time lower limit. Press Lower
to set the delay time lower limit in Delay trigger.
⚫ <: triggers when the time difference (△T) between the specified edges of
Source A and Source B is smaller than the preset time upper limit. Press Upper
to set the delay time upper limit in Delay trigger.
⚫ <>: triggers when the time difference (△T) between the specified edges of
Source A and Source B is greater than the lower limit of the preset time and
smaller than the upper limit of the preset time. Press Upper to set the delay
time upper limit in Delay trigger. Press Lower to set the delay time lower limit in
Delay trigger.
Note: The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.
⚫ ><: triggers when the time difference (△T) between the specified edges of
Source A and Source B is smaller than the lower limit of the preset time or
greater than the upper limit of the preset time. Press Upper to set the delay
time upper limit in Delay trigger. Press Lower to set the delay time lower limit in
Delay trigger.
Note: The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Setup/Hold Trigger
In Setup/Hold trigger, you need to set the clock source and data source. The setup
time starts when the data signal passes the trigger level and ends at the coming of
the specified clock edge; the hold time starts at the coming of the specified clock
edge and ends when the data signal crosses the trigger level again, as shown in the
figure below. The oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or hold time is smaller
than the preset time.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-30 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
T1
T2
Data Source
Clock Source
T2
T1
is the setup time
is the hold time
The edge type is
The data type is H
Figure 5-11 Setup/Hold Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Setup/Hold".
Press down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Clock Source:
Press SCL to set the signal source of the clock line. It can be set to CH1-CH4 or
D0-D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current clock
source (trigger source) is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
clock source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press Slope continuously to select the desired clock edge type, and it can be set to
"Rising"
or "Falling" .
Data Source:
Press SDA to set the signal source of the data line. It can be set to CH1-CH4 or
D0-D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current data
source (trigger source) is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Data Type:
Press Data Type continuously to set the effective pattern of the data signal. It can
be set to H (high level) or L (low level).
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-31
Trigger Condition:
Press When and rotate the multifunction knob to select the trigger condition of
Setup/Hold trigger. Press down the knob to select the trigger condition. You can also
press When continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Setup: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time is smaller than the
specified setup time. After selecting this type, press Setup and rotate the
multifunction knob
to set the setup time. You can also use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set it.
⚫ Hold: the oscilloscope triggers when the hold time is smaller than the specified
hold time. After selecting this type, press Hold and rotate the multifunction
knob
to set the hold time. You can also use the pop-up numeric keypad to
set it.
⚫ Setup/Hold: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or the hold time is
smaller than the specified time value. After selecting this type, press Setup and
Hold and rotate the multifunction knob to set the setup time and hold time
respectively. You can also use the pop-up numeric keypad to set them.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-32 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Nth Edge Trigger
Triggers on the Nth edge that appears after the specified idle time. For example, in
the waveform shown in the figure below, the instrument should trigger on the
second rising edge after the specified idle time (the time between two neighboring
rising edges), and the idle time should be within the range between P and M (P<Idle
Time<M). Wherein, M is the time between the first rising edge and its previous rising
edge; P is the maximum time between the rising edges that participate in counting.
M
P<Idle Time<M
Edge Type=
Edge Num=2
P
Figure 5-12 Nth Edge Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Nth Edge". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press Slope continuously to select the input signal edge on which the oscilloscope
triggers.
⚫
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
⚫
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-33
Idle Time:
Press Idle to set the idle time before the edge counting in Nth edge trigger. Rotate
the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the idle time.
Edge Count:
Press Edges to set the value of "N" in Nth edge trigger. Rotate the multifunction
knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the edge count. Its available
range is from 1 to 65535.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
RS232 Trigger (Option)
RS232 bus is a serial communication mode used in data transmission between PCs or
between a PC and a terminal. In RS232 serial protocol, a character is transmitted as
a frame of data. The frame consists of 1 start bit, 5-8 data bits, 1 check bit, and 1-2
stop bits. Its format is as shown in the figure below. MSO7000/DS7000 series
oscilloscope triggers when the start frame, error frame, check error, or the specified
data of the RS232 signal is detected.
Figure 5-13 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Protocol
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "RS232". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Start Bit
Data Bits
Check Bit
Stop Bit
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-34 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Source:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Press When to select the desired trigger condition. Rotate the multifunction knob
to select the desired trigger condition, then press down the knob to select it. You
can also press When continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Start: triggers on the start frame position.
⚫ Error: triggers when an error frame is detected.
⚫ Check Error: triggers when a check error is detected.
⚫ Data: triggers on the last bit of the preset data bits. Press Data, then rotate the
multifunction knob
or use the numeric keypad to set the data of RS232
trigger.
Data Bits:
Indicate the number of bits per frame. Press More → Data Bits, then rotate the
multifunction knob
to select the desired data bits. Then press down the knob to
select. You can also press Data Bits continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the data bits. The available data bits include "5 Bits", "6 Bits", "7 Bits", and "8
Bits".
Stop Bit:
Indicate when to stop outputting. Press More → Stop Bit, then rotate the
multifunction knob
to select the desired stop bit. Then press down the knob to
select it. You can also press Stop Bit continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the stop bit. The available stop bit include "1 Bit", "1.5 Bits", and "2 Bits".
Parity:
Used to verify whether data are properly transmitted. Press More → Parity, then
rotate the multifunction knob
to select the desired parity. Then press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Parity continuously or enable the touch screen
to select the parity. The available parity include "None", "Even", and "Odd".
Polarity
Press Polarity continuously to select the polarity of data transmission. It can be set
to "Pos"
or "Neg" .
Baud Rate:
Set the baud rate of data transmission (i.g. specifies a clock frequency). Three
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-35
setting methods are available for baud rate:
⚫ Press Baud Rate, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed
numeric keypad.
⚫ Press Baud Rate, then select the preset baud rate from the available options.
The available baud rates include 50 bps, 75 bps, 110 bps, 134 bps, 150 bps, 300
bps, and etc.
⚫ Press Baud Rate, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the baud
rate at a small step.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-36 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
I2C Trigger (Option)
I2C is a 2-wire serial bus used to connect the microcontroller and its peripheral
device. It is a bus standard widely used in the microelectronic communication control
field.
The I2C serial bus consists of SCL and SDA. Its transmission rate is determined by
SCL, and its transmission data is determined by SDA, as shown in the figure below.
MSO7000/DS7000 triggers on the start condition, restart, stop, missing
acknowledgment, specific device address, or data value. Besides, it can also trigger
on the specific device address and data values at the same time.
Figure 5-14 Schematic Diagram of I2C Protocol
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "I2C". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type key continuously to select the trigger type or enable the touch
screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press SCL and SDA to specify the signal sources of SCL and SDA respectively. They
can be set to CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger
Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Press When to select the desired trigger condition. Rotate the multifunction knob
to select the desired trigger condition, then press down the knob to select it. You
can also press When continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Start: triggers when SDA data transitions from high level to low level while SCL is
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-37
high level.
⚫ Stop: triggers when SDA data transitions from low level to high level while SCL is
high level.
⚫ Restart: triggers when another start condition occurs before a stop condition.
⚫ MissedAck: triggers when the SDA data is high level during any acknowledgment
of SCL clock position.
⚫ Address: the trigger searches for the specified address value. When this event
occurs, the oscilloscope will trigger on the read/write bit. After this trigger
condition is selected:
➢ Press AddrBits and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
address bits. Then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
AddrBits continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
address bits are "7 Bits", "8 Bits", and "10 Bits".
➢ Press Address, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to set the address of I2C trigger.
➢ Press More → Direction to select "Write", "Read", or "R/W".
Note: This setting is not available when AddrBits is set to "8 Bits".
⚫ Data: the trigger searches for the specified data value on the data line (SDA).
When this event occurs, the oscilloscope will trigger on the clock line (SCL)
transition edge of the last bit of data. After this trigger condition is selected:
➢ Press Bit X, and set the current bit with the following two methods.
Method 1: First rotate the multifunction knob
to switch to the data bit
that needs to be operated on. Then press down the knob continuously to
set the current bit. As shown in the figure below, the left is its binary format,
and the right is its corresponding Hex format.
Method 2: Press Bit X or enable the touch screen to select the data bit.
Then set it with the pop-up virtual keypad. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Pattern Trigger". If you modify the binary data bit, a
virtual keypad as shown in Figure 5-15 (a) is displayed. If you modify the
hex data bit, a virtual keypad as shown in Figure 5-15 (b) is displayed.
(a) Virtual Keypad for Binary Data Bit (b) Virtual Keypad for Hex Data Bit
Figure 5-15 Virtual Keypad for Data Bit Settings
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-38 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
➢ Press Bytes, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 5.
➢ Press More → Addr Bits, and rotate the multifunction knob to select
the desired address bits. Then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Addr Bits continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available address bits are "7 Bits", "8 Bits", and "10 Bits".
⚫ A&D: the oscilloscope searches for the specified address and data at the same
time, then triggers when both the address and data meet the conditions. After
this trigger condition is selected, you need to set Bit X, Bytes, Addr Bits,
Address, and Direction menu items. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "Address" and "Data" trigger conditions.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
SPI Trigger (Option)
In SPI trigger, after the CS or timeout condition is satisfied, the oscilloscope triggers
when the specified data is found. When using SPI trigger, you need to specify the
SCL clock sources and SDA data sources. Below is the sequential chart of SPI bus.
SDA
SCL
CS
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Figure 5-16 Sequential Chart of SPI Bus
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-39
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "SPI". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or enable the touch
screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press CLK and MISO to specify the sources of SCL and SDA respectively. They can
be set to CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source".
The current trigger source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press Slope continuously to select the desired clock edge type.
⚫
Rising: samples the SDA data on the rising edge of the clock.
⚫ Falling: samples the SDA data on the falling edge of the clock.
Trigger Condition:
Press When continuously to select the desired trigger condition.
⚫ Timeout: the oscilloscope starts to search for the data (SDA) on which to trigger
after the clock signal (SCL) stays in the idle state for a specified period of time.
After selecting this condition, you can press Timeout, then rotate the
multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the idle time.
The range is from 8 ns to 10 s.
⚫ With CS: if the CS signal is valid, the oscilloscope will trigger when the data (SDA)
satisfying the trigger conditions is found.
➢ Press CS to select the chip selection signal line. The available channels are
CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source".
The current trigger source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
➢ Press More → CS Mode to set the current CS mode to "Pos " (high
level is valid) or "Neg
" (low level is valid).
Current Bit:
Press More → Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
Data Bits:
Press More → DataBits, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the number of bits in the serial data string. The number of bits
in the string can be set to any integer ranging from 4 and 32.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-40 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
CAN Trigger (Option)
MSO7000/DS7000 can trigger on the start of a frame, end of a frame, frame of the
specified type (e.g. Remote, Overload, Data, etc.), or error frame of the specified
type (e.g. Answer Error, Check Error, Format Error, etc.) of the CAN signal.
The data frame format of the CAN bus is as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-17 Data Frame Format of the CAN Bus
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "CAN". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or enable the touch
screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-41
Trigger Condition:
Press When to select the desired trigger condition.
⚫ SOF: triggers at the start of a frame.
⚫ EOF: triggers at the end of a frame.
⚫ Remote ID: triggers on the remote frame with the specified ID. Set the following
parameters:
➢ Press Extended ID to enable or disable the extended ID.
➢ Press Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ Overload: triggers on the CAN overload frames.
⚫ Frame ID: triggers on the data frames with the specified ID. Set the following
parameters:
➢ Press Extended ID to enable or disable the extended ID.
➢ Press Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ Frame Data: triggers on the data frames with specified data. Set the following
parameters:
➢ Press Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ Press Bytes, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the numeric
keypad to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 8.
⚫ Data&ID: triggers on the data frames with the specified ID and data. Set the
following parameters:
➢ Press Define to select "Data" or "ID".
➢ When you select "Data", set Bit X and Bytes. For detailed settings, refer to
parameter settings for "Frame Data".
➢ When you select "ID", set Extended ID and Bit X. For detailed settings,
refer to parameter settings for "Frame ID".
⚫ Frame Error: triggers on the error frame.
⚫ Bit Fill: triggers on the error frame with the bit fill.
⚫ Answer Error: triggers on the answer error frame.
⚫ Check Error: triggers on the check error frame.
⚫ Format Error: triggers on the format error frame.
⚫ Random Error: triggers on random error frame, such as the format error frame,
answer error frame, etc.
Signal Type:
Press More → Signal Type to select the desired signal type.
⚫ CAN_H: indicates the actual CAN_H bus signal.
⚫ CAN_L: indicates the actual CAN_L bus signal.
⚫ TX/RX: indicates the Transmit signal and Receive signal from the CAN bus
transceiver.
⚫ DIFF: The CAN differential bus signals connected to an analog source channel by
using a differential probe. Connect the probe's positive lead to the CAN_H bus
signal and connect the negative lead to the CAN_L bus signal.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-42 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Baud Rate:
Press More → Baud to set the baud rate. Three setting methods are available for
baud rate:
⚫ Press Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed numeric
keypad.
⚫ Press Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the preset baud
rate from the available options. The available baud rates include 10 kb/s, 20 kb/s,
33.3 kb/s, 50 kb/s, 62.5 kb/s, 83.3 kb/s, and etc.
⚫ Press Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the baud rate at a
small step of 0.1 kb/s.
Sample Position:
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level at
this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from the
start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-18 Sample Position
Press More → Sample Position, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the sample position. The settable range is from 10%
to 90%.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-43
FlexRay Trigger (Option)
MSO7000/DS7000 can trigger on the specified frame, symbol, error, or position of
the FlexRay bus.
FlexRay is a type of differential serial bus configured with three consecutive
segments (i.g. header, payload, and trailer). Its data transmission rate is up to 10
Mb/s. Each frame contains a static segment and a dynamic segment, and ends with
the bus idle time.
Its format is as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-19 Frame Format of FlexRay Bus
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "FlexRay". Press
down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Baud Rate:
Press Baud, and rotate the multifunction knob to select a FlexRay baud rate that
matches the FlexRay bus signal. Then press down the knob to select the baud rate.
You can also press Baud continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available baud rates are 2.5 Mb/s, 5 Mb/s, and 10 Mb/s.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-44 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Trigger Condition:
Press When, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired trigger
condition, then press down the knob to select it. You can also press When
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Post: triggers on the specified position of the FlexRay bus. Press Post to select
"TSS End", "FSS_BSS End", "FES End", or "DTS End".
⚫ Frame: triggers on the frame of FlexRay bus.
➢ Press Frame to select the frame type. The types of frames include null,
Sync, Start, and All.
➢ Press More → Define to select "ID" or "Cyc Count".
When you select "ID", set the following parameters: ID Comp, ID Min, and
ID Max. Press More → ID Comp to select the comparison conditions. The
available choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, <>. Press More → ID Max or
press More → ID Min, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the frame ID.
When you select "Cyc Count", set the following parameters: Cyc Comp,
Count Min, and Count Max. Press More → Cyc Comp to select the
comparison conditions. The available choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, <>.
Press More → Count Max or press More → Count Min, then rotate the
multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the cycle
count.
⚫ Symbol: triggers on the CAS/MTS (Collision Avoidance Symbol/Media Access
Test Symbol) and WUS (Wake Up Symbol) of FlexRay bus.
➢ Press Symbol to select the symbol type. The symbol type includes
CAS/MTS and WUS.
➢ Press More → ID Comp to select the comparison conditions. The available
choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, <>. Press More → ID Max or press
More → ID Min, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the frame ID.
⚫ Error: triggers when an error occurs to the FlexRay bus.
Press Error to select the error type. It includes Head CRC Err, Tail CRC Err,
Decode Err, and Random Err.
Note: As the occurrence possibility of specified FlaxRay frame is very low, it is
recommended that you set the oscilloscope to "Normal" trigger mode when the
trigger condition is set to "Frame", so as to prevent the instrument from triggering
automatically while waiting for the specified frame. The same goes for "Error" trigger
condition. In addition, when multiple FlexRay errors occur at the same time, you
need to adjust the trigger holdoff so as to view the specific error.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-45
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
LIN Trigger (Option)
MSO7000/DS7000 can trigger on the sync field of LIN signal, and can also trigger on
the specified identifier, data, or frame.
The data frame format of the LIN bus is as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-20 Data Frame Format of the LIN Bus
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "LIN". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously to select the trigger type or enable the touch
screen to tap the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Press When, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired trigger
condition, then press down the knob to select it. You can also press When
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Sync: triggers on the last bit of the sync field.
⚫ ID: triggers when the frame with an ID equal to the selected value is detected.
Press ID, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set ID.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-46 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
⚫ Data: triggers when the data that meet the preset conditions are found.
➢ Press More → Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For
setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ Press Bytes, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 8.
⚫ Data&ID: triggers when a frame with a specified ID and data that meet the
preset conditions are both found.
➢ Press More → Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For
setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ Press Bytes, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 8.
➢ Press ID, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set ID.
⚫ Sleep: triggers when the sleep frame is found.
⚫ Wakeup: triggers when the wakeup frame is found.
⚫ Error: triggers on the specified type of error frame. Press Error Type and select
the desired error type: Sync, Even Odd, or Check Sum.
Protocol Version:
Press More → Version to select the protocol version that matches the signal under
test. The available versions include 1.X, 2.X, and Both.
Baud Rate:
Press More → Baud to set the baud rate. Three setting methods are available for
baud rate:
⚫ Press Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed numeric
keypad.
⚫ Press Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the preset baud
rate from the available options. The available baud rates include 1.2 kbps, 2.4
kbps, 4.8 kbps, 9.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps, and etc.
⚫ Press Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the baud rate at a
small step.
Sample Position:
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level at
this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from the
start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-47
Figure 5-21 Sample Position
Press More → Sample Position, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the sample position. The settable range is from 10%
to 90%.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
I2S Trigger (Option)
In I2S trigger, the oscilloscope searches for the specified data value and take it as the
condition for identifying the trigger. You need to specify the serial clock line (SCLK, 1
pulse is found on the clock line once 1 bit of digital audio data is sent), frame clock
line (WS, used for switch the audio channel data), and serial data line (SDA, used for
transmit audio data represented in binary (2's complement)).
Below is the sequential chart of I2S bus.
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-48 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Figure 5-22 Sequential Chart of I2S Bus
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "I2S". Press down
the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below. You
can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to tap the desired
trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press SCLK, WS, and SDA to specify the sources for SCLK, WS, and SDA
respectively. The available choices are CH1-CH4, EXT, or D0-D15. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press SCLK Edge continuously or rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired clock edge.
⚫
Rising: samples the SDA data on the rising edge of the clock.
⚫ Falling: samples the SDA data on the falling edge of the clock.
Audio:
Press Audio continuously or rotate the multifunction knob to select "Left",
"Right", or "Either".
Trigger Condition:
Press More → When, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
trigger condition, then press down the knob to select it. You can also press When
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ =: triggers when the channel's data equal the set data value. Press Data to set
the data bit. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger
(Option)".
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-49
⚫ ≠: triggers when the channel's data do not equal the set data value. Press Data
to set the data bit. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger
(Option)".
⚫ <: triggers when the channel's data are smaller than the set data value. Press
Data Max to set the upper limit of the data bit. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ >: triggers when the channel's data are greater than the set data value. Press
Data Min to set the lower limit of the data bit. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ <>: triggers when the channel's data are smaller than the upper limit of the
data value and greater than the lower limit of the data value. Press Data Max
and Data Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data bit respectively.
For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ ><: triggers when the channel's data are greater than the upper limit of the
data value or smaller than the lower limit of the data value. Press Data Max and
Data Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data bit respectively. For
setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
Width:
Press More → Width, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the width. Its range is from 4 to 32.
User Width:
Press More → User Width, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the user width. Its range is from 4 to 32.
Note: The user width is smaller than or equal to the width.
Alignment:
Press More → Alignment and rotate the multifunction knob to select the
alignment way for data signal. You can also press Alignment continuously to select
the alignment way or enable the touch screen to tap the desired alignment way and
select it.
I2S: MSB (Most Significant Bit) of data for each sample is sent first, and LSB (Least
Significant Bit) is sent last. The MSB appears on the SDA line one bit clock after the
edge of the WS transition.
LJ: data transmission (MSB first) begins at the edge of the WS transition.
RJ: data transmission (MSB first) is right-justified to the WS transition.
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-50 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level:
Rotate the Trigger
LEVEL knob to adjust the trigger level/threshold level. Refer
to "Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level". The current trigger level/threshold level
value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
MIL-STD-1553 Trigger (Option)
1553B is the abbreviation for the MIL-STD-1553 bus. MSO7000/DS7000 can trigger
on the sync field of 1553B bus, and can also trigger on the specified data word,
command word, status word, or error type.
Trigger Type:
Press Type, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "MIL-STD-1553".
Press down the knob to select the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also press Type continuously or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired trigger type and select it.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Press When, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired trigger
condition, then press down the knob to select it. You can also press When
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Sync: triggers on the specified sync type. After the trigger condition is selected,
press Sync to select the desired sync type: Data Sync, Cmd/Status Sync, or All
Sync.
⚫ Data: triggers on the specified data word. After the trigger condition is selected,
press Comp to select the comparison conditions. The available choices include
=, ≠, >, <, ><, <>.
➢ =: triggers when the channel's data word equals the set data word. Press
Min to set the lower limit of the data word. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ ≠: triggers when the channel's data word does not equal the set data word.
Press Min to set the lower limit of the data word. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ <: triggers when the channel's data word is smaller than the set data word.
Press Max to set the upper limit of the data word. For setting methods,
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-51
refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ >: triggers when the channel's data word is greater than the set data word.
Press Min to set the lower limit of the data word. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ <>: triggers when the channel's data word is smaller than the upper limit of
the data word and greater than the lower limit of the data word. Press Max
and Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data word respectively.
For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ ><: triggers when the channel's data word is greater than the upper limit of
the data word or smaller than the lower limit of the data word. Press Max
and Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data word respectively.
For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ RTA: triggers on the specified remote terminal address. After this trigger
condition is selected, press RTA to set the remote terminal address. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ RTA+11Bit: triggers on the RTA and the remaining 11 bits. After this trigger
condition is selected:
➢ Press RTA to set the remote terminal address. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ Press Bit time to set the bit time position value to 0 (low), 1 (high), or X
(don't care). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger
(Option)".
⚫ Error: triggers on the specified error type. After this trigger condition is selected,
press Err Type to select the error type.
➢ Sync Error: triggers when an invalid sync pulse is found.
➢ Check Error: triggers when the parity bit is incorrect for the data in the
word.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Press Level Select
(when "Data" is selected for the trigger condition, press More → Level Select),
then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the desired level type for adjustment,
and then press down the knob to select the type. You can also press Level Select
continuously or enable the touch screen to tap the desired level type and select it.
➢ Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
➢ Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
➢ Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,
and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower
limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.
Note: In MIL-STD-1553 trigger, pressing Trigger LEVEL can quickly switch the
current level adjustment type.
Rotate the Trigger LEVEL knob to adjust the corresponding trigger level.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-52 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
During the adjustment of trigger level, two trigger level lines appear on the screen,
and they move up and down with the change of the trigger level. At the same time,
the real-time trigger level and slope information is displayed at the lower-left corner
of the screen (as shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger
level, L indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level
deviation). When you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and
the trigger level information at the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about
2 s. The current trigger level deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
Polarity:
Press More → Polarity to select the desired polarity. The polarities available are
positive polarity (
) and negative polarity ( ).
Trigger Mode:
In the trigger control area (Trigger) on the front panel, press Mode to quickly switch
the current trigger mode. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Zone Trigger
MSO7000/DS7000 series oscilloscope supports the zone trigger and provides two
rectangle areas: Trigger zone A and Trigger zone B. You can set the trigger conditions
to "Intersect" or "Not intersect". Refer to "Rectangle Drawing" to select "Trigger
zone A" or "Trigger zone B" to open the zone trigger setting menu. You can also press
Measure → Analyze → Zone trigger to enter the zone trigger setting menu.
Enable or disable Trigger zone A or Trigger zone B:
Press Zone A enable or Zone B enable continuously to enable or disable Trigger
zone A or Trigger zone B. You can also refer to "Rectangle Drawing" to select
"Trigger zone A" or "Trigger zone B" to enable Trigger zone A or Trigger zone B. If
both Trigger zone A and Trigger zone B are disabled, then the zone trigger function is
disabled. At this time, you must enable either of them to re-enable the zone trigger.
Note: The zone trigger function is disabled in "XY Mode" and "ROLL Mode".
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 5-53
Select Source A or Source B:
Press Source A or Source B, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired source, and then press down the knob to select the source. You can also
press Source A Source B continuously to select the trigger source or enable the
touch screen to tap the desired trigger source and select it. The available sources
include CH1-CH4. The zone name color and the zone color are the same as the color
of the selected source channel.
Set the conditions for Trigger zone A and Trigger zone B
Press Zone A or Zone B , rotate the multifunction knob to select "Intersect" or
"Not intersect", then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Zone A or
Zone B continuously to select the condition, or enable the touch screen to tap the
desired condition and select it.
If you enable Zone A, select CH1 as Source A, and select "Intersect" as the condition,
as shown in the figure below.
If you enable Zone A, select CH1 as Source A, and select "Not intersect" as the
condition, the following figure is displayed.
Tip
If you enable both Trigger zone A and Trigger zone B, then perform the "A&&B"
operation, and it will become the final trigger condition.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-54 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Trigger Output Connector
The trigger output connector ([TRIG OUT]) on the rear panel of MSO7000/DS7000
series can output trigger signals (hardware trigger) determined by the current
setting.
Figure 5-23 Trigger Output Connector
Press Utility → System → AUX OUT to select "TrigOut”. A signal which reflects the
current capture rate of the oscilloscope can be output from the [TRIG OUT]
connector each time a trigger is generated by the oscilloscope. If this signal is
connected to a waveform display device to measure the frequency, the measurement
result is the same as the current capture rate.
Note: If you press Utility → System → AUX OUT to select "PassFail", then in the
pass/fail test, when a pass/fail event is detected, the oscilloscope outputs a pulse
from the rear-panel [TRIG OUT] connector.
Trigger Output Connector
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-1
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
MSO7000/DS7000 can perform math operations, auto measurements, and cursor
measurements on sampled and displayed data.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Math Operation
◼ Auto Measurement
◼ Cursor Measurement
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Math Operation
Press Math in the waveform control area (Wave) on the front panel to open the
math operation menu. You can also tap the function navigation icon at the
lower-left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then tap the "Math"
icon to open the math operation menu. This oscilloscope supports four math
operations: Math1, Math2, Math3, and Math4. The following section takes Math1 as
an example to introduce the math operation in detail.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select the desired math function. Press
Operation continuously to enable or disable the operation. When enabled, the
results of math operation are displayed with purple waveforms on the screen, and
the math operation formula, vertical scale, and other parameters (the displayed data
parameters are different for different math operations) are displayed at the bottom
of the screen. The results of the math operation can be further measured. This
oscilloscope supports enabling the four math operations at the same time, as shown
in the figure below.
MSO7000/DS7000 series can realize multiple math operations between waveforms of
different channels, including
⚫ arithmetic operations (A+B, A-B, A×B, and A/B)
⚫ FFT operation
⚫ logic operation: A&&B, A||B, A^B, and !A
⚫ function operation: Intg, Diff, Sqrt, Lg, Ln, Exp, Abs, and AX+B (linear function)
⚫ math filter: low-pass filter, high-pass filter, band-pass filter, and band-stop filter
Note: When you select the source, only the enabled channel is available.
Addition
Adds the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by point and
displays the results.
Press MATH → Math1 → Operator to select "A+B":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the addition operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for Source A and Source B. Then press down the knob
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-3
to select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously
or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and the offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so
as to better to observe.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Expand to expand or compress the math operation waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Subtraction
Subtracts the waveform voltage values of signal source B from that of source A point
by point and displays the results.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A-B":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the subtraction operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for Source A and Source B. Then press down the knob
to select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously
or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so
as to better observe.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Expand to expand or compress the math operation waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Multiplication
Multiplies the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by point and
displays the results.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A×B":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the multiplication operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for Source A and Source B. Then press down the knob
to select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously
or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-5
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so
as to better observe.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Expand to expand or compress the measurement waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Division
Divides the waveform voltage values of signal source A by that of source B point by
point and displays the results. It can be used to analyze the multiple relationships of
waveforms of two channels.
Note: When the voltage of signal source B is 0 V, the division result is treated as 0.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A÷B":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the division operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for Source A and Source B. Then press down the knob
to select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously
or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-6 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so
as to better observe.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Expand to expand or compress the measurement waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
FFT
FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is used to transform time-domain signals to
frequency-domain components (frequency spectrum). MSO7000/DS7000
oscilloscope provides FFT operation function which enables you to observe the
time-domain waveform and spectrum of the signal at the same time. FFT operation
can facilitate the following works:
⚫ Measure harmonic components and distortion in the system;
⚫ Display the characteristics of the noise in DC power;
⚫ Analyze vibration.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "FFT":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the FFT operation function.
When enabled, the operation results are displayed as purple waveforms on the
screen. At the same time, the parameters such as vertical scale, center
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-7
frequency, and resolution are displayed at the bottom of the screen, as shown in
the following figure. Of which, FFT resolution is the quotient of the sample rate
and the number of FFT points. If the number of FFT points is a fixed value
(65535 at most), then the lower the sample rate, the higher the resolution.
⚫ Press Source, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel.
Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press Source
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available
channels are CH1, CH2, CH3, and CH4.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset. If the source channel unit is set to "V" and the
impedance is set to "1 MΩ", then the offset unit is displayed as dBV. If the source
channel unit is set to "V" and the impedance is set to "50 Ω", then the offset unit
is displayed as dBm. If the source channel unit is set to other units and the
impedance is set to "1 MΩ", then the offset unit is displayed as dB. If the source
channel unit is set to other units and the impedance is set to "50 Ω", then the
offset unit is displayed as dBm.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen and use
the "Pinch & Stretch" gesture to adjust the vertical scale.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so as to
better observe.
⚫ Press More → Unit to select the vertical unit. The vertical unit can be set to
dBm/dBV or Vrms. The vertical amplitude can be expressed both in log form and
linear form, with dBm/dBV and Vrms as the unit respectively. If you need to
display the FFT spectrum within a larger dynamic range, dBm/dBV is
recommended.
⚫ Press More → X continuously to select "Span-Center" (frequency range to
center frequency) or "Start-End" (start frequency to stop frequency).
➢ "Span-Center" (frequency range to center frequency): the frequency range
refers to the screen width, and you can divide the frequency range by 10 to
obtain the frequency per division. Press Span to set the frequency range of
the frequency-domain waveform. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "Parameter Setting Method". Press Center to set the frequency of
the frequency-domain waveform relative to the horizontal center of the
screen. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting
Vertical Scale Sample Rate Center Frequency Span Resolution
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-8 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Method".
➢ "Start-End" (start frequency to stop frequency): start frequency refers to
the frequency at the left side of the screen. Press Start to set the start
frequency of the frequency-domain waveform. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". Stop frequency refers to
the frequency at the right side of the screen. Press End to set the stop
frequency of the frequency-domain waveform. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Press More → Peak Search to enter the peak search menu.
Press Peak Search continuously to enable or disable the peak search function.
When enabled, the peak search results are displayed on the screen, as shown in
the figure below. Enable the touch screen and tap the "Math" label at the top of
the peak search results to switch among Math1-Math4.
➢ Press Peak Number, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the number of peaks. The available range is
from 1 to 15. By default, it is 5.
➢ Press Threshold, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the threshold of the peak.
➢ Press Excursion, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the excursion of the peak.
➢ Press Table Order, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
sorting mode of the peak. Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Table Order continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available sorting mode is "Amp Order" and "Freq Order". By default, it is
"Amp Order".
➢ Press Export, and the save setting menu is displayed. You can export the
peak search results to the internal memory or the external USB storage
device in CSV format. For detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in
"Store and Load".
⚫ Press More → Window to select the desired window function.
Spectral leakage can be considerably decreased when a window function is used.
MSO7000/DS7000 provides 6 FFT window functions (as shown in Table 6-1)
which have different characteristics and are applicable to measuring different
waveforms. You need to select the window function according to the
characteristics of the waveform to be measured.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-9
Table 6-1 Window Function
Window
Function
Characteristics
Waveforms Applicable to the
Window Function
Rectangular
Best frequency
resolution
Poorest
amplitude
resolution
Similar to the
situation when
no window is
applied.
Transient or short pulse, the signal
levels before and after the
multiplication are basically the same.
Sine waveforms with the same
amplitudes and rather similar
frequencies.
Wide band random noise with
relatively slow change of waveform
spectrum.
Blackman-Harris
Best amplitude
resolution
Poorest
frequency
resolution
Single frequency signal, searching for
higher order harmonics.
Hanning
Better frequency
resolution and
poorer amplitude
resolution
compared with
Rectangular
Sine, periodic, and narrow band
random noise.
Hamming
A little bit better
frequency
resolution than
Hanning
Transient or short pulse, the signal
levels before and after the
multiplication are rather different.
Flattop
Measure the
signals
accurately
Measure the signal that has no
accurate reference and requires an
accurate measurement
Triangle
Better frequency
resolution
Measure the narrow band signal and
that has strong noise interference
⚫ For FFT math operation setting label, refer to descriptions in "Math Operation
Label".
⚫ Press More → More, and press Color Grade continuously to enable or disable
the color grade display of the FFT operation results. When enabled, different
colors are displayed on the screen to indicate the times of data acquisition or
acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and
display the color grade again.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-10 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
"AND" Operation
Performs logic "AND" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic AND operation of
two binary bits are shown in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Logic "AND" Operation
A
B
A&&B
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A&&B":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "AND" operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for Source A and Source B. Then press down the knob
to select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously
or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
Note: Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH1, press More → Thre.CH1 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH2, press More → Thre.CH2 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH3, press More → Thre.CH3 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH4, press More → Thre.CH4 to set the
Tip
FFT shortcut operation: Enable the touch screen, and then tap the function
navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to open the function
navigation. Then, tap the "FFT" icon to open the FFT menu. This oscilloscope
supports 4 FFTs: FFT1, FFT2, FFT3, and FFT4. For details, refer to the
descriptions in this section.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-11
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Press Offset, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
offset of the operation results. You can also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Size, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the waveform
size. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Size continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. The available sizes include "Small",
"Medium", and "Large". Also, you can rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE to
adjust the waveform size.
⚫ Press More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so
as to better observe.
⚫ Press More → Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
"OR" Operation
Performs logic "OR" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic OR operation of
two binary bits are as shown in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3 Logic "OR" Operation
A
B
A||B
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A||B":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "OR" operation function.
Tip
The thresholds of the digital channels (D0-D15) are respectively set in the LA
module.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-12 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
⚫ Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for Source A and Source B. Then press down the knob
to select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously
or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
Note: Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH1, press More → Thre.CH1 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH2, press More → Thre.CH2 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH3, press More → Thre.CH3 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH4, press More → Thre.CH4 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Press Offset, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
offset of the operation results. You can also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Size, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the waveform
size. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Size continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. The available sizes include "Small",
"Medium", and "Large". Also, you can rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE to
adjust the waveform size.
⚫ Press More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so
as to better observe.
⚫ Press More → Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
"XOR" Operation
Performs logic "XOR" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic XOR operation of
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-13
two binary bits are as shown in Table 6-4.
Table 6-4 Logic "XOR" Operation
A
B
A^B
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A^B":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "XOR" operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA and SourceB respectively, and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the channel for Source A and Source B. Then press down the knob
to select the channel. You can also press SourceA and SourceB continuously
or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The available channels for
Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
Note: Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH1, press More → Thre.CH1 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH2, press More → Thre.CH2 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH3, press More → Thre.CH3 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH4, press More → Thre.CH4 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Press Offset, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
offset of the operation results. You can also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Size, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the waveform
size. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Size continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. The available sizes include "Small",
"Medium", and "Large". Also, you can rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE to
adjust the waveform size.
⚫ Press More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so
as to better observe.
⚫ Press More → Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-14 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
"NOT" Operation
Performs logic "NOT" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic "NOT" operation of
two binary bits are as shown in Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 Logic "NOT" Operation
A
!A
0
1
1
0
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "!A":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "NOT" operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
Note: Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH1, press More → Thre.CH1 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH2, press More → Thre.CH2 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH3, press More → Thre.CH3 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH4, press More → Thre.CH4 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Press Offset, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
offset of the operation results. You can also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen to adjust the vertical offset.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-15
⚫ Press Size, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the waveform
size. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Size continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. The available sizes include "Small",
"Medium", and "Large". Also, you can rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE to
adjust the waveform size.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so as to
better observe.
⚫ Press More → Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
Intg
Calculates the integral of the selected source. For example, you can use integral to
measure the area under a waveform or the pulse energy.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Intg":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Intg" operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better
observe.
⚫ Press More → Bias to set the DC offset correction factor for the input signal.
Note that this parameter can only be set by using the numeric keypad.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-16 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Diff
Calculates the discrete time derivative of the selected source. For example, you can
use differentiate to measure the instantaneous slope of a waveform.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Diff":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Diff" operation function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better
observe.
⚫ Press More → Smooth to set the number of smoothing times in differential
operation. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting
Method".
Note: As the high-frequency component of waveform data has a great impact
on the differential operation, you need to adjust the parameter "Smooth" to a
larger value, so as to restore the low-frequency component.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-17
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Sqrt
Calculates the square root of the selected source point by point and displays the
results.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Sqrt":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Sqrt" operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better
observe.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
Tip
Because differentiation is very sensitive to noise, it is helpful to set acquisition
mode to "Average".
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-18 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Lg (Base 10 Exponential)
Calculates the base 10 exponential of the selected source point by point and displays
the results.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Lg":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Lg" operation function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better
observe.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-19
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Ln
Calculates the natural logarithm (Ln) of the selected source point by point and
displays the results.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Ln":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Ln" operation function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better
observe.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-20 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Exp
Calculates the exponential of the selected source point by point and displays the
results.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Exp":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Exp" operation function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better
observe.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-21
Abs
Calculates the absolute value of the selected source and displays the results.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Abs":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Abs" operation function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better
observe.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-22 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Low Pass
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current upper limit
frequency to pass.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "LowPass":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "LowPass" operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press ωc to set the upper limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
Note: The settable range of the upper limit frequency is related to the Math
sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math function is
enabled). The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of the memory
depth can affect the Math sample rate.
⚫ Press More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as
to better observe.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-23
High Pass
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current lower limit
frequency to pass.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "HighPass":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "HighPass" operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press ωc to set the lower limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
Note: The settable range of the lower limit frequency is related to the Math
sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math function is
enabled). The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of the memory
depth can affect the Math sample rate.
⚫ Press More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as
to better observe.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-24 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Band Pass
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current lower limit
frequency and lower than the current upper limit frequency to pass.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "BandPass":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "BandPass" operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better
observe.
⚫ Press More → ωc1 to set the lower limit frequency. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Press More → ωc2 to set the upper limit frequency. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
Note: The settable ranges of the upper and lower limit frequencies are related
to the Math sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math
function is enabled). The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of
the memory depth can affect the Math sample rate.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-25
Band Stop
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current lower limit
frequency and higher than the current upper limit frequency to pass.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Bandstop":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Bandstop" operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better
observe.
⚫ Press More → ωc1 to set the lower limit frequency. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Press More → ωc2 to set the upper limit frequency. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
Note: The settable ranges of the upper and lower limit frequencies are related
to the Math sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math
function is enabled). The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of
the memory depth can affect the Math sample rate.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-26 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
AX+B
Applies a linear function to the selected source, and displays the results.
Press Math → Math1 → Operator to select "AX+B":
⚫ Press Operation continuously to enable or disable the "AX+B" operation
function.
⚫ Press SourceA, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel for
Source A. Then press down the knob to select the channel. You can also press
SourceA continuously or enable the touch screen to select the channel. The
available channels for Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Press Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can
also directly rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION or enable the touch screen
to adjust the vertical offset.
⚫ Press Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". You can also
directly rotate Wave Vertical
SCALE or enable the touch screen to adjust
the vertical scale.
⚫ Press AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation
results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better
observe.
⚫ Press More → A to set the value of A. Note that this parameter can only be set
by using the numeric keypad.
⚫ Press More → B to set the value of B. Note that this parameter can only be set
by using the numeric keypad.
⚫ Press More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Press More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Press More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-27
Math Operation Label
Press Label to enter the label setting menu.
⚫ Press Display continuously to enable or disable the label display of the
waveform. If it is enabled, the label will be displayed at the left side of the
waveform.
⚫ Press Library to select the preset waveform label, including ADD, SUB, MUL,
DIV, FFT, AND, OR, XOR, NOT, Intg, Diff, Sqrt, Lg, Ln, Exp, Abs, LPas, HPas, BPas,
BStop, and AX+B.
⚫ Press Label, and the label editing interface is automatically displayed. You can
input the label manually. For details, refer to descriptions in "Channel Label".
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-28 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Auto Measurement
MSO7000/DS7000 provides auto measurements for 41 waveform parameters, as
well as the statistics and analysis of the measurement results.
Quick Measurement after AUTO
When the oscilloscope is correctly connected and has detected a valid input signal,
press AUTO to enable the waveform auto setting function and open the auto setting
function menu.
⚫
: Press this key, and then the complete single period of the signal is
displayed automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make
measurements for the "period" and "frequency" of the currently displayed
waveforms in a complete single period. The measurement results are displayed
at the bottom of the screen.
⚫
: Press this key, and then multiple periods of the signal are displayed
automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements
for the "period" and "frequency" of the currently displayed waveforms in a
multiple periods. The measurement results are displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
⚫
: Press this key, and then one rising edge of the signal is displayed
automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements
for the "rise time" of the currently displayed rising edge. The measurement
results are displayed at the bottom of the screen. By default, it is intended for
the fast edge signal.
⚫
: Press this key, and then one falling edge of the signal is displayed
automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements
for the "fall time" of the currently displayed falling edge. The measurement
results are displayed at the bottom of the screen. By default, it is intended for
the fast edge signal.
⚫
: press this key, and the system returns to the last set menu.
⚫ Press Option to enter the AUTO option setting menu.
➢ Press Lock to lock the AUTO function. To unlock the AUTO function, use the
following two methods:
Method 1: Send the remote command :SYSTem:AUToscale ON to unlock the
AUTO function.
Method 2: Press Lock again, then a password input dialog box is displayed.
Input the password. By default, there is no password, and pressing OK
directly can unlock the function.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-29
➢ Press Peak to Peak to enable or disable the peak-peak priority setting.
This function is intended for the shifted signal. If there is a large deviation,
you can view the signal waveform in priority when you enable the function.
➢ Press CH to select "All" or "Open".
If you select "All", press AUTO and the system will test the 4 analog
channels (CH1-CH4) in sequence. If no signal is found on the channel, then
the channel is disabled; if a signal is found on the channel, adjust the
channel to an optimal scale to display the signal.
If you select "Open", press AUTO and the system will only test the enabled
channels.
➢ Press Overlay to enable or disable the waveform overlay display function.
If enabled, waveforms of different channels will be displayed in the same
position of the screen; if disabled, waveforms of different channels will be
displayed on the screen from top to bottom in sequence.
➢ Press Coupling to enable or disable the coupling hold function. If enabled,
after you press AUTO, the settings for the channel coupling remain
unchanged; if disabled, then the channel coupling is, by default, set to
"DC".
➢ Press Password, and then the password reset dialog box is displayed, as
shown in the figure below. You can reset the password. The initial password
is empty.
⚫
: Press this key to cancel the auto setting and recovers to the parameter
settings prior to pressing the AUTO key.
Note:
The waveform auto setting function requires that the frequency of the signal
should be greater than or equal to 35 Hz, the amplitude greater than or equal to 5
mV. If not meeting the conditions, the waveform auto setting function may be invalid.
Tip
If you lock the Auto function and then exit the auto setting function
menu, you can press Utility → More → Auto Config to enter the auto
setting function menu again to unlock the Auto function.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-30 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Measurement Parameter
Press Measure on the front panel to enter the measurement setting menu. You can
set the measurement source, enable or disable the all measurement function, the
statistical analysis function, and etc. You can also quickly make measurements for 41
waveform parameters. The measurement results will be displayed on the screen. The
measurement results on the screen are always marked in the same color as the
current measurement channel. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the auto
measurement label "Measure" at the top of the screen to enter the measurement
setting menu.
Note: If there is no signal input for the current source or the measurement result is
not within the valid range (too large or too small), then the measurement results are
invalid, and "*****" is displayed on the screen. Please re-input the signal or set the
signal.
Time Parameters
Figure 6-1 Time Parameters
1
． Period: defined as the time between the middle threshold points of two
consecutive, like-polarity edges.
2
． Frequency: defined as the reciprocal of period.
3
． Rise Time: indicates the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the threshold
lower limit to the threshold upper limit.
4
． Fall Time: indicates the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the threshold
upper limit to the threshold lower limit.
5． +Width: indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a rising edge
to the threshold middle value of the next falling edge.
Fall Time
Threshold
Upper Limit
Threshold
Middle Value
Threshold
Lower Limit
+Width
-Width
Period
Rise Time
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-31
6． -Width: indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a falling edge
to the threshold middle value of the next rising edge.
7
． +Duty: indicates the ratio of the positive pulse width to the period.
8
． -Duty:indicates the ratio of the negative pulse width to the period.
9
． Tvmax: indicates the time that corresponds to the maximum value of the
waveform (Vmax).
10. Tvmin: indicates the time that corresponds to the minimum value of the
waveform (Vmin).
Note: The default values for threshold upper limit, threshold middle value, and
threshold low limit are 90%, 50%, and 10%, respectively. You can press Measure
→ Setting to enter the sub-menu to set the parameters.
Count Values
1
． Positive Pulse Count: The number of positive pulses that rise from under the
threshold lower limit to above the threshold upper limit.
2
． Negative Pulse Count: The number of negative pulses that fall from above
the threshold upper limit to below the threshold lower limit.
3
． Rising Edge Count: The number of rising edges that rise from under the
threshold lower limit to above the threshold upper limit.
Positive Pulse Count = n
1 2 n
Negative Pulse Count = n
1 2 n
Threshold Upper Limit
Threshold Lower Limit
Threshold Upper Limit
Threshold Lower Limit
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-32 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
4
． Falling Edge Count: The number of falling edges that fall from above the
threshold upper limit to below the threshold lower limit.
Note:
⚫ The above measurement items are only available for the analog channels.
⚫ The default values for threshold upper limit and threshold low limit are 90% and
10%, respectively. You can press Measure → Setting to enter the sub-menu
to set the parameters.
Delay and Phase
Source A
Source B
Period
Delay
1
． Delay(A →B ): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle
values of the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative delay
indicates that the rising edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.
2
． Delay(A →B ): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle
values of the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative delay
Rising Edge Count = n
1 2 n
Falling Edge Count = n
1 2 n
Threshold Upper Limit
Threshold Lower Limit
Threshold Upper Limit
Threshold Lower Limit
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-33
indicates that the falling edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.
3
． Delay(A →B ): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle
values of the rising edge of Source A and the falling edge of Source B. Negative
delay indicates that the rising edge of Source A occurred after the falling edge of
Source B.
4
． Delay(A →B ): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle
values of the falling edge of Source A and the rising edge of Source B. Negative
delay indicates that the falling edge of Source A occurred after the rising edge of
Source B.
5． Phase(A →B ): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values of the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. It is expressed in
degree. The formula is as follows:
°360×=
sourceA
RR
RR
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
RR
BPhaseA
represents Phase(A →B ),
RR
BDelayA
represents
Delay(A
→B ), and
sourceA
Period
represents period of Source A.
6
． Phase(A →B ): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values of the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B. It is expressed in
degree. The formula is as follows:
°360×=
sourceA
FF
FF
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
FF
BPhaseA
represents Phase(A →B ),
FF
BDelayA
represents
Delay(A
→B ), and
sourceA
Period
represents period of Source A.
7． Phase(A →B ): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values of the rising edge of Source A and falling edge of Source B. It is
expressed in degree. The formula is as follows:
°360×=
sourceA
FR
FR
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
FR
BPhaseA
represents Phase(A →B ),
FR
BDelayA
represents
Delay(A
→B ), and
sourceA
Period
represents period of Source A.
8
． Phase(A →B ): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values of the falling edge of Source A and the rising edge of Source B. It is
expressed in degree. The formula is as follows:
°360×=
sourceA
RF
RF
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
RF
BPhaseA
represents Phase(A →B ),
RF
BDelayA
represents
Delay(A
→B ), and
sourceA
Period
represents period of Source A.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-34 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Note:
⚫ Source A and Source B can be any channel among CH1-CH4, Math1-Math4, or
D0-D15. You can press Measure → Add to enter the sub-menu to set the
parameters.
⚫ The default threshold middle value is 50%. You can press Measure → Setting
to enter the sub-menu to set the parameters.
Voltage Parameters
Figure 6-2 Voltage Parameters
1
． Vmax: indicates the voltage value from the highest point of the waveform to
the GND.
2
． Vmin: indicates the voltage value from the lowest point of the waveform to the
GND.
3
． Vpp: the voltage value from the highest point to the lowest point of the
waveform.
4
． Vtop: indicates the voltage value from the flat top of the waveform to the GND.
5
． Vbase: indicates the voltage value from the flat base of the waveform to the
GND.
6
． Vamp: indicates the voltage value from the top of the waveform to the base of
the waveform.
7
． Vupper: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold
maximum value.
8
． Vmid: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold
middle value.
9
． Vlower: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold
minimum value.
10. Vavg: indicates the arithmetic average value on the whole waveform or in the
Preshoot
Overshoot
Vamp
Vbase
Vmax
Vmin
Vpp
Vtop
Vupper
Vmid
Vlower
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-35
gating area. The formula is shown as follows:
n
x
Average
n
i
i
∑
1=
=
Wherein,
i
x
is the measurement result of the
i
th point, and
n
is the number
of points being measured.
11. VRMS: indicates the root mean square value on the whole waveform or in the
gating area. The formula is as follows:
n
x
RMS
n
i
i
∑
1
2
=
=
Wherein,
i
x
is the measurement result of the
i
th point, and
n
is the number
of points being measured.
12. Per.VRMS: indicates the root mean square value within a period. The formula is
as shown above.
13. Overshoot: indicates the ratio of the difference between the maximum value
and the top value of the waveform to the amplitude value.
14. Preshoot: indicates the ratio of the difference between the minimum value and
the base value of the waveform to the amplitude value.
15. Std. Dev: indicates the root-mean-square value of the waveforms, with the DC
component removed. The formula is shown as follows:
n
Averagex
DevS
n
i
i
∑
1
2
)(
.td
=
−
=
Wherein,
i
x
is the amplitude of the
i
th point,
Average
is the waveform average
value, and
n
is the number of the points being measured.
Other Parameters
1
． Positive Slew Rate: On the rising edge, first calculate the difference between
the high value and the low value, then use the difference to divide the
corresponding time value to obtain the positive slew rate.
2
． Negative Slew Rate: On the falling edge, first calculate the difference
between the low value and the high value, then use the difference to divide the
corresponding time value to obtain the negative slew rate.
3
． Area: indicates the area of the whole waveform within the screen. The unit is
V*s. The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the vertical
offset) is positive, and the area of the waveform below the zero reference is
negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the area of the whole
waveform within the screen.
4
． Period Area: indicates the area of the first period of waveform on the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-36 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
The unit is V*s. The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the
vertical offset) is positive, and the area of the waveform below the zero
reference is negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the whole
period area.
Measurement Settings
1
． Measurement Category
Press Measure → Add → Category to select "Horizontal", "Vertical", or
"Other". Meanwhile, the specific measurement parameters are displayed on the
screen, as shown in the figure below. In the measurement category area, you
can also rotate the multifunction knob
to select "Horizontal", "Vertical", or
"Other". Then press down the knob to switch to the desired measurement
category.
⚫ "Horizontal" measurement parameters: Period, Freq, RiseTime, FallTime,
+Width, -Width, +Duty, -Duty, +Pulses, -Pulses, +Edges, -Edges, Tvmax,
Tvmin, +SlewRate, and –SlewRate.
⚫ "Vertical" measurement parameters: Vmax, Vmin, Vpp, Vtop, Vbase, Vamp,
Vmid, Vlower, Vavg, VRMS, Per.VRMS, Overshot, Preshoot, Area, Per.Area,
and Variance.
⚫ "Other" measurement parameters: Delay(A
→B ), Delay(A →B ),
Delay(A
→B ), Delay(A →B ), Phase(A →B ), Phase(A →B ),
Phase(A
→B ), and Phase(A →B ).
In the measurement parameter area, rotate the multifunction knob to select
a measurement item and then press down the knob to select it. Then the
measurement results of the item are displayed at the bottom of the screen
(measurement results of up to 10 items can be displayed at most). When you
add a new measurement item, its measurement result will be displayed as the
first, with the original items moving right in sequence. If the number of
Measurement Category Area Measurement Parameter Area
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-37
measurement items added exceeds 10, then when you add one item, the
rightmost item at the bottom of the screen will be disabled. You can also enable
the touch screen to select the measurement category and the measurement
parameters.
2
． Source Selection
For different measurement categories, the selection methods for measurement
sources are different.
⚫ Horizontal and vertical parameter measurement
Press Measure → Add → Source A, rotate the multifunction knob to
select the desired channel for measurement and press down the knob to
select it. You can also press Source A continuously or enable the touch
screen to select the current measurement source. The available channels
include CH1-CH4, Math1-Math4, and D0-D15.
⚫ Other (Delay and Phase) parameter measurement
Press Measure → Add → Source A (Source B) to set the two source
channels for the current measurement category. The available channels
include CH1-CH4, Math1-Math4, and D0-D15.
3
． Indicator
Press Indicator continuously to enable or disable the indicator. You can also
press Measure → Remove → Indicator to enable or disable the indicator. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Measure Mode".
4
． Measurement Settings
Press Measure → Setting to enter the sub-menu of measurement.
⚫ Press Mode to select the measurement mode to "Normal" or
"Precision".
Tip
⚫ When you rotate the multifunction knob
to switch from the
measurement parameter area to the measurement category area, you
need to press down the knob
to select the desired measurement
category.
⚫ In the measurement category area, rotate the multifunction knob
to
select "Analyze". The following figure is displayed. Select "Counter",
"DVM", "Histogram", or "Power" (available when the power analysis
option is installed) to enter the corresponding function setting menu. For
descriptionsn about these functions, refer to relevant chapters.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-38 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
➢ Normal: executes measurement of up to 1 Mpts.
➢ Precision: executes measurement of up to 500 Mpts, improving
the resolution of measurement results. Note, in this mode, the
refresh rate of the waveforms may be reduced.
⚫ Press Type to select "Threshold", "Range", or "Amp Method".
➢ Select "Threshold", and then make the following settings:
--Press Source to select the desired channel for measurement
(CH1-CH4 or Math1-Math4).
--Press Upper to select "Upper(%)" or "Upper(Abs)" first, and
then press the key to set the upper limit of the measurement. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
By default, it is 90%.
--Press Mid to select "Mid(%)" or "Mid(Abs)" first, and then press
the key to set the middle value of the measurement. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". The
middle value is limited by the settings of the upper limit and lower
limit. By default, it is 50%.
--Press Lower to select "Lower(%)" or "Lower(Abs)" first, and
then press the key to set the lower limit of the measurement. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
Increasing the lower limit to the current middle value will
automatically increase the middle value and upper limit to keep
them higher than the lower limit. By default, it is 10%.
--Press Default, and then the upper value, middle value, and lower
value will be restored to the defaults.
➢ Select "Range", and then press Region to select "Main", "Zoom",
or "Cursor".
--Main: indicates that the measurement range is within the main
time base region.
--Zoom: indicates that the measurement range is within the
zoomed time base region. Note: Only when you enable the
delayed sweep function first, can "Zoom" be enabled.
--Cursor: when you select it, two cursors will be displayed on the
screen. At this time, press CursorA and CursorB respectively and
then rotate the multifunction knob
to adjust the positions of
the two cursors to determine the measurement range. Also, you
can press CursorAB and then rotate the multifunction knob
to adjust the positions of the two cursors simultaneously.
➢ Select "Amp Method", and then press Amp Method to select
"Auto" or "Manual". This method affects the measurement method
for the top and base values. If you select "Manual", you need to
set the following parameters:
--Press Top to select "Histogram" or "Max-Min".
--Press Base to select "Histogram" or "Max-Min".
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-39
Remove the Measurement Result
This oscilloscope allows you to remove the measurement results of the parameters.
Press Measure → Remove to enter the "Remove" sub-menu.
⚫ Press Remove to remove the last added measurement item. Note that pressing
this key one time can only remove one measurement item. When you remove a
measurement item, the measurement result of the last added item at the
bottom of the screen will be removed. You can rotate the multifunction knob
to switch the measurement item, then press down the knob or press Remove
to remove the item. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the desired
measurement item, and then press Remove to remove the item.
⚫ Press Remove All to remove all the displayed measurement items.
⚫ Press Indicator to enable or disable the indicator.
Besides, you can also press Measure → Add → Remove to enter the "Remove"
sub-menu.
Statistical Function
Performs statistics and displays the measurement results (Cur, Avg, Max, Min, Dev,
and Cnt) of at most 10 items, as shown in the figure below.
Tip
⚫ Modifying the threshold will affect the measurement results of
the time, delay and phase parameters.
⚫ If you select "Manual" under Amp Method, the measurement
results of other parameters may be affected.
⚫ "Histogram" and "Max-Min" are the internal measurement
algorithm for the oscilloscope. The "Histogram" method here is
different from the Histogram function of the oscilloscope.
Tip
If the "Remove" sub-menu is not displayed in the current menu, when you select
a certain measurement item, the system will automatically enter the "Remove"
sub-menu.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-40 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Press Measure → Statistic to enter the sub-menu of "Statistic".
⚫ Press Statistic to enable or disable the statistical function.
⚫ Press Reset Stat. to clear the history statistics data and makes statistics again.
⚫ Press Count, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the count value. Its range is from 2 to 100,000. By default, it is
1,000.
All Measurement
All measurement could measure the time parameter, count value, voltage
parameters, and other parameters of the current measurement source and display
the results on the screen. Press Measure → All Measure to select "OFF" (disabling
the all measurement function) or select the desired channel for measurement
(CH1-CH4). If you select "CH1", data of all measurement parameters of CH1 are
displayed on the screen.
Note: The removal operation will not clear the measurement results of the
all-measurement function.
Cursor Measurement
Cursor measurement can measure the X-axis values (e.g Time) and Y-axis values
(e.g. Voltage) of the selected waveform. Before making cursor measurement,
connect the signal to the oscilloscope to acquire stable display. All the parameters
supported by the "Auto Measurement" function can be measured with cursor
measurement. The cursor measurement function provides the following two cursors.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-41
⚫ X Cursor
X cursor is a vertical solid/dotted line that is used to make horizontal
adjustments. It can be used to measure time (s), frequency (Hz), phase (°), and
ratio (%).
➢ Cursor A is a vertical solid line (
is displayed at the bottom of the screen),
and Cursor B is a vertical dotted line (
is displayed at the bottom of the
screen).
➢ In the XY cursor mode, X cursor is used to measure the waveform
amplitude of CH1.
⚫ Y Cursor
Y cursor is a horizontal solid/dotted line that is used to make vertical adjustment.
It can be used to measure amplitude (the unit is the same as that of the source
channel amplitude) and ratio (%).
➢ Cursor A is a horizontal solid line (
is displayed at the right section of the
screen), and Cursor B is a horizontal dotted line (
is displayed at the
right section of the screen).
➢ In the XY cursor mode, Y cursor is used to measure the waveform
amplitude of CH2.
Press Cursor on the front panel to open the cursor measurement menu, or enable
the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left
corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Cursor" icon to
open the cursor measurement menu.
In the cursor measurement menu, press Mode and then rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the desired cursor mode (the default is "OFF"). Press down the
knob to select it. You can also press the Mode key continuously or enable the touch
screen to select the desired mode. The available modes are "Manual", "Track", "XY",
and "Measure". When you select "OFF", the cursor measurement function is
disabled.
Y Cursor (Cursor B)
Y Cursor (Cursor A)
X Cursor (Cursor A)
X Cursor (Cursor B)
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-42 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Note: When the Time Base Mode is set to "XY", the XY cursor measurement mode is
valid.
Manual Mode
In this mode, you can adjust the cursor manually to measure the value of the
waveforms of the specified source at the current cursor. The measurement results
are displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen. When you change the cursor
position, the measurement results will be changed accordingly.
Press Mode to select "Manual" to enable the manual cursor measurement function.
If the settings for the parameter such as "Select", "Source", "Hori. Unit", and "Vert.
Unit" are different, the measurement results will be different for cursor measurement.
The measurement results are displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen, as
shown in the figure below.
⚫ AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.
⚫ AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.
⚫ BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.
⚫ BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.
⚫ △X: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
⚫ △Y: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
⚫ 1/△X: indicates the reciprocal of the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and
Cursor B.
1. Select Cursor Type
Press Select continuously to select the cursor type.
⚫ X: It is a pair of vertical solid (Cursor A)/dotted (Cursor B) lines, used for
measuring time parameters. The measurement results include AX, BX, △X,
and 1/△X (displayed only when "s" or "Hz" is selected under Hori. Unit).
⚫ Y: It is a pair of horizontal solid (Cursor A)/dotted (Cursor B) lines, used for
measuring voltage parameters. The measurement results include AY, BY,
and △Y.
2. Select Measurement Source
Press Source, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
source (CH1-CH4). Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Source
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available source
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-43
channels are NONE, CH1-CH4, LA, and Math1-Math4.
Note:
⚫ Only channels currently enabled can be selected.
⚫ When "LA" is selected under Source, Select is grayed out and disabled. By
default, "X" is selected under Select.
3. Adjust Cursor Position
1) When "X" is selected under Select, you can adjust the position of X cursor.
⚫ Press AX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
horizontal position of Cursor A (X cursor). Its adjustable range is
limited within the screen.
⚫ Press BX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
horizontal position of Cursor B (X cursor). Its adjustable range is
limited within the screen.
⚫ Press AX BX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
horizontal position of Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) simultaneously.
Its adjustable range is limited within the screen. The horizontal spacing
between Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) remains unchanged.
2) When "Y" is selected under Select, you can adjust the position of Y cursor.
⚫ Press AY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
position of Cursor A (Y cursor).
⚫ Press BY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
position of Cursor B (Y cursor).
⚫ Press AY BY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
vertical position of Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) simultaneously.
The vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors)
remains unchanged.
Note: If one of the three items (AX, BX, and AX BX) or one of the three items
(AY, BY, and AY BY) is selected, you can press down the multifunction knob
continuously to switch among the three items.
4. Select Screen Region
⚫ When the delayed sweep function is disabled, press More, and "Main" is
automatically selected under Region and cannot be modified.
⚫ When the delayed sweep function is enabled, the screen is divided into two
regions: main time base and zoomed time base. Press Region continuously
to select "Main" or "Zoom".
➢ When "Main" is selected, the cursor is displayed in the main time base
region, and you can measure the parameters in the main time base
region.
➢ When "Zoom" is selected, the cursor is displayed in the zoomed time
base region, and you can measure the parameters in the zoomed time
base region.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-44 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
5. Set the Horizontal/Vertical Measurement Unit
⚫ When "X" is selected under Select, you can set the horizontal measurement
unit. When the source can be Math1-Math4, this menu is grayed out and
disabled.
Press More → Hori. Unit, and rotate the multifunction knob to select
the horizontal measurement unit. Then press down the knob to select it. You
can also press Hori. Unit continuously or enable the touch screen to select
it. The available units include "s", "Hz", "Degree(°)", and "Percent(%)".
➢ s: measures the time value at X Cursor (taking the trigger position as
reference). The measurement results include AX, BX, △X, and 1/△X.
Wherein, AX, BX, and △X all indicate time, and 1/△X indicates
frequency.
➢ Hz: measures the frequency value at X Cursor (taking the trigger
position as reference). The measurement results include AX, BX, △X,
and 1/△X. Wherein, AX, BX, and △X all indicate frequency, and 1/△X
indicates time.
➢ Degree(°): measures the phase value at X Cursor. The measurement
results include AX, BX, and △X, and they are all expressed in degree.
This oscilloscope allows you to set the reference position for the phase
according to your needs. After adjusting X Cursor to a desired position,
press Set Reference to take the current cursor position as the
reference. The current positions of Cursor A and Cursor B are
respectively defined as "0°" and "360°". Meanwhile, two vertical
cursors (in blue) that cannot be moved are displayed on the screen as
the phase reference position (the phase position at "0°" and "360°" are
respectively marked by a solid line and a dotted line). Before you set
manually, the oscilloscope adopts the default phase reference position.
➢ Percent(%): measures ratio at X Cursor. The measurement results
include AX, BX, and △X, and they are all expressed in percentage. This
oscilloscope allows you to set the reference position for the ratio
according to your needs. After adjusting X Cursor to a desired position,
press Set Reference to take the current cursor position as the
reference. The current positions of Cursor A and Cursor B are
respectively defined as "0%" and "100%". Meanwhile, two cursors (in
blue) that cannot be moved are displayed on the screen as the ratio
reference position (the ratio position at "0%" and "100%" are
respectively marked by a solid line and a dotted line). Before you set
manually, the oscilloscope adopts the default ratio reference position.
⚫ When "Y" is selected under Select, you can set the vertical measurement
unit. When the source can be Math1-Math4, this menu is grayed out and
disabled.
Press More → Vert. Unit, and rotate the multifunction knob to select
the vertical measurement unit. Then press down the knob to select it. You
can also press Vert. Unit continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-45
The available units include "Source" and "Percent(%)".
➢ Source: measures the amplitude at Y Cursor (taking the channel
ground point as the reference). The measurement results include AY,
BY, and △Y (its unit is consistent with that of the current source).
➢ Percent(%): measures ratio at Y Cursor. The measurement results
include AY, BY, and △Y, and they are all expressed in percentage.
This oscilloscope allows you to set the reference position for the ratio
according to your needs. After adjusting Y Cursor to a desired position,
press Set Reference to take the current cursor position as the
reference. The current positions of Cursor A and Cursor B are
respectively defined as "0%" and "100%". Meanwhile, two cursors (in
blue) that cannot be moved are displayed on the screen as the ratio
reference position (the ratio position at "0%" and "100%" are
respectively marked by a solid line and a dotted line). Before you set
manually, the oscilloscope adopts the default ratio reference position.
6. Set LA Type
When "LA" is selected under Source, you need to set the LA display type. Press
More and then press La Type continuously to select "HEX" or "BIN".
7. Measurement Example
Measure the period of a sine wave by using the manual cursor measurement
and auto measurement respectively. The measurement results are both 1 ms, as
shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Manual Cursor Measurement Example
Auto
Measurement
Cursor
Measurement
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-46 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Track Mode
In this mode, you can adjust the two pairs of cursors (Cursor A and Cursor B) to
measure the X and Y values on two different sources respectively. The points being
measured on Cursor A and Cursor B are marked by
and respectively. When
the cursors are moved horizontally/vertically, the markers will position on the
waveform automatically. When the waveform is expanded or compressed
horizontally/vertically, the markers will track the points being marked at the last
adjustment of the cursors.
Note: When the delayed sweep function is enabled, the track cursor is within the
expanded area.
Press Mode to select "Track" to enable the cursor track function, and the
measurement results will be displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen, as
shown in the following figure. When you change the measurement parameter for the
track mode, the measurement results will be changed accordingly.
⚫ AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.
⚫ AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.
⚫ BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.
⚫ BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.
⚫ △X: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
⚫ △Y: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
⚫ 1/△X: indicates the reciprocal of the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and
Cursor B.
1. Select Measurement Source
⚫ Press AX Source, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired measurement source. Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press AX Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available source channels are NONE, CH1-CH4, and Math1-Math4.
⚫ Press BX Source, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired source (CH1-CH4). Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press BX Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available source channels are NONE, CH1-CH4, and Math1-Math4.
Note: Only channels currently enabled can be selected.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-47
2. Select the Track Axis
Press Track to select "X" or "Y" as the current track axis. The default is "X".
⚫ X: tracks X Cursor and measures the value at X Cursor.
⚫ Y: tracks Y Cursor and measures the time of the first point at the left side of
the screen.
3. Adjust Cursor Position
1) When "X" is selected under Track, you can adjust the position of X cursor.
⚫ Press AX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
horizontal position of Cursor A (X cursor). Its adjustable range is
limited within the screen.
⚫ Press BX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
horizontal position of Cursor B (X cursor). Its adjustable range is
limited within the screen.
⚫ Press AX BX, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
horizontal position of Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) simultaneously.
Its adjustable range is limited within the screen. The horizontal spacing
between Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) remains unchanged.
2) When "Y" is selected under Track, you can adjust the position of Y cursor.
⚫ Press AY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
position of Cursor A (Y cursor).
⚫ Press BY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the vertical
position of Cursor B (Y cursor).
⚫ Press AY BY, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
vertical position of Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) simultaneously.
The vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors)
remains unchanged.
Note:
⚫ If one of the three items (AX, BX, and AX BX) or one of the three items
(AY, BY, and AY BY) is selected, you can press down the multifunction
knob
continuously to switch among the three items.
⚫ In track mode, the horizontal cursor (or vertical cursor) will track the
marked point in a timely manner (i.g, the cursor will move up and down
with the transient change of the waveform). Thus, the X value (or Y value)
might change even though you do not adjust the cursor.
4. Measurement Example
Measure the waveforms of CH1 and CH2 with Cursor A and Cursor B,
respectively. Then, expand the waveforms horizontally, and you will find that the
cursor will track the point that has been marked, as shown in the following
figure.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-48 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Track Measurement (before Horizontal Expansion):
Track Measurement (after Horizontal Expansion):
XY Mode
XY mode is only available when the horizontal time base mode is "XY" (refer to
"Timebase Mode"). In this mode, two pairs of cursors will appear. You can adjust
the cursor positions to measure the X and Y values at the crossing points of the two
pairs of cursors.
Press Mode to select "XY" to enable the XY cursor measurement function. The
measurement results are displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen, as shown
in the following figure.
⚫ AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.
⚫ AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 6-49
⚫ BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.
⚫ BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.
⚫ △X: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
⚫ △Y: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
1. Adjust Cursor Position
⚫ Press AX and rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the X value at
Cursor A.
⚫ Press BX and rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the X value at
Cursor B.
⚫ Press AY and rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the Y value at
Cursor A.
⚫ Press AY and rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the Y value at
Cursor B.
⚫ Press More → ABX and rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the X
value at Cursor A and the X value at Cursor B simultaneously.
⚫ Press More → ABY and rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the Y
value at Cursor A and the Y value at Cursor B simultaneously.
During the adjustment, the measurement results will change accordingly. The
adjustable range is limited within the screen.
Note: If one of the four items (AX, BX, AY, and BY) is selected, you can press
down the multifunction knob
continuously to switch among the four
items. If you select either of the items (ABX and ABY), you can press down
the multifunction knob
continuously to switch between them.
2. Display Lissajous Legend
This oscilloscope provides the Lissajous schematic diagram under different
frequencies and phase deviation, as shown in Figure 6-4. Press More →
Lissajous, then the Lissajous schematic diagram is displayed.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-50 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Figure 6-4 Lissajous Schematic Diagram
Measure Mode
Press Mode to select "Measure". In this mode, the cursor position for measurement
is displayed.
Press Indicator continuously to enable or disable the indicator. If it is enabled, one
or multiple cursors are displayed on the screen. Before enabling the indicator, you
need to enable at least one parameter for auto measurement. The number of cursors
will change along with the enabled measurement parameters.
Note: If no measurement parameter is selected or no measurement source is input,
no cursor is displayed. When you expand or compress the waveforms horizontally,
the cursor will change accordingly.
Phase deviation
between two signals
Frequency ratio
between two signals
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 7-1
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and
Frequency Counter
MSO7000/DS7000 series oscilloscope provides a built-in digital voltmeter (DVM) and
frequency counter, which enable you to perform an accurate measurement,
improving user experience in counter and frequency measurement.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
◼ Frequency Counter
RIGOL Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter
7-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
The built-in DVM of this oscilloscope provides 3-digit voltage measurements on any
analog channel. DVM measurements are asynchronous from the oscilloscope’s
acquisition system and are always acquiring.
Press Measure → Analyze → DVM to open the DVM setting menu, or enable the
touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner
of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "DVM" icon to open the
DVM setting menu. You can also press Measure → Add, then in the displayed
measurement category area, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Analyze",
and then select "DVM" to open the DVM setting menu.
To Enable or Disable DVM Measurement
In the "DVM" setting menu, press DVM continuously to enable or disable DVM
measurement. When enabled, the following figure is displayed. The DVM display also
has a scale that is determined by the channel's vertical scale and vertical offset. The
scale range is the range of the screen. The scale's yellow triangle pointer shows the
most recent measurement result. The specific value above the pointer shows the
measurement extrema over the last 3 seconds.
Note: DVM measurement and the oscilloscope share the same probe, so the unit for
the DVM measurement is consistent with that of the channel.
To Select the Measurement Source
Press Source in the "DVM" setting menu, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select the desired source. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The analog channel
(CH1-CH4) can be selected to be the measurement source.
Pointer Scale
Source Mode Voltage Value
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 7-3
Note: Even if the analog channel (CH1-CH4) is not enabled, you can still perform the
DVM measurement.
To Select Measurement Mode
Press Mode in the "DVM" setting menu, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select the desired mode, and then press down the knob to select the mode. You can
also press Mode continuously to select the mode or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired mode and select it. The DVM measurement modes include AC RMS, DC,
and AC+DC RMS.
⚫ AC RMS: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data, with the DC
component removed.
⚫ DC: displays the average value of the acquired data.
⚫ AC+DC RMS: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data.
To Set the Limits
Press Limits to enter the sub-menu of Limits. Then set the following parameters.
⚫ Beeper
Press Beeper continuously to enable or disable the beeper.
⚫ Limits Condition Setting
Press When, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired limit
setting condition. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press When
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The limits conditions include
"In Limits" and "Out Limits".
➢ In Limits: when the voltage value is within the limits, you can enable or
disable the beeper to sound an alarm.
➢ Out Limits: when the voltage value is outside of the limits, you can enable
or disable the beeper to sound an alarm.
⚫ Upper/Lower Limit Setting
Press Upper, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the upper limit of the voltage.
Press Lower, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the lower limit of the voltage.
RIGOL Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter
7-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Frequency Counter
The frequency counter analysis function provides frequency, period, or edge event
counter measurements on any analog channel.
Press Measure → Analyze → Counter to open the frequency counter setting
menu, or enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at
the lower-left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the
"Counter" icon to open the frequency counter setting menu. You can also directly
press Measure on the front panel, and select "Counter" to enter the frequency
counter setting menu. Also, you can press Measure → Add, then in the displayed
measurement category area, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Analyze",
and then select "Counter" to open the frequency counter setting menu.
To Enable or Disable the Frequency Counter
In the "Counter" setting menu, press Counter continuously to enable or disable the
frequency counter measurement. When enabled, the following figure is displayed.
To Select the Measurement Source
Press Source, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired source,
and then press down the knob to select the source. You can also press Source
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The analog channels (CH1-CH4),
digital channels (D0-D15), and EXT can all be selected as the source of the frequency
counter.
To Select the Measurement Item
The measurement items supported by the frequency counter of this oscilloscope
include Frequency, Period, and Totalize measurements. Wherein, Totalize indicates
the count of edge events on the signal.
Source Measurement Item Value
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 7-5
Press Measure in the "Counter" menu, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select the desired measurement item, and then press down the knob to select the
item. You can also press Measure continuously or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired measurement item and select it.
To Set Resolution
For Period and Frequency measurements, you need to set the readout resolution.
Press Resolution, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the resolution. The range of resolution is from 3 bits to 6 bits.
By default, it is 5 bits.
Note: The greater the resolution, the longer the gate time. In this way, the
measurement time will be longer.
To Clear Count
When "Totalize" is selected under Measure, the oscilloscope measures the count of
edge events on the signal. At this time, press Clear Count to clear the measurement
results.
To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function
For Period and Frequency measurements, enable the frequency counter statistical
function. Press Statistic continuously to enable or disable the statistical function.
When enabled, the maximum value and minimum value will be displayed in the
frequency counter data, as shown in the following figure.
Statistics
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 8-1
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option)
MSO7000/DS7000 series oscilloscope provides an optional power analysis function,
which can help you easily analyze the efficiency and reliability of the switch-mode
power supplies. With the power analysis function, you can analyze the power quality
and output ripple noise of the input power.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Power Quality
◼ Ripple
RIGOL Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option)
8-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Power Quality
By analyzing the power quality, you can test the quality of AC input lines. The specific
measurement parameters for power quality analysis include V_RMS, I_RMS, real
power, apparent power, reactive power, power factor, reference frequency, phase
angle, impedance, voltage crest factor, and current crest factor.
Press Measure → Analyze → Power Analyzer to open the power analysis setting
menu, or enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at
the lower-left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the
"Power" icon to open the power analysis setting menu. You can also press Measure
→ Add, then in the displayed parameter measurement category area, rotate the
multifunction knob
to select the "Analyze" tab, then select "Power" to open the
power analysis setting menu.
⚫ Select the Analysis Type
In the power analysis setting menu, press Analysis Type and rotate the
multifunction knob
to select "Power Quality", and then press down the knob
to select it. You can also press Analysis Type continuously or enable the touch
screen to select the desired analysis type.
⚫ Set the Power Quality Analysis Source
In the power analysis setting menu, press Source to enter the source setting
menu.
➢ Press Voltage and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
channel (CH1-CH4) for acquiring voltage. Press down the knob to select it.
You can also press Voltage continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel.
➢ Press Current and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
channel (CH1-CH4) for acquiring current. Press down the knob to select it.
You can also press Current continuously or enable the touch screen to
select the channel.
➢ Press Freq. Ref continuously to select "Voltage" or "Current" as the
frequency reference.
⚫ Set the Reference Level
In the power analysis setting menu, press Ref Levels (level of the frequency
reference channel) to enter the reference level setting menu.
➢ Press Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the reference
level display type to "Percent(%)" or "Absolute", and then press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Type continuously or enable the touch
screen to select the type.
➢ Press Upper, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the upper limit value.
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 8-3
➢ Press Mid, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the middle value. The middle value is limited by the
settings of the upper limit and lower limit.
➢ Press Lower, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the lower limit.
➢ Press Default, and then the upper value, middle value, and lower value will
be restored to the defaults.
⚫ Set Count
Press Count, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the number of statistical times for power quality analysis. Its
range is from 2 to 5,000. By default, it is 1,000.
⚫ Reset
Press Reset Stat. to clear the current data and execute statistics on the
measurement results again.
⚫ Open or Close the Results Display Window
Press Display continuously to enable or disable the display of the results.
When enabled, the statistical results will be displayed on the screen, as shown in
the figure below. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the icon
at the
right-upper corner of the statistical results window to close it.
Note: If you select "On" under Display, the multiplication operation will be
enabled in the Math operation.
⚫ View the Connection Diagram
Press Tips, and then the connection diagram of the power quality analysis is
displayed on the screen. Please connect the cables according to the connection
method as shown in Figure 8-1. Press Tips again or enable the touch screen to
tap the icon
at the right-upper corner of the connection diagram window to
close it.
RIGOL Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option)
8-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Figure 8-1 Connection Diagram of Power Quality Analysis
Ripple
Power ripple is an important parameter for evaluating DC power supply, which
indicates the ripple quantity of the output DC voltage. The ripple analysis can
measure the current value, average value, minimum value, maximum value,
standard deviation, and count value of the ripples on the power output terminal.
Note: The 1X probe is recommended for the ripple measurement. For example,
PVP2150 or PVP2350.
⚫ Select the Analysis Type
In the power analysis setting menu, press Analysis Type, and rotate the
multifunction knob
to select "Ripple", and then press down the knob to
select it. You can also press Analysis Type continuously or enable the touch
screen to select the desired analysis type.
⚫ Set the Ripple Analysis Source
In the power analysis setting menu, press Source, and rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the ripple analysis source (CH1-CH4), then press down the
knob to select the source. You can also press Source continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it.
⚫ Set Count
Press Count, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the number of statistical times for ripple analysis. Its range is from
2 to 5,000. By default, it is 1,000.
⚫ Reset
Press Reset Stat. to clear the current data and execute statistics on the
measurement results again.
⚫ Open or Close the Results Display Window
Press Display continuously to enable or disable the display of the results.
When enabled, the statistical results will be displayed on the screen, as shown in
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 8-5
the figure below. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the icon at the
right-upper corner of the statistical results window to close it.
⚫ View the Connection Diagram
Press Tips, and then the connection diagram of the ripple analysis is displayed
on the screen. Please connect the cables according to the connection method as
shown in Figure 8-2. Press Tips again or enable the touch screen to tap the icon
at the right-upper corner of the connection diagram window to close it.
Figure 8-2 Connection Diagram of Ripple Analysis
Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 9-1
Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis
MSO7000/DS7000 series oscilloscope supports the standard histogram analysis
function, enabling you to judge the trend of waveforms, and quickly locate the
potential problems of the signal. DS7000 series can upgrade to MSO7000 series with
the MSO upgrade option.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Enable or Disable the Histogram Function
◼ To Select the Histogram Type
◼ To Select the Histogram Source
◼ To Set the Histogram Height
◼ To Set the Histogram Range
◼ To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function
◼ To Reset
RIGOL Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis
9-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Enable or Disable the Histogram Function
The histogram analysis function supported by the MSO7000/DS7000 series is
available to provide a statistical view of waveforms or measurement results. It can be
classified into horizontal histogram, vertical histogram, and measurement histogram.
With the on-going acquisition and measurement of the waveforms, the height of the
bar graph will change within the set range of the histogram window to indicate the
number of times for data statistics.
Press Measure on the front panel, select Analyze → Histogram to enter the
"Histogram" setting menu. You can also enable the touch screen and then tap the
function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to open the
function navigation. Then, tap the "Histogram" icon to open the histogram setting
menu. In the "Histogram" setting menu, press Enable continuously to enable or
disable the histogram analysis function.
To Select the Histogram Type
The histogram includes the following three types:
⚫ Horizontal: displays the number of times for statistics making in the forms of
columns in the histogram bar graph at the bottom of the graticule.
⚫ Vertical: displays the number of times for statistics making in the forms of rows
in the histogram bar graph at the left of the graticule.
⚫ Measure: displays the number of times for statistics of the measurement results
in the forms of columns in the histogram bar graph at the bottom of the
graticule.
Press Type, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired histogram
type, and then press down the knob to select the type. You can also press Type
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the type.
To Select the Histogram Source
If "Horizontal" or "Vertical" is selected under Type, you need to set the source
(CH1-CH4). Press Source, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired source, and then press down the knob to select the source. You can also
press Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Tip
To record peaks or glitches in the histogram data, please always enable the
histogram function.
Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 9-3
When you select "Measure" as the histogram type, press Measure on the front
panel to enter the measurement setting menu, and then add one or multiple
measurement items. The added measurement item(s) can be served as the
histogram source(s).
To Set the Histogram Height
The histogram height indicates the number of grids the histogram bar graph should
use on the screen. Press Height, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the height. The available range of height is from 1 to 4.
By default, it is 2.
To Set the Histogram Range
When "Horizontal" or "Vertical" is selected under Type, you need to set the window
range. Set "Left Limit", "Right Limit", "Top Limit", and "Bottom Limit" respectively to
adjust the size and position of the histogram window. Press Range to enter the
sub-menu of histogram range. Then press the corresponding softkey and rotate the
multifunction knob
to set their values.
Note: The adjustment for the horizontal time base and vertical scale will not affect
the time base of the histogram range, but only shows variation with the scale.
To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function
Press Statistic to enable or disable the statistical function. When the statistical
function is enabled, the statistical results of the histogram data will be displayed, as
shown in the following figure. Note that when you select "Measure" under Type, the
statistical data results also include the parameter XScale.
RIGOL Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis
9-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
⚫ Sum: indicates the sum of all bins (buckets) in the histogram.
⚫ Peaks: indicates the maximum number of hits in any single bin.
⚫ Max: indicates the value that corresponds to the maximum bin that has any hits.
⚫ Min: indicates the value that corresponds to the minimum bin that has any hits.
⚫ Pk_Pk: indicates the Delta between the max. value and the min. value.
⚫ Mean: indicates the average value of the histogram.
⚫ Median: indicates the median value of the histogram.
⚫ Mode: indicates the mode value of the histogram.
⚫ Bin width: indicates the width of each bin (bucket) in the histogram.
⚫ Sigma: indicates the standard deviation of the histogram.
To Reset
Press Reset to reset the statistical data and restart to make statistics.
Chapter 10 Digital Channel RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 10-1
Chapter 10 Digital Channel
MSO7000 series oscilloscope has a standard configuration of the logic analyzer (LA)
function, and it has 16 digital channels. The default channel label is D15-D0. The
oscilloscope compares the voltages acquired in each sample with the preset logic
threshold. If the voltage of the sample point is greater than the threshold, it will be
stored as logic 1; otherwise, it will be stored as logic 0. The oscilloscope displays
logic levels ("1" and "0") in the form of a graph for you to easily detect and analyze
the errors in circuit design (hardware design and software design).
Before using the digital channels, connect the oscilloscope and the device under test
using RPL2316 logic probe provided in the accessories. To apply to different
application scenarios, RPL2316 provides three connection methods to connect the
signal under test. For details, refer to
RPL2316 Logic Probe User’s Guide
.
Note: The digital channel input terminal does not support hot plug. Please do not
insert or pull out the logic probe when the instrument is powered on.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Select the Digital Channel
◼ To Enable/Disable the Digital Channel
◼ To Set the Threshold
◼ Auto Arrangement Setting
◼ To Set the Waveform Display Size
◼ To Set the Label
◼ Group Setting
◼ Waveform Color of the Digital Channel
RIGOL Chapter 10 Digital Channel
10-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Select the Digital Channel
Press LA on the front panel to enter the LA setting menu. Press Select to open the
channel menu, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the channel. You can
also press Select continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Select any of the digital channels (D0-D15). The channel label and waveform of
the selected channel are displayed in red.
⚫ Select the user-defined group: selects any group of the channels from the four
user-defined groups. All the channel labels and waveforms in the selected
channel group are displayed in red.
Note: Only the enabled digital channel can be selected, and only the user-defined
channel group that has been grouped can be available.
For how to enable the digital channel/group, refer to descriptions in "To
Enable/Disable the Digital Channel".
For how to define the channel group, refer to refer to descriptions in "Group
Setting".
To Enable/Disable the Digital Channel
Press On/Off to enter the on/off sub-menu of the digital channel.
⚫ Enable/disable the channels (D7-D0) simultaneously
Press D7-D0 continuously to enable or disable the channels (D7-D0). You can
also enable the touch screen to tap the digital channel status area at the bottom
of the screen. The LA window is displayed, as shown in the figure below. In the
window, you can select the LA channel and set the threshold. Tap "D7-D0" to
enable or disable the D7-D0 channels. You can also tap the icon at the
upper-right corner of the window or tap the digital channel status area at the
bottom of the screen again to close the window.
⚫ Enable/disable the channels (D15-D8) simultaneously
Press D15-D8 continuously to enable or disable the channels (D15-D8). You
can also enable the touch screen to tap the digital channel status area at the
bottom of the screen. The LA window is displayed. In the window, you can select
the LA channel and set the threshold. Tap "D15-D8" to enable or disable the
Chapter 10 Digital Channel RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 10-3
D15-D8 channels.
⚫ Enable/disable a single digital channel
Press Dx On/Off to open the channel selection list. Rotate the multifunction
knob
to select a channel, and then press down the knob to enable or disable
it. You can also press Dx On/Off continuously to switch to select any channel,
and press down the multifunction knob
to enable or disable the channel.
You can also enable the touch screen to enable or disable the selected channel.
Besides, you can also enable the touch screen to tap the digital channel status
area at the bottom of the screen. Then, the LA window is displayed. In the
window, you can select the LA channel and set the threshold. Tap a single
channel to enable or disable the channel.
Note: While pressing D7-D0 to disable all the channels D7-D0, you can still
disable or enable any channel among D7-D0 through the Dx On/Off key. While
pressing D7-D0 to enable D7-D0, the D0-D7 channels under Dx On/Off are
enabled automatically. The same is true for D15-D8 channels.
⚫ Enable or disable user-defined channel group
Press Group On/Off, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
specified channel group. Press down the knob to enable or disable all the
channels in this channel group. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the
specified group and select it. The enabled channel groups are marked with
,
and the disabled channel groups are marked with .
Note: This function is only valid when the channels have been grouped by users.
For how to carry out group settings, refer to descriptions in "Group Setting".
To Set the Threshold
The threshold levels of channels D7-D0 and channels D15-D8 can be set separately
according to your needs. Press Threshold to enter the threshold setting menu.
When the voltage of the input signal is greater than the currently set threshold, it is
treated as logic 1; otherwise, it is treated as logic 0.
Press D7-D0 or D15-D8 respectively to open the threshold selection list and select
the preset threshold. The available preset values include TTL(1.40 V), CMOS5.0(2.5
V), CMOS3.3(1.65 V), CMOS2.5(1.25 V), CMOS1.8(0.9 V), ECL(-1.3 V), PECL(3.7 V),
LVDS(1.2 V), and 0 V. You can also press D7-D0 or D15-D8 respectively, then rotate
the multifunction knob
at a small step value or use the pop-up numeric keypad
to set the desired threshold.
Besides, you can also enable the touch screen to tap the digital channel status area
at the bottom of the screen. Then, the LA window is displayed. In the window, you
can select the LA channel and set the threshold. Tap the
icon at the right side of
RIGOL Chapter 10 Digital Channel
10-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
the threshold field, and then the threshold selection list is displayed. Tap to select the
preset threshold. Or tap the threshold input field and input the value with the pop-up
numeric keypad.
Auto Arrangement Setting
Press Arrange to select the waveform arrangement order of the currently enabled
channels on the screen. You can select "D0-D15" or "D15-D0", and the default is
"D15-D0".
⚫ D0-D15: the waveforms on the screen are D0-D15 in sequence from top to
bottom.
⚫ D15-D0: the waveforms on the screen are D15-D0 in sequence from top to
bottom.
To Set the Waveform Display Size
Press Size, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the waveform display size.
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Size continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. The available display sizes are Small, Medium, and Large.
Note: "Large" is only available when the number of currently enabled channels is
less than or equal to 8.
To Set the Label
By default, the instrument takes D0-D15 as the channel label of the 16 digital
channels. You can set a user-defined label for each digital channel to easily
differentiate the digital channels. You can use the preset label or input a label
manually. Press Label to enter the label setting menu.
⚫ Enable or disable the label display
Press Display continuously to enable or disable the display of the channel label.
If it is enabled, the label will be displayed at the left side of the waveform.
⚫ Select a specified digital channel
Press Select and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired digital
channel that needs a label. You can also press Select continuously or enable the
touch screen to select the channel. Select any channel from D0-D15.
⚫ Use preset labels
Press Library to select a preset label. The available preset labels include ACK,
Chapter 10 Digital Channel RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 10-5
ADO, ADDR, BIT, CAS, CLK, CS, DATA, HALT, INT, LOAD, NMI, OUT, PAS, PIN,
RDY, RST, RX, TX, WR, MISO, MOSI, and D0-D15.
⚫ Input a label manually
Press Label to open the label input interface. You can input the label manually.
For details, refer to descriptions in "Channel Label".
Group Setting
Press On/Off → Group to enter the user-defined group setting menu. You can
randomly grouping or ungrouping any channels of the 16 digital channels. You can
also directly press More to enter the menu to group or ungroup channels according
to your needs.
⚫ Group:
For grouping, the operations for the 4 user-defined groups (Group1, Group2,
Group3, and Group4) are the same. Here take Group1 as an example.
Press Group1 to open the D0-D15 channel selection list (the status icon is
located at the left side of each channel). Rotate the multifunction knob
or
press Group1 continuously to select the channel(s) to be added to Group1.
Then, press down the multifunction knob to add the selected channel(s) to
Group1. The channel(s) that has/have been added to Group1 is/are marked with
the status icon
, and the channel(s) that has/have not been added to Group1
is/are marked with the status icon
.
Use the same method to group the other channels. Each channel can only be
added to one single group, and the channels that have been added to other
group cannot be selected. You can perform group operation on 16 digital
channels (D0-D15).
⚫ Ungroup:
Press UnGroup to open the group list. Rotate the multifunction knob or
press UnGroup continuously to select any channel group, then press down the
knob to ungroup the channels.
Note:
⚫ You can only ungroup the digital channel group.
⚫ If no group is set, the Ungroup menu and the Group On/Off menu are
grayed out and disabled.
RIGOL Chapter 10 Digital Channel
10-6 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Waveform Color of the Digital Channel
When the digital channel is enabled, its corresponding waveforms and label are
displayed on the screen. This oscilloscope supports setting high logic level display
color, low logic level display color, and edge display color.
Press More → Color to enter the waveform color setting menu.
⚫ Press High, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the color of high logic
level. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press High continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Press Edge, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the edge color. Press
down the knob to select it. You can also press Edge continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it.
⚫ Press Low, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the color of low logic
level. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Low continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-1
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
You can use the protocol analysis to discover errors, debug hardware, and accelerate
development easily, ensuring you to accomplish the projects with high speed and
good quality. Protocol decoding is the basis of protocol analysis. Only protocol
analyses with correct protocol decoding are acceptable, and only correct protocol
decoding can identify more error information. MSO7000/DS7000 provides four bus
decoding modules (Decode 1, Decode 2, Decode 3, and Decode 4) to make common
protocol decoding (including Parallel (standard), RS232 (option), I2C (option), SPI
(option), LIN (option), CAN (option), FlexRay (option), I2S (option), and 1553B
(option)) for the input signals of the analog channels (CH1-CH4) and digital channels
(D0-D15). As the decoding functions and setting methods of Decode1, Decode2,
Decode3, and Decode4 are the same, this chapter takes Decode1 as an example for
illustration.
Press Decode on the front panel to open the decode setting menu, or enable the
touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner
of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Decode" icon to open
the decode setting menu.
To get the decoding option information, refer to descriptions in "Appendix A:
Accessories and Options".
If you have purchased the decoding option, activate it according the descriptions in
"To View the Option Information and the Option Installation".
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Parallel Decoding
◼ RS232 Decoding (Option)
◼ I2C Decoding (Option)
◼ SPI Decoding (Option)
◼ LIN Decoding (Option)
◼ CAN Decoding (Option)
◼ FlexRay Decoding (Option)
◼ I2S Decoding (Option)
◼ 1553B Decoding (Option)
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Parallel Decoding
Parallel bus consists of clock line and data line. As shown in the figure below, CLK is
the clock line, whereas Bit0 and Bit1 are the 0 bit and 1st bit on the data line
respectively. The oscilloscope will sample the channel data on the rising edge, falling
edge, or the rising/falling edge of the clock and judge each data point (logic "1" or
logic "0") according to the preset threshold level.
Figure 11-1 Schematic Diagram of Parallel Decoding
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 → Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob
to select "Parallel". Press down the knob to select it.
You can also press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1
． Enable or disable the bus
Press Bus Status to enable or disable the decoding function.
2
． Clock setting (CLK)
Press Clock to enter the clock line setting menu.
⚫ Set clock channel
Press Clock, then rotate the multifunction knob to select any clock
channel. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Clock
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The analog channel
(CH1-CH4) and digital channel (D0-D15) can all be selected as the clock
source. If "OFF" is selected, no clock channel is set, and sampling is
performed when a hop occurs to the data of the data channel during
decoding.
⚫ Set the clock edge type
Press CLK Edge, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the clock
edge type. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press CLK Edge
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. You can select to
sample the channel data on the rising edge (
), falling edge ( ), or
both edges ( ) of the clock signal.
Rising
: samples the channel data on the rising edge of the clock.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-3
Falling : samples the channel data on the falling edge of the clock.
Both
: samples the channel data on both the rising edge and the
falling edge of the clock.
⚫ Set the threshold
When the clock signal is an analog channel (CH1-CH4), you need to set a
threshold. Press Threshold, rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold.
3
． Bus setting
Press Bus to enter the bus setting menu.
⚫ Set the bus
Press BUS to select the digital bus for Parallel decoding, as shown in the
following table.
Bus
Width
Bit X
Channel
Remarks
CH1
1
0
CH1
Width, Bit X, and CH are set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
CH2
1
0
CH2
Width, Bit X, and CH are set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
CH3
1
0
CH3
Width, Bit X, and CH are set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
CH4
1
0
CH4
Width, Bit X, and CH are set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
D7-D0
8
0 (default)
D7
(default)
Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D7 to D0
respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
D15-D8
8
0 (default)
D15
(default)
Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D15 to D8
respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
D15-D0
16
0 (default)
D15
(default)
Bit0 to Bit15 are set to D15 to
D0 respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
D0-D7
8
0 (default)
D0
(default)
Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D0 to D7
respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
D8-D15
8
0 (default)
D8
(default)
Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D8 to D15
respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
D0-D15
16
0 (default)
D0
(default)
Bit0 to Bit15 are set to D0 to
D15 respectively. Width is set
automatically, and you cannot
modify them.
User
1 to 20
0 (default)
--
--
⚫ Set the width
When BUS is set to "User", you can set the bus width. Press Width, rotate
the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
width. The available range is from 1 to 20. By default, it is 16.
Note: The available range of the bus width for the DS7000 series model is
from 1 to 4. By default, it is 4.
⚫ Specify data channel for each bit
When BUS is set to any digital channel, you can specify the data channel for
each bit.
Press Bit X, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the bit of the channel.
By default, 0 is selected. Its available range is from 0 to (width - 1).
Press CH, then rotate the multifunction knob to select a channel source.
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press CH continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it. The analog channel (CH1-CH4) and
digital channel (D0-D15) can all be selected as the channel source.
⚫ Set the threshold level
To judge logic "1" and logic "0" of the buses, you need to set a threshold for
each analog channel (CH1-CH4). When the channel signal amplitude is
greater than the preset threshold, it is judged as logic "1"; otherwise logic
"0". Press Threshold, rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the threshold.
⚫ Set the endian
Channel Logic Level
Channel Signal Amplitude
Threshold Level
1
0
0
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-5
Press Endian continuously to select "Normal" or "Invert" as the endian of
the bus.
⚫ Polarity
Press Polarity continuously to select Positive or Negative as the
polarity for data decoding.
4
． Display-related setting
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display
format of the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Format continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and
"ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
vertical display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the Parallel decoding
bus. When enabled, the bus label "Parallel" will be displayed at the
upper-left side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data, the corresponding line number, and
time information.
➢ Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-2. You can also
enable the touch screen to tap the icon
at the upper-right corner of
the table to close the event table. Besides, when the running status is
"STOP", you can also rotate the multifunction knob
to select a
specified line and view the corresponding decoding information.
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-6 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Figure 11-2 Parallel Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then,
press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
formats include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
➢ Set the view type: Press View, then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the form of the event table to be viewed. Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press View continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. The available choices include "Packets", "Details",
and "Payload". You can also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at
the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the time and decoded data are displayed in the
event table. If you select "Details", the detailed data in the specified
row will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view. If you select
"Payload", all data in the specified column will be displayed in the event
table. If "…" appears in the specified column of data, it indicates that
the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time, you can view the
Line Number Time Decode Name Decoded Data
Event Table
Parallel Bus
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-7
details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the
corresponding decoded data. Press Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode and rotate the
multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Decode continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
5
． Noise rejection
Press Setting → Noise Reject to enable or disable the noise rejection function.
Noise rejection can remove the data that last not enough time on the bus and
eliminate the burst glitch in the actual circuit. When the noise rejection is
enabled, press Reject Time, rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the desired rejection time. The available range of
the rejection time is from 0 s to 1 s.
RS232 Decoding (Option)
RS232 serial bus consists of the transmitting data line (TX) and the receiving data
line (RX).
DeviceA DeviceB
Tx
Rx
Rx Tx
Figure 11-3 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Serial Bus
The industry standard of RS232 uses "Negative Logic", i.g. high level is logic "0" and
low level is logic "1".
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-8 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
1
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
Figure 11-4 Schematic Diagram of Negative Logic
In RS232, baud rate is used to represent the transmission rate (namely bits per
second) of the data. You need to set the start bit, data bits, check bit (optional), and
stop bit for each frame of data.
Start Bit
Data Bit
Check Bit
Stop Bit
Start Bit: indicates when to output data.
Data Bit: indicates the number of data bits actually contained in each frame of data.
Check Bit: used to check whether the data are properly transmitted.
Stop Bit: indicates when to stop outputting data.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 → Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob
to select "RS232". Press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1
． Enable or disable the bus
Press Bus Status to enable or disable the decoding function.
2
． Quickly apply RS232 trigger settings to RS232 decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the current RS232 trigger settings and apply them to
RS232 decoding function (set the corresponding RS232 decoding parameters
automatically). For source channels, copy the source channel of the trigger to
the Tx source channel of the decoding. For analog channels, the threshold level
settings will also be copied.
3
． Set the baud rate
Three setting methods are available for baud rate:
⚫ Press Baud Rate, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed
numeric keypad.
⚫ Press Baud Rate, then select the preset baud rate from the available
options. The available baud rates include 50 bps, 75 bps, 110 bps, 134 bps,
150 bps, 300 bps, and etc.
⚫ Press Baud Rate, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
baud rate at a small step.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-9
4． Source setting
Press Sources to enter the source setting menu.
⚫ Set the Tx source and the threshold
➢ Press Tx and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
channel, and then press down the knob. You can also press Tx
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
channels include OFF, CH1-CH4, and D0-D15.
➢ When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold,
then rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to adjust the threshold of Tx source. When you modify the
threshold of the Tx source channel, a dotted line displaying the current
threshold level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in
about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
⚫ Set the Rx source and the threshold
Use the same method to select the Rx source and set the threshold (only
when the Rx source channel is set to an analog channel (CH1-CH4)).
Note: The Tx and Rx source channels cannot be set to "OFF" at the same time.
⚫ Polarity
Press Polarity continuously to select the polarity of data transmission. It
can be set to " " (positive) or " " (negative).
➢ Normal: Use negative logic. High level indicates logic "0"; low level
indicates logic "1".
➢ Invert: Use positive logic. High level indicates logic "1"; low level
indicates logic "0".
5
． Set data package
Press Settings to enter the data package setting menu.
⚫ Data
Press Data and rotate the multifunction knob to set the number of
data bits actually contained in each frame of data. Press down the knob to
select it. You can also press Data continuously or enable the touch screen
to select it. The available data bits are 5 bits, 6 bits, 7 bits, 8 bits, and 9 bits.
⚫ Parity
It is used to check whether the data transmission is correct. Press Parity
and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the desired parity mode,
then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Parity
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
➢ None: indicates that no check bit appears during the transmission.
➢ Even: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check
bit is an even number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "0"
should be added to the check bit.
➢ Odd: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check bit
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-10 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
is an odd number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "1"
should be added to the check bit.
⚫ Stop Bit
Press Stop Bit and rotate the multifunction knob to set the stop bits
after each frame of data. Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Stop Bit continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. It can
be set to 1 bit, 1.5 bits, or 2 bits.
⚫ Endian
Press Endian to select "LSB" or "MSB". By default, it is "LSB".
LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the lowest
bit of the data is transmitted first.
MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the highest
bit of the data is transmitted first.
LSB MSB
⚫ Package
Press Package to enable or disable the package display in data
transmission. When enabled, several data blocks will be combined based on
the separator.
⚫ Separator
Press Separator and rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired package separator in data transmission, then press down the knob
to select it. You can also press Separator continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. It can be set to 0A(LF), 0D(CR), 20(SP), or 0(NUL).
6
． Display-related setting
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display
format of the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Format continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and
"ASCII".
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-11
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
vertical display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the RS232 decoding
bus. When enabled, the bus label "RS232-TX" and/or "RS232-RX" will be
displayed at the upper-left side of the bus (when the bus display is
enabled).
⚫ Event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data (TX and/or RX), the corresponding
line number, time, and error information (TX and/or RX).
Note: When the Tx and Rx source channels are set to "OFF", information of
the data line is not displayed in the data table.
➢ Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. You can also enable the touch screen
to tap the icon
at the upper-right corner of the table to close the
event table. Besides, when the operating status is "STOP", you can also
rotate the multifunction knob to select a specified line and view
the corresponding decoding information.
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the display format of "Data" (TX and/or RX) in the
event table. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Format continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available formats include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
➢ Set the view type: Press View, then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the form of the event table to be viewed. Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press View continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. The available choices include "Packets", "Details",
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-12 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
and "Payload". You can also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at
the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data (TX and/or RX), time, and
error information (TX and/or RX) are displayed in the event table. If
you select "Details", the detailed data in the specified row will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of data, it
indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time,
you can view the details in the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload",
all data in the specified column will be displayed in the event table. If
"…" appears in the specified column of data, it indicates that the
decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time, you can view the
details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time, the corresponding
decoded data, and etc. Press Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode and rotate the
multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Decode continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
7
． Error expressions in decoding
In RS232 decoding, parity error and/or EOF (end of frame) error may occur.
⚫ Parity Error
When a parity error is detected during the decoding, red error report
information will be displayed. For example, when "none" is chosen for the
parity on the transmitter and "odd" is chosen for the parity on the decoder,
the following parity error information (its display form is related to the
value of the horizontal time base) occurs. Wherein, the number of 1s in the
8-digit figure (00000100) is an odd number, and the parity bit should be 0.
However, the parity bit detected on the Tx is 1; thus a parity error occurs.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-13
⚫ EOF Error
This error is generated when the EOF condition is not met. For example, if
the Stop Bit is set to 1.5, but the actual stop bits is less than 1.5 bits, then
the red error report information (its display form is related to the value
of the horizontal time base) is displayed in the following figure.
⚫ Parity Error and EOF Error
When both the parity error and the EOF error are detected, the error report
information (its display form is related to the value of the horizontal time
base), as shown in the following figure, will be displayed.
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-14 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
I2C Decoding (Option)
I2C serial bus consists of the clock line (SCL) and the data line (SDA).
SCL: samples SDA on the rising or falling edge of the clock.
SDA: indicates the data channel.
SCL
SDA
Figure 11-5 I2C Serial Bus
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 → Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob
to select "I2C". Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1
． Enable or disable the bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2
． Quickly apply I2C trigger settings to I2C decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the clock signal and data signal settings (SCL and SDA)
of the current I2C trigger settings and apply them to I2C decoding function (SCL
and SDA). For analog channels, the threshold level settings will also be copied.
3
． Source setting
Press Sources to enter the source setting menu.
⚫ Set the clock channel source and the threshold
➢ Press SCL and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
source of the clock channel, and then press down the knob to select it.
You can also press SCL continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. The available channels include CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
➢ When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press SCL Thre, then
rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-15
adjust the threshold of the clock channel. When you modify the
threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the current
threshold level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in
about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
⚫ Set the data channel source and the threshold
Use the same method to select the source of the data channel and set the
threshold (only when the source of the data channel is set to an analog
channel (CH1-CH4)).
⚫ Exchange sources
Press Exchange to select "SCL/SDA" or "SDA/SCL" to exchange the
sources of the current clock channel and data channel.
4
． Specify whether the address information includes the "R/W" bit
For I2C bus, each frame of data starts with the address information. The address
information includes the read address and the write address. Press R/W
continuously to select whether the address information includes the "R/W" bit.
When "With" is selected, the "R/W" bit will be included in the address
information and located at the lowest bit; when "Without" is selected, the "R/W"
bit will not be included in the address information.
5． Display-related setting
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display
format of the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Format continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and
"ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
vertical display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the I2C decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "I2C" will be displayed at the upper-left side of
the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-16 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
information includes the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time,
R/W bit, address information, and acknowledgement information.
➢ Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-6. You can also
enable the touch screen to tap the icon
at the upper-right corner of
the table to close the event table. Besides, when the operating status is
"STOP", you can also rotate the multifunction knob
to select a
specified line and view the corresponding decoding information.
Figure 11-6 I2C Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then,
press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
formats include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
➢ Set the view type: Press View, then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the form of the event table to be viewed. Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press View continuously or enable the touch
Line Number Time R/W Bit Address Decoded Data Acknowledgement
Event Table
I2C Bus
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-17
screen to select it. The available choices include "Packets", "Details",
and "Payload". You can also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at
the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and error information
are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed
data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…"
appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time, the corresponding
decoded data, and etc. Press Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode and rotate the
multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Decode continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
6
． Address information in decoding
In I2C bus, each frame of data starts with the address information (include the
read address and write address). In the address information, "Read" denotes
the read address (e.g. ) and "Write" denotes the write address (e.g.
) You can also set the address information to include or exclude
the "R/W" bit.
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-18 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
7． Error expressions in decoding
In I2C decoding, when ACK (acknowledgement) is 1, ACK error occurs. When
when the detected ACK is 1, red error report information
(the display form is
related to the value of the horizontal time base) is dispalyed.
The detected ACK is 1
Address Information (Read Address)
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-19
SPI Decoding (Option)
SPI bus is based on the master-slave configuration and usually consists of chip select
line (CS), clock line (CLK), and data line (SDA). Wherein, the data lines include the
master input/slave output (MISO) data line and master output/slave input (MOSI)
data line. The oscilloscope samples the channel data on the rising or falling edge of
the clock signal (if the source is an analog channel, the oscilloscope will also judge
each data point (logic "1" or logic "0") according to the preset threshold level).
Master
Slave
MOSI
CLK
MISO
CS
CLK
SDA
(MISO/MOSI)
Figure 11-7 SPI Serial Bus
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 → Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob
to select "SPI". Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1
． Enable or disable the bus
Press Bus Status to enable or disable the decoding function.
2
． Quickly apply SPI trigger settings to SPI decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the SPI trigger settings and apply them to SPI
decoding function (set the corresponding SPI decoding parameters
automatically). For analog channels, the threshold level settings will also be
copied.
3
． Mode
Press Mode to enter the mode setting menu. Press Mode continuously to select
"Timeout" or "CS".
⚫ Timeout: you can perform frame synchronization according to the timeout,
and the timeout value must be greater than half of the clock cycle. Press
Timeout, and then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the timeout value. The available range of the timeout
value is from 8 ns to 10 s. By default, it is 1 μs.
⚫ CS: contains a chip select line (CS). You can perform frame synchronization
according to CS. When "CS" is selected,
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-20 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
➢ Press CS and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
CS continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The analog
channel (CH1-CH4) and digital channel (D0-D15) can all be selected as
the CS channel.
➢ Press CS Polarity continuously to select (Positive) or
(Negative) as the polarity for CS channel.
➢ When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4) as the CS channel,
press Threshold, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold.
4
． Source setting
Press Sources to enter the source setting menu.
⚫ CLK setting
➢ Press CLK and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
source of the clock channel, and then press down the knob to select it.
You can also press CLK continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. The analog channel (CH1-CH4) and digital channel (D0-D15)
can all be selected.
➢ When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold
below the CLK menu, then rotate the multifunction knob or use
the pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold of the clock channel.
➢ Press Slope continuously to set the instrument to sample MISO and
MOSI on the rising edge (
) or falling edge ( ) of the clock signal.
⚫ MISO and MOSI setting
➢ Press MISO and rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired MISO data channel, and then press down the knob to select it.
You can also press MISO continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. The available channels include OFF, analog channels
(CH1-CH4), and digital channels (D0-D15). When you select an analog
channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold below the MISO menu, then
rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to
set the threshold of the MISO data channel.
➢ Press MOSI and rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired MOSI data channel, and then press down the knob to select it.
You can also press MOSI continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. The available channels include OFF, analog channels
(CH1-CH4), and digital channels (D0-D15). When you select an analog
channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold below the MOSI menu, then
rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to
set the threshold of the MOSI data channel.
Note: MISO and MOSI source channels cannot be both set to "OFF" at
the same time.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-21
5． Data setting
Press Settings to enter the data setting menu.
⚫ Endian setting
Press Endian to select "LSB" or "MSB". By default, it is "MSB".
LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the lowest
bit of the data is transmitted first.
MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the highest
bit of the data is transmitted first.
⚫ Polarity setting
Press Polarity continuously to select Positive or Negative as the
polarity for data decoding.
⚫ Width setting
Press Width, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the bits of each frame of data. The available range is
from 4 to 32. By default, it is 8.
6
． Display-related setting
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display
format of the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Format continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and
"ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
vertical display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the SPI decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "SPI-MISO" and/or "SPI-MOSI" will be
displayed at the upper-left side of the bus (when the bus display is
enabled).
⚫ Event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data (MISO and/or MOSI), the
corresponding line number, time, and error information (MISO and/or
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-22 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
MOSI).
Note: When the source channel of MISO or MOSI is set to "OFF",
information of the data line is not displayed in the data table.
➢ Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-8. You can also
enable the touch screen to tap the icon
at the upper-right corner of
the table to close the event table. Besides, when the operating status is
"STOP", you can also rotate the multifunction knob
to select a
specified line and view the corresponding decoding information.
Figure 11-8 SPI Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the display format of "Data" (MISO and/or MOSI) in
the event table. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Format continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available formats include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
➢ Set the view type: Press View, then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the form of the event table to be viewed. Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press View continuously or enable the touch
Line Number Time MISO Decoding Data MISO Error MOSI Decoding Data MOSI Error
Event Table
SPI Bus
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-23
screen to select it. The available choices include "Packets", "Details",
and "Payload". You can also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at
the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data (MISO and/or MOSI), time,
and error information (MISO and/or MOSI) are displayed in the event
table. If you select "Details", the detailed data in the specified row will
be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of data, it
indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time,
you can view the details in the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload",
all data in the specified column will be displayed in the event table. If
"…" appears in the specified column of data, it indicates that the
decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time, you can view the
details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the
corresponding decoded data. Press Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode and rotate the
multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Decode continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
LIN Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the LIN signal, and judges each data point to be logic "1"
or logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. The LIN decoding is required to
specify the LIN signal protocol version.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 → Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob
to select "LIN". Press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or disable the bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly apply LIN trigger settings to LIN decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the LIN trigger settings and apply them to LIN
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-24 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
decoding function (set the corresponding LIN decoding parameters
automatically). For analog channels, the threshold level settings will also be
copied.
3. Set the source and the threshold
⚫ Press Source and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
source channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available channels include CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
⚫ When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold, then
rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set
the threshold of the source channel. When you modify the threshold of the
clock channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is
displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in about 2 s after you
stop modifying the threshold.
4. Signal setting
Press Settings to enter the signal setting menu.
⚫ Set baud rate
Three setting methods are available for baud rate:
➢ Press Baud Rate, then set the user-defined baud rate with the
displayed numeric keypad.
➢ Press Baud Rate, then select the preset baud rate from the available
options. The available baud rates include 2.4 kbps, 4.8 kbps, 9.6 kbps,
19.2 kbps, and etc.
➢ Press Baud Rate, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
baud rate at a small step.
⚫ Set the parity bit
Press Parity bit continuously to select whether the data contains the parity
bit.
⚫ Set the protocol version
Press Version and rotate the multifunction knob to select a protocol
version that matches the LIN bus signal. Then, press down the knob to
select it. You can also press Version continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. The available versions include 1.X, 2.X, and Both.
5. Display-related setting
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display
format of the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Format continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-25
available display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and
"ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
vertical display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the LIN decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "LIN" will be displayed at the upper-left side of
the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time,
and error information.
➢ Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-9. You can also
enable the touch screen to tap the icon at the upper-right corner of
the table to close the event table. Besides, when the operating status is
"STOP", you can also rotate the multifunction knob
to select a
specified line and view the corresponding decoding information.
Figure 11-9 LIN Decoding Event Table
Line Number Time Frame ID Decoded Data CRC Error
Event Table
LIN Bus
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-26 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then,
press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
formats include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
➢ Set the view type: Press View, then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the form of the event table to be viewed. Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press View continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. The available choices include "Packets", "Details",
and "Payload". You can also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at
the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and error information
are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed
data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…"
appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the
corresponding decoded data. Press Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode and rotate the
multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Decode continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-27
6. Interpret the decoded LIN data
⚫ Break (Sync Break): expressed in Hex, displayed as a pink patch.
⚫ SYNC (Sync): expressed in Hex, displayed in dark yellow-green.
⚫ ID (Frame ID): expressed in Hex, displayed in yellow-green.
⚫ Data (Data): its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec,
Bin, or ASCII), displayed as a black patch.
⚫ CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed in light
yellow-green. When errors occur, it is displayed as a red patch.
⚫ Wakeup (wake up symbol): displayed as a tangerine patch.
7. Error expressions in decoding
In LIN decoding, the parity error, checksum error, or sync error may occur.
⚫ Parity Error
If the parity error is detected, frame ID and parity bit (when the signal is set
to include the parity bit) will be displayed in red, as shown in the figure
below.
Break Sync ID Data CRC
Parity Error
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-29
CAN Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the CAN signal at the specified sample position. The
oscilloscope will also judge each data point (logic "1" or logic "0") according to the
preset threshold level. You need to specify the CAN signal type and sample position
for CAN decoding.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 → Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob
to select "CAN". Press down the knob to select it. You
can also press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or disable the bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly apply CAN trigger settings to CAN decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the CAN trigger settings and apply them to CAN
decoding function (set the corresponding CAN decoding parameters
automatically). For analog channels, the threshold level settings will also be
copied.
3. Set the source and the threshold
⚫ Press Sources and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
source channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Sources continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available channels include CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
⚫ When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold, then
rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set
the threshold of the source channel. When you modify the threshold of the
clock channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is
displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in about 2 s after you
stop modifying the threshold.
4. Signal setting
Press Settings to enter the signal setting menu.
⚫ Set the signal type
Press Signal and rotate the multifunction knob to select a signal type
that matches the CAN bus signal. Press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Signal continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available signal types include CAN_H, CAN_L, Rx, Tx, and Diff.
➢ CAN_H: indicates the actual CAN_H bus signal.
➢ CAN_L: indicates the actual CAN_L bus signal.
➢ Rx: indicates the Receive signal from the CAN bus transceiver.
➢ Tx: indicates the Transmit signal from the CAN bus transceiver.
➢ Diff: The CAN differential bus signals connected to an analog source
channel by using a differential probe. Connect the probe's positive lead
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-30 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
to the CAN_H bus signal and connect the negative lead to the CAN_L
bus signal.
⚫ Specify the standard signal rate
Three setting methods are available for baud rate:
⚫ Press Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed
numeric keypad.
⚫ Press Baud, then select the preset baud rate from the available
options. The available baud rates include 10 kbps, 20 kbps, 33.3 kbps,
50 kbps, and etc.
⚫ Press Baud, then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the baud
rate at a small step.
⚫ Sample Position:
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the
bit level at this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion
of "the time from the start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time",
as shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-10 Sample Position
Press Sample Position, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the sample position. The settable range is
from 10% to 90%.
5. Display-related Setting
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display
format of the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Format continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and
"ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
vertical display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-31
⚫ Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the CAN decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "CAN" will be displayed at the upper-left side
of the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time,
frame ID, data length code (DLC), cyclic redundancy check (CRC), and
Acknowledgement (ACK) information.
➢ Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-11. You can
also enable the touch screen to tap the icon at the upper-right
corner of the table to close the event table. Besides, when the
operating status is "STOP", you can also rotate the multifunction knob
to select a specified line and view the corresponding decoding
information.
Figure 11-11 CAN Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
Line Number Time Frame ID DLC Decoded Data CRC ACK
Event Table
CAN Bus
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-32 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then,
press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
formats include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
➢ Set the view type: Press View, then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the form of the event table to be viewed. Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press View continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. The available choices include "Packets", "Details",
and "Payload". You can also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at
the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information
are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed
data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…"
appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the
corresponding decoded data. Press Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode and rotate the
multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Decode continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
6. Interpret the decoded CAN data
⚫ Frame ID: expressed in Hex, displayed as a dark yellow-green patch.
⚫ DLC (Data Length Code): expressed in Hex, displayed as a blue-green
patch.
⚫ Data: its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin,
or ASCII), displayed as a green patch.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-33
⚫ CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed in
yellow-green. When errors occur, it is displayed as a red patch.
⚫ ACK (Acknowledgement): when effective, displayed as a light yellow-green
patch; when errors (ACK is detected to be 1) occur, displayed as a red
patch.
⚫ R (remote frame): displayed as a tangerine patch.
FlexRay Decoding (Option)
FlexRay is a type of differential serial bus configured with three consecutive
segments (i.g. header, payload, and trailer). The oscilloscope samples the FlexRay
signal at the specified sample position and judges each data point as logic "1" or
logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. The FlexRay decoding is required to
specify the signal type and baud rate.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 → Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob
to select "FlexRay". Press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or disable the bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly apply FlexRay trigger settings to FlexRay decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the FlexRay trigger settings and apply them to FlexRay
decoding function (set the corresponding FlexRay decoding parameters
automatically). For analog channels, the threshold level settings will also be
copied.
3. Set the source and the threshold
⚫ Press Source and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
source channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available channels include CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
Frame ID DLC Data CRC ACK
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-34 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
⚫ When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Threshold, then
rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set
the threshold of the source channel. When you modify the threshold of the
channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is displayed on
the screen. The dotted line disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying
the threshold.
4. Signal setting
Press Settings to enter the signal setting menu.
⚫ Channel selection
Press Channel continuously to select a channel ("A" or "B") that matches
the actual FlexRay bus signal.
⚫ Specify the signal rate
Press Baud to open the baud rate list (2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, and 10 Mbps),
and select a preset baud rate that matches the actual FlexRay bus signal.
You can also press Baud continuously, then rotate the multifunction knob
at a small step value or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
desired baud rate.
⚫ Set the signal type
Press Signal and rotate the multifunction knob to select a signal type
that matches the actual FlexRay bus signal. Press down the knob to select it.
You can also press Signal continuously or enable the touch screen to select
it. The available signal types include BP, BM, and RX/TX.
⚫ Sample Position:
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the
bit level at this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion
of "the time from the start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time",
as shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-12 Sample Position
Press More → Sample Position, then rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the sample position. The settable
range is from 10% to 90%.
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-35
5. Display-related setting
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display
format of the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Format continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and
"ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
vertical display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the FlexRay decoding
bus. When enabled, the bus label "FlexRay" will be displayed at the
upper-left side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time,
frame ID, and Payload Length (PL).
➢ Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-13. You can
also enable the touch screen to tap the icon at the upper-right
corner of the table to close the event table. Besides, when the
operating status is "STOP", you can also rotate the multifunction knob
to select a specified line and view the corresponding decoding
information.
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-36 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Figure 11-13 FlexRay Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then,
press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
formats include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
➢ Set the view type: Press View, then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the form of the event table to be viewed. Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press View continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. The available choices include "Packets", "Details",
and "Payload". You can also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at
the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information
are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed
data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…"
appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
Line Number Time Frame ID PL Header CRC Cycle Decoded Data Frame CRC
Event Table
FlexRay Bus
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-37
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the
corresponding decoded data. Press Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode and rotate the
multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Decode continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
6. Interpret the decoded FlexRay frame data
⚫ TSS: transmission start sequence, displayed as a pink patch.
⚫ Sync Frame: displayed as a pink patch.
⚫ ID (Frame ID): expressed in Hex, displayed as a blue-green patch.
⚫ PL (Payload Length): expressed in Hex, displayed as a dark blue patch.
⚫ HCRC (Header Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed as a
yellow-green patch. When CRC error occurs, it is displayed as a red patch.
⚫ CYC (Cycle Number): expressed in Hex, displayed as a light blue patch.
⚫ Data: Its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin,
or ASCII), displayed as a green patch.
⚫ TCRC (Tail Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed as a
yellow-green patch. When CRC errors occur, it is displayed as a red patch.
I2S Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the I2S signal and judges each data point as logic "1" or
logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. I2S decoding is required to specify
the serial clock, channel signal, and the data's source channel. You need to set
Alignment, WS Low, and other parameters.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 → Bus Type, then rotate the
TSS Sync Frame Frame ID PL HCRC CYC Data TCRC
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-38 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
multifunction knob to select "I2S". Press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or disable the bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly apply I2S trigger settings to I2S decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the I2S trigger settings and apply them to I2S
decoding function (set the corresponding I2S decoding parameters
automatically). For analog channels, the threshold level settings will also be
copied.
3. Source Setting
Press Sources to enter the source setting menu.
⚫ Set the serial clock channel source, threshold, and clock edge
➢ Press SCLK and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
SCLK continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available channels include CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
➢ When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press SCLK Thre
below SCLK, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the threshold of the SCLK. When you modify the
threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the current
threshold level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in
about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
➢ Press SCLK Edge continuously to select "Rising( )" or
"Falling( )" as the desired clock edge.
⚫ Set the WS source and the threshold
➢ Press WS and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
channel, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
WS continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
channels include CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
➢ When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press WS Thre below
WS, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the threshold of the WS signal. When you modify the WS
threshold, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is
displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in about 2 s after
you stop modifying the threshold.
⚫ Set the data channel source and the threshold
➢ Press Data and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
data channel source, and then press down the knob to select it. You
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-39
can also press Data continuously or enable the touch screen to select
it. The available channels include CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
➢ When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), press Data Thre
below Data, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the threshold of the data signal. When you
modify the threshold of the data signal, a dotted line displaying the
current threshold level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line
disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
4. Bus Setting
Press Settings to enter the bus setting menu.
⚫ Set the word size
Press Word Size, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the word size. Its range is from 4 to 32.
⚫ Set the receiver word size
Press Receive, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the receiver word size. Its range is from 4 to 32.
⚫ Alignment
Press Alignment and rotate the multifunction knob to select the
alignment way for data signal. Then press down the knob to select it. You
can also press Alignment continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. The available alignment ways include I2S, LJ, and RJ.
⚫ Set the WS Low
Press WS Low continuously to select "Left" or "Right".
⚫ Endian
Press Endian to select "LSB" or "MSB". By default, it is "LSB".
⚫ Polarity setting
Press Data Polarity continuously to select Positive or Negative as
the polarity for data decoding.
5. Display-related setting
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display
format of the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Format continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and
"ASCII".
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-40 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
vertical display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the I2S decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "I2S" will be displayed at the upper-left side of
the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded left channel data, right channel data, the
corresponding line number, and time.
➢ Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-14. You can
also enable the touch screen to tap the icon
at the upper-right
corner of the table to close the event table. Besides, when the
operating status is "STOP", you can also rotate the multifunction knob
to select a specified line and view the corresponding decoding
information.
Figure 11-14 I2S Decoding Event Table
Line Number Time Left Channel Data Right Channel
Event Table
I2S Bus
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-41
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then,
press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
formats include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
➢ Set the view type: Press View, then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the form of the event table to be viewed. Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press View continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. The available choices include "Packets", "Details",
and "Payload". You can also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at
the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information
are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed
data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…"
appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the
corresponding decoded data. Press Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode and rotate the
multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Decode continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-42 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
1553B Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the 1553B signal, and judges each data point to be logic
"1" or logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. 1553B decoding is required to
specify the data channel source and the threshold.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 → Bus Type, then rotate the
multifunction knob
to select "1553B". Press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Bus Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Enable or disable the bus
Press Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly apply 1553B trigger settings to 1553B decoding
Press Copy Trig to copy the 1553B trigger settings and apply them to 1553B
decoding function (set the corresponding I2S decoding parameters
automatically).
3. Set the data channel source and the threshold
➢ Press Data and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired data
channel source, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Data continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available channels include CH1-CH4.
➢ Press Threshold, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the threshold of the source channel. When you
modify the threshold of the channel, a dotted line displaying the current
threshold level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in
about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
4. Display-related setting
Press Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Press Format, rotate the multifunction knob to select the display
format of the bus data. Then, press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Format continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and
"ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Press Position, and then rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the
vertical display position of the bus. You can also rotate Wave Vertical
POSITION to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Press Label to enable or disable the label display of the 1553B decoding
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 11-43
bus. When enabled, the bus label "1553B" will be displayed at the upper-left
side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Press Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data, word type, the corresponding line
number, time, and error information.
➢ Open or close the event table: Press Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-15. You can
also enable the touch screen to tap the icon
at the upper-right
corner of the table to close the event table. Besides, when the
operating status is "STOP", you can also rotate the multifunction knob
to select a specified line and view the corresponding decoding
information.
Figure 11-15 1553B Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
Line Number Time Word Type Data Error
Event Table
1553B Bus
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-44 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
➢ Set the event table format: Press Format, rotate the multifunction
knob
to select the display format of "Data" in the event table. Then,
press down the knob to select it. You can also press Format
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
formats include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
➢ Set the view type: Press View, then rotate the multifunction knob
to select the form of the event table to be viewed. Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press View continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. The available choices include "Packets", "Details",
and "Payload". You can also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at
the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information
are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed
data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…"
appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the
corresponding decoded data. Press Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Press Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Press Decode and rotate the
multifunction knob
to select a decode module, then press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Decode continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
5. Interpret the decoded 1553B data
⚫ C/S: command/status word. It is displayed as a blue-green patch.
⚫ RTA: remote terminal address of the command/status word. It is displayed
as a tangerine patch.
⚫ C/S data: the rest data value of the command/status word. Its display
format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or ASCII),
displayed as a green patch.
⚫ Parity bit: displayed as a yellow-green patch; when errors occur, displayed
as a red patch.
⚫ Data word data: data of the data word. Its display format is the same as
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 12-1
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform
MSO7000/DS7000 series oscilloscope provides 10 reference waveform positions
(Ref1-Ref10). In the actual test process, you can compare the signal waveform with
the reference waveform to locate the failure.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Enable Ref Function
◼ To Select the Reference Channel
◼ To Select the Ref Source
◼ To Adjust the Ref Waveform Display
◼ To Save to Internal Memory
◼ To Clear the Display of the Reference Waveform
◼ To View Details of the Reference Waveform
◼ To Reset the Reference Waveform
◼ Color Setting
◼ Label Setting
◼ To Export to Internal or External Memory
◼ To Import from Internal or External Memory
RIGOL Chapter 12 Reference Waveform
12-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Enable Ref Function
Press Ref on the front panel to enable the reference waveform function, or enable
the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left
corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Ref" icon to
enable the reference waveform function.
When the Ref function is enabled, you can select a different color for each reference
waveform, set the source of each reference channel, adjust the vertical scale and
offset of the reference waveform, save the reference waveform to the internal or
external memory, and recall it when needed.
Note: When the horizontal time base is set to XY, the reference waveform function is
disabled.
To Select the Reference Channel
Press Current, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired reference
waveform channel (Ref1-Ref10). You can also press Current continuously or enable
the touch screen to select the reference waveform channel. By default, Ref1 is
enabled.
To Select the Ref Source
Press Source, rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired reference
waveform source (CH1-CH4, D0-D15, or Math1-Math4). You can also press Source
continuously or enable the touch screen to select the reference waveform source.
Note: Only the currently enabled channel can be selected as the source channel of
the reference waveform.
To Adjust the Ref Waveform Display
After pressing SaveToRef, you can adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
reference waveform specified under Current.
Press VScale, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the vertical scale of the reference waveform. Press VOffset, then
rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
vertical offset of the reference waveform. In the Ref function, you can directly rotate
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 12-3
Wave Vertical SCALE and Wave Vertical POSITION to adjust the
vertical scale and vertical offset.
To Save to Internal Memory
Press SaveToRef to save the displayed waveform for the specified source to the
internal memory as the reference waveform.
Note: This operation only saves the reference waveform to the volatile memory, and
the waveform will be cleared at power-off.
To Clear the Display of the Reference Waveform
Press Clear to clear the display of the current reference waveform on the screen.
Meanwhile, the VScale and VOffset menus for the reference waveform are grayed
out and disabled. You can also press CLEAR on the front panel to clear the display of
the reference waveforms of all the reference channels.
Note: This operation only clears the display of the reference waveform on the screen,
and the reference waveform is still saved in the memory.
To View Details of the Reference Waveform
Press More → Details, and the detailed information about all the reference
waveforms will be displayed on the screen in the form of a list. Press Details again
to close the details list. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the icon
at
the right-upper corner of the table to close it.
RIGOL Chapter 12 Reference Waveform
12-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Reset the Reference Waveform
Press More → Reset, and the reference waveform is restored to the position where
the source channel waveform is located when the SaveToRef operation was
executed.
Color Setting
MSO7000/DS7000 series oscilloscope provides five colors (gray, green, blue, red, and
orange) to mark the reference waveforms of different channels in order to distinguish
the reference waveforms of different reference waveform channels.
Press Color, and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the color of the
reference waveform of the channel. You can also press Color continuously or enable
the touch screen to select it. The GND icon and the label at the left side of the
waveform of the currently selected channel will be filled with the specified color. For
example,
and .
Label Setting
Press More → Label to enter the label setting menu. You can use the built-in label in
the library or manually input a label. Three input methods are available for you to
input a label name, including Chinese, English, and Traditional Chinese.
⚫ Press Display continuously to enable or disable the display of the reference
waveform label. If it is enabled, the label will be displayed at the left side of the
waveform. If the current channel is REFn (n=1,2, …10), then the default label of
the reference waveform is REFn (n=1, 2, …10).
⚫ Press Library and rotate the multifunction knob to select the preset label,
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Library
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available preset labels
include Default, ACK, ADDR, BIT, CLK, and etc.
⚫ Press Label, and the label editing interface is automatically displayed. You can
input the label manually. For the label editing methods, refer to descriptions in
"Channel Label".
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 12-5
To Export to Internal or External Memory
You can also save the current reference waveform to the internal memory or external
USB storage device. The file format of the reference waveform is ".ref", ".bin", or
".csv".
Press More → Export to enter the reference waveform file saving interface. Please
refer to descriptions in "Store and Load" to save the reference waveform to the
internal or external memory. Only when the reference waveform is saved, can this
export function is valid.
Note: MSO7000/DS7000 series oscilloscope only supports the flash memory USB
storage device of FAT32 format.
To Import from Internal or External Memory
You can also import the stored reference waveform file from the internal memory or
external USB storage device to the instrument and display the file on the screen.
Press More → Import to enter the reference waveform file loading interface. Please
refer to descriptions in "Store and Load" to import the reference waveform to the
instrument and display it on the screen.
Note: MSO7000/DS7000 series oscilloscope only supports the flash memory USB
storage device of FAT32 format.
Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 13-1
Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test
During the product design and manufacturing process, you usually need to monitor
the variations of the signal or judge whether the product is up to standard. The
pass/fail test function of MSO7000/DS7000 series oscilloscope can accomplish this
task perfectly.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test
◼ To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation
◼ To Select the Source
◼ To Create a Mask
◼ To Save the Mask
◼ To Load a Mask
◼ To Set the Output Form of the Test Results
◼ To Enable or Disable the Display of the Statistics of the Test Results
◼ Statistics Reset
RIGOL Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test
13-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test Function
Press Utility → PassFail to open the pass/fail test setting menu, or enable the
touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner
of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Pass/Fail" icon to open
the pass/fail test setting menu.
In the menu, press Enable continuously to enable or disable the pass/fail test
function.
Note: The pass/fail test function cannot be enabled in the following conditions:
when the time base mode is "XY" or "ROLL"; when the delay sweep is enabled.
To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation
After the Pass/Fail test function is enabled, press Operate continuously to start or
stop the test operation.
During the test process, the oscilloscope will test the waveforms, display the test
information, and output the test failure information based on the current settings.
You can set the test mask, the display status of the test information, and the output
form of a failed test based on the selected source channel for the test. Then save the
test mask range to the internal or external memory, and then recall it when needed.
For the details, please refer to the following section.
Note:
⚫ Only when the pass/fail test function is enabled, can you start or stop the
pass/fail test operation, enable or disable the display of the test information,
save and recall the test mask range.
⚫ After starting the test operation, you can neither modify the source channel nor
adjust the test mask.
To Select the Source
Before selecting the source, connect the signal under test to the analog channel
input terminal of the oscilloscope. Press Source and rotate the multifunction knob
to select the desired source channel, and then press down the knob to select it.
You can also press Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available source channels include the analog channel (CH1-CH4).
Note: Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 13-3
To Create a Mask
Press Mask → Create to self-define the mask of the pass/fail test. Press Range and
rotate the multifunction knob
to select the mask range. Press down the knob to
select it. You can also press Range continuously or enable the touch screen to select
it. You can select "Screen" or "Cursor" as the mask region. The default is "Screen".
⚫ If "Screen" is selected under Range, then the whole waveform display area is
considered to be the mask region. Press X Mask and Y Mask respectively.
Rotate the multifunction knob
at a small step or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to adjust the horizontal tolerance range and vertical tolerance range of
the test mask. During the adjustment, two white curves would be displayed in
the interface to show the outline of the current mask. Press Create to apply the
currently created mask (the region not covered by blue within the screen).
⚫ When "Cursor" is selected, two cursors (used to specify the current test mask
range) will be displayed on the screen. Cursor A is at the left and Cursor B is at
the right. Press CursorA and CursorB, and rotate the multifunction knob
to adjust the positions of both Cursor A and Cursor B, respectively. Also you can
press CursorAB and rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the two
cursors synchronously (the spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B remains
unchanged). Then, refer to the above methods to adjust the horizontal and
vertical tolerance ranges, as well as create a mask (the region not covered by
blue within the cursor region).
To Save the Mask
When the pass/fail test function is enabled, you can save the current test mask range
to the internal memory or external USB storage device (when detected) in "*.pf"
format.
Press Mask → Save to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to descriptions in
"Store and Load" to save the test mask file to the internal or external memory.
To Load a Mask
When the pass/fail test function is enabled, you can load the test mask files from the
internal memory or external USB storage device (when detected) and apply them to
the current pass/fail test function.
Press Mask → Load to enter the file loading interface. Please refer to descriptions in
"Store and Load" to load the specified test mask files (in *.pf format) and apply
RIGOL Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test
13-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
them to the current pass/fail test function.
To Set the Output Form of the Test Results
Press Option to enter the "Option" menu. You can set what the oscilloscope will
execute when test results are detected according to your needs.
⚫ Set the output event and Aux output
➢ Press Output Event, and rotate the multifunction knob to select "Fail"
or "Pass". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Output
Event continuously to enable the touch screen to select it.
➢ Press Aux Output continuously to enable or disable the Aux output. If
enabled, press Utility → System, and then the AUX Out is automatically
set to "PassFail". When a successful or failed event is detected, a pulse will
be output from the rear-panel [TRIG OUT] connector. If the Aux output is
disabled, press Utility → System, and then the AUX Out is automatically
set to "TrigOut". The output of the rear-panel [TRIG OUT] connector is
irrelevant with the pass/fail test.
⚫ Set the output polarity and output pulse width
Press Polarity continuously to select "Positive" or "Negative". Then press Pulse,
rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
pulse width. Its range is from 100 ns to 10 ms. By default, it is 1 μs.
⚫ Set the error action
Press Err Action, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the operation
that the oscilloscope will execute once a failed test is detected. Press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Err Action continuously and press down
the multifunction knob
to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to
select it.
➢ Stop: indicates stopping test when a pass/fail test event is found.
➢ Beeper: indicates that the beeper sounds an alarm when a pass/fail test
event is found (irrelevant with the on/off status of the beeper).
➢ Screenshot: performs the screenshot operation when a pass/fail test
event is found. If an external storage device is detected, the screenshot will
be saved to the external storage device directly. Otherwise, it will be saved
to the local disk.
Note: If "Screenshot" is selected under Err Action, "Stop" action will be
executed forcibly. The test will be stopped automatically. After the
Screenshot operation is completed, the test will continue.
Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 13-5
To Enable or Disable the Display of the Statistics
of the Test Results
Press Information continuously to enable or disable the display of the statistics of
the test results. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the icon
at the
right-upper corner of the statistics window to close it.
The test results statistics include the number of failed frames, the number of
successful frames, and total number of frames, as shown in the figure below.
Statistics Reset
Press Reset to clear the current test results and execute statistics on the test results
again.
Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 14-1
Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing
Waveform recording & playing function can play the recorded waveforms of the
analog input channels (CH1-CH4) and the digital channels (D0-D15), enabling you to
analyze the waveforms better.
Note: The horizontal time base must be set to "YT" mode during waveform
recording.
Contents in this chapter:
⚫ Common Settings
⚫ Record Options
⚫ Play Options
RIGOL Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing
14-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Common Settings
Press Utility → Record to enter the waveform recording function setting menu. You
can also enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at
the lower-left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the
"Record" icon to open the waveform recording function setting menu.
1. Waveform Recording
Press Record continuously to enable the waveform recording function. Before
recording the waveform, you can refer to descriptions in "Record Options" to
set the waveform recording parameters. Press Record to start recording the
waveform. The record icon turns "
" from " " automatically. During the
recording, the current real-time recording information is displayed on the screen,
as shown in Figure 14-1. In the figure, the data at the left side of the slash is the
current frame. Its value changes constantly (the value under the Current menu
is changing constantly too), and the data at the right of the slash indicate the
number of frames for recording. The time difference △T at the upper-right
corner indicates the time different between the current frame and the first frame.
After the recording is completed, "
" automatically turns out to be " ". The
recording is stopped automatically. During the recording, you can also press
Record again to stop recording manually. Also, you can enable the touch screen
to tap the specified button to perform the recording operation.
Figure 14-1 Recording Process Information
2. Play
Press Playing to start playing the recorded waveforms. " " automatically turns
out to be "
". For details about playing, refer to descriptions in "Play Options".
During the waveform recording, the current frame changes accordingly (the
value of the parameter Current changes accordingly). After playing is
completed, "
" automatically turns out to be " " automatically. During the
playing process, you can also press Playing to stop playing manually.
3. Current Frame
Press Current, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the current frame. At this time, the waveform of the
Time Difference
Current Frame Recording Frames
Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 14-3
current frame is displayed on the screen.
4. Set Transition
Press Jump To continuously to select to jump to the recorded end frame
(
Last) or the recorded start frame ( First). For settings of the start and end
frames, refer to descriptions in "Play Options".
Record Options
During the waveform recording, the oscilloscope records the waveforms of the
currently enabled channel at a specified interval until you manually stops the
recording operation or the number of recorded frames has reached the set value.
Note: Before starting the recording operation, turn on the desired channel and
adjust the waveform display to the desired state. When starting the recording
operation, you can neither enable/disable the channel output nor adjust the
waveform display.
Before recording the waveforms, you can press More → Setting to select "Record"
to set the following parameters.
1. Recording Interval
The recording interval indicates the time interval between the frames during the
recording process.
Press Interval, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the time interval between frames. The available range is
from 10 ns to 10 s.
2. Recording Frames
The recording frames refer to the number of frames that can be recorded
actually. After starting the recording operation, the oscilloscope stops the
recording operation automatically when the number of recorded frames reaches
the set value.
Press Frames, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the number of recorded frames. The available range is
from 1 to the maximum number of frames that can be recorded currently
(available in the Max Frames menu). Press Set to Max to set the number of
recorded waveform frames to the maximum number of frames automatically.
3. Max Frames
The menu shows the maximum number of frames that can be recorded currently.
As the capacity of the waveform memory is fixed, the more the number of points
each frame of waveform has, the less the number of waveform frames that can
be recorded. Therefore, the maximum number of recorded frames is related to
RIGOL Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing
14-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
the currently selected "memory depth" (refer to "Memory Depth"). The
current memory depth refers to the number of waveform points per frame.
Memory Depth = Sample Rate x Horizontal Time Base x Number of Grids in the
Horizontal Direction. Therefore, the maximum number of frames of waveform
recording is also related to the "Sample Rate" and "Horizontal Time Base". This
oscilloscope provides ceaseless recording for a maximum of 450,000 frames of
real-time waveforms.
4. Beeper
Press Beeper continuously to set whether the beeper sounds when the
recording is completed.
⚫
: the beeper sounds at the end of recording.
⚫
: the beeper does not sound at the end of recording.
Play Options
Waveform playing function can play back the waveforms currently recorded. Before
playing back the waveforms, you can press More → Setting to select "Play" to set
the following parameters.
1. Play Mode
Press Mode continuously to set the playback mode to (cycle) or
(single).
⚫
: plays from the start frame to the end frame, then such playback
operation is repeated until you stop it manually.
⚫
: plays from the start frame to the end frame, and then stops
automatically.
2. Playback Sequence
Press Sequence continuously to select the playback sequence to
(playback clockwise) or
(playback counterclockwise).
⚫
: plays from the start frame to the end frame.
⚫
: plays from the end frame to the start frame.
3. Playback Interval
The playback interval indicates the time interval between the frames during the
playing process.
Press Interval, then rotate the multifunction knob or use pop-up numeric
keypad to set the time interval between frames. The available range is from 5
ms to 10 s.
4. Start Frame
Press Start Frame, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 14-5
numeric keypad to set the start frame of playback. By default, it is 1, and the
maximum value is the number of recorded frames.
5. End Frame
Press End Frame, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the end frame of playback. The default is the number of
frames of the recorded waveforms.
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 15-1
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation
Function
The search function allows you to search for relevant events based on the search
condition that you set. The navigation function includes the recording & playing
navigation, time navigation, and event navigation.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Search Function
◼ Navigation Function
RIGOL Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function
15-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Search Function
The search function enables you to search the channel edge, Pulse trigger, Runt
trigger, Slope trigger, RS232 trigger, I2C trigger, or SPI trigger. Press Search on the
front panel to enable the search setting menu. You can also enable the touch screen
and then tap the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen
to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Search" icon to open the search
setting menu.
1. Enable or Disable the Search Function
Press Search continuously to enable or disable the search function.
2. Select the Search Type and Set the Parameters
Press Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired type
(Edge, Pulse, Runt, Slope, RS232, I2C, or SPI). You can also press Type
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Edge: Press Type to select "Edge" as the search type. For Edge Setup
menu settings, refer to descriptions in "Edge Trigger". Press Threshold
to enter the threshold setting menu. Rotate the multifunction knob
or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold.
⚫ Pulse: Press Type to select "Pulse" as the search type. For Pulse Setup
menu settings, refer to descriptions in "Pulse Trigger". Press Threshold
to enter the threshold setting menu. Rotate the multifunction knob
or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold.
⚫ Runt: Press Type to select "Runt" as the search type. For Runt Setup
menu settings, refer to descriptions in "Runt Trigger". Press Threshold
to enter the threshold setting menu. Rotate the multifunction knob
or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set Threshold A and Threshold B.
⚫ Slope: Press Type to select "Slope" as the search type. For Slope Setup
menu settings, refer to descriptions in "Slope Trigger". Press Threshold
to enter the threshold setting menu. Rotate the multifunction knob
or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set Threshold A and Threshold B.
⚫ RS232: Press Type to select "RS232" as the search type. For RS232
Setup menu settings, refer to descriptions in "RS232 Trigger (Option)".
Press Threshold to enter the threshold setting menu. Rotate the
multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
threshold.
⚫ I2C: Press Type to select "I2C" as the search type. For I2C Setup menu
settings, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)". Press
Threshold to enter the threshold setting menu. Rotate the multifunction
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 15-3
knob or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the thresholds of SCL
and SDA.
⚫ SPI: Press Type to select "SPI" as the search type. For SPI Setup menu
settings, refer to descriptions in "SPI Trigger (Option)". Press
Threshold to enter the threshold setting menu. Rotate the multifunction
knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the thresholds of CLK,
MISO, and CS.
3. Copy Trigger
⚫ Copy to Trigger
Press More → To Trigger to copy the selected search type to the same
trigger type. For example, if the current search type is "Edge", press To
Trigger to copy the edge search settings to the "Edge Trigger" settings.
⚫ From Trigger
Press More → From Trigger to copy from the trigger settings of the
selected search type to the search settings. For example, if the current
trigger type is "Edge Trigger", press From Trigger to copy from the
Edge trigger settings to the "Edge" search settings.
Note: If you select "From Trigger", you need to set the search type first,
and then copy the trigger type settings from the trigger menu.
4. Open or Close the Mark Table
Press MarkTable continuously to enable or disable the display of the mark table.
The mark table is shown as below. You can also enable the touch screen to tap
the icon
at the right-upper corner of the table to close it.
5. Navigation
Press Navigation, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the event No. to navigate the event. You can also use the
navigation combination keys to make navigations at a step of 1. For details, refer
RIGOL Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function
15-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
to descriptions in "Navigation Function".
6. Save
You can save the event mark data to the internal memory or external USB
storage device in "*.csv" format.
Press More → Save to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to
descriptions in "Store and Load" to save the event mark data to the internal or
external memory.
Note: MSO7000/DS7000 only supports the flash memory USB storage device of
FAT32 format.
Navigation Function
The navigation function includes the recording & playing navigation, time navigation,
and event navigation. In the horizontal control area (Horizontal) on the front panel,
the navigation combination keys are shown as follow:
⚫ Recoding & Playing Navigation
When you enable the waveform recording function and complete the waveform
recording operation, press the navigation combination keys to play the recorded
waveforms. Press
to play the recorded waveforms in reverse order; press
to play the recorded waveforms in normal order; press to stop playing.
⚫ Time Navigation
After the data acquisition stops, use the navigation combination keys to play the
captured data waveforms in a fast and continuous way. Press
to play the
previous recorded waveforms; press
to play the next recorded waveforms;
press
to stop playing. Besides, press or repeatedly can accelerate
the playing of the waveforms, so that you can quickly locate the acquired data
waveforms.
Note: The time navigation function is only available when the time base mode is
"YT" and the instrument stays in "STOP" status.
⚫ Event Navigation
When you enable the navigation function and complete the event search, you
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 15-5
can use the navigation combination keys to quickly navigate the specific event in
the event mark table. Press
to navigate to the previous event (the serial
number in the mark table decreases); press to navigate to the next event
(the serial number in the mark table increases); the
key is disabled in the
event navigation.
Chapter 16 Display Control RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 16-1
Chapter 16 Display Control
In the display control setting menu, you can set the parameters such as the
waveform display type, persistence time, intensity, grid type, grid brightness, and
etc.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Select the Display Type
◼ To Set the Persistence Time
◼ To Set the Waveform Intensity
◼ To Set the Screen Grid
◼ To Set the Grid Brightness
◼ Scale
◼ Color Grade
◼ Waveform Freeze
RIGOL Chapter 16 Display Control
16-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Select the Display Type
Press Display to enter the display control setting menu. Press Type continuously to
set the waveform display mode to "Vector" or "Dots".
⚫ Vector display: indicates that the sample points are connected by lines and
displayed, as shown in the left figure below. In most cases, this mode can
provide the most vivid waveform for you to view the steep edge of the waveform
(such as square waveform).
⚫ Dots display: displays the sample points directly, as shown in the right figure
below. You can directly view each sample point and use the cursor to measure
the X and Y values of the sample point.
Vector Display Dots Display
To Set the Persistence Time
Press Persis.Time, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the persistence
time for the oscilloscope and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Persis.Time continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
values are Min, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, and Infinite.
The following part introduces the waveform effects of a Sine wave frequency sweep
signal in a different persistence time.
1. Min
Enables to view waveform changing in high refresh rate.
2. Specific Values
Enables to view glitches that change relatively slowly or glitches with lower
occurrence probability. The persistence time can be set to 100 ms, 200 ms, 500
ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, or 10 s.
3. Infinite
In this mode, the oscilloscope displays the waveform newly acquired without
clearing the waveforms acquired formerly. The waveforms acquired formerly will
be displayed in relatively low-brightness color and the newly acquired
waveforms will be displayed in normal brightness and color. Infinite persistence
can be used to measure noise and jitter and to capture incidental events.
Chapter 16 Display Control RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 16-3
To Set the Waveform Intensity
Press Intensity, then rotate the multifunction knob at a small step value or use
the pop-up numeric keypad to set the waveform intensity. Note that in the non-menu
operation mode, you can also rotate the multifunction knob
to adjust the
waveform brightness of the channel. The default is 50%, and the range available is
from 1% to 100%.
To Set the Screen Grid
Press Grid, and rotate the multifunction knob to set the grid type and then press
down the knob to select it. You can also press Grid continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. You can select "FULL", "HALF", "NONE", or "IRE".
⚫ FULL: turns the background grid and coordinate on.
⚫ HALF: turns the background grid off.
⚫ NONE: turns the background grid and coordinate off.
⚫ IRE: only available for testing the video signal (i.g. the trigger type is set to
"Video" trigger, and the vertical scale is set to 140 mV).
When "IRE" is selected, the screen displays the vertical graticule in IRE and
marks it at the left side of the screen. Its range is from -40 IRE to +100 IRE.
Meanwhile, 0.35 V and 0.7 V levels are displayed at the right side of the screen,
as shown in the following figure.
RIGOL Chapter 16 Display Control
16-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Set the Grid Brightness
Press Brightness, then rotate the multifunction knob at a small step value or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the grid intensity. The default is 20%, and the
range available is from 1% to 100%.
Scale
Press Show Scale continuously to enable or disable the scale display on the screen.
By default, it is set to "OFF".
Note: When the digital channel is enabled, the scale in the vertical direction is
hidden automatically.
Color Grade
Press More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
analog channel waveforms on the screen. By default, it is set to "OFF". When
enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to indicate the times of data
acquisition or acquisition probability.
Waveform Freeze
Press More → Waveform Freeze to enable or disable waveform freeze function. If
enabled, when you press the RUN/STOP key, the current waveform display
(including the history waveforms) will be frozen. If disabled, when you press the
RUN/STOP key, only the last acquired waveform will be displayed.
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 17-1
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform
Generator (MSO7000 Option)
MSO7000 series has an optional built-in dual-channel, 25 MHz signal source, which
integrates the signal source and the oscilloscope into one, providing great
convenience for engineers who need to use the signal source and oscilloscope at the
same time. This chapter introduces how to use the built-in signal source. As the
functions and setting methods of the two channels of the Function/Arbitrary
Waveform Generator are the same, this chapter takes G1 as an example.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Output Basic Waveforms
◼ To Output the Arbitrary Waveform
◼ Modulation
◼ Sweep
◼ Burst
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option)
17-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Output Basic Waveforms
Press GI on the front panel or enable the touch screen to tap the GI label at the
bottom of the screen to enable/disable the output of the [GI] connector on the front
panel, and enter the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator setting interface.
MSO7000 series' built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator can output a variety
of basic waveforms, including Sine, Square, Ramp, Pulse, DC, Noise, Sinc, Exp.Rise,
Exp.Fall, ECG, Gauss, Lorentz, Haversine, and Arb.
To Output Sine
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Sine". Press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen
to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the sine waveform.
1. Set the frequency or period
First select Frequency or Period, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Frequency" or "Period". You can also press Frequency or Period
continuously to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to select it.
Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
frequency or period value of the current signal. Different waveforms have
different frequency or period (reciprocal of the frequency) ranges.
Sine: 100 mHz to 25 MHz
Square: 100 mHz to 15 MHz
Ramp: 100 mHz to 100 kHz
Pulse: 100 mHz to 1 MHz
DC and Noise: no frequency parameter.
2. Set the amplitude or high level
First select Amplitude or High Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Amplitude" or "High Level". You can also press Amplitude or High
Level continuously to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to select it.
Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
amplitude or high level value of the current signal. Note that if you select
"Amplitude" for this menu, then the menu below the Amplitude is automatically
turns out to be "Offset"; if you select "High Level" for this menu, then the menu
below the High Level is automatically turns out to be "Low Level". When
Impedance is set to "HighZ", the available range is from 20 mVpp to 5 Vpp; when
Impedance is set to "50Ω", the available range is from 10 mVpp to 2.5 Vpp.
3. Set the offset or low level
First select Offset or Low Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Offset" or "Low Level". You can also press Offset or Low Level
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 17-3
continuously to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to select it.
Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
offset or low level value of the current signal. When Impedance is set to "HighZ",
the available range is from (-2.5 V+currently set amplitude value/2) to (2.5 V-
currently set amplitude value/2); when Impedance is set to "50Ω", the available
range is from (-1.25 V+currently set amplitude value/2) to (1.25 V- currently set
amplitude value/2).
4. Set the start phase
Press Start Phase, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the start phase of the current signal. Its available range is
from 0° to 360°.
5. Align phase
Pressing Align Phase will re-configure the two channels to output according to
the preset frequency and phase. For two signals whose frequencies are the same
or in multiple relationship, this operation can align their phases. Use the
oscilloscope to acquire the waveforms of the two channels and stably display the
waveforms. After switching the channel status, the phase deviation between the
two waveforms is changed. At this time, press Align Phase, and then the phase
deviation shown on the oscilloscope will restore to the current phase deviation
between the two waveforms automatically.
6. Setting options
Press Settings to enter the setting options menu. You can set the parameters
such as modulation, sweep, burst, and impedance.
⚫ Modulation, sweep, and burst
For details about modulation, sweep, and burst, refer to descriptions in
"Modulation", "Sweep", and "Burst".
Note: When "Pulse", "DC", or "Noise" is selected under Wave, this menu is
not available.
⚫ Set the impedance
Press Impedance continuously to set the output impedance of the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator. It can be set to "HighZ" or "50Ω".
To Output Square
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Square". Press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen
to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the square waveform. For
setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output Sine". The duty cycle of the
square waveform is a fixed value 50%.
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option)
17-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Output Ramp
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Ramp". Press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen
to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the ramp waveform. For
setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output Sine". This section only
introduces "Symmetry".
Symmetry is defined as the percentage that the rising period of the ramp takes up in
the whole period, as shown in the figure below.
T
t
Symmetry=t/T*100%
Figure 17-1 Symmetry Definition
Press Settings → Symmetry, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the symmetry of the ramp waveform. The settable
range is from 1% to 100%.
To Output Pulse
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Pulse". Press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen
to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the pulse waveform. For
setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output Sine". This section only
introduces "Duty Cycle".
Duty cycle is defined as the percentage that the high level takes up in the whole
pulse period, as shown in the figure below.
T
t
Duty Cycle=t/T*100%
Figure 17-2 Duty Cycle Definition
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 17-5
Press Settings → Duty Cycle, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the duty cycle of the current pulse signal. Its settable
range is from 10% to 90%.
To Output DC
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "DC". Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. At this time, you can set the offset and impedance of the DC signal.
1. Set the offset
Press Offset, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the offset value of the current DC signal. When the current
impedance is set to HighZ, the settable range of offset is from -2.5 V to +2.5 V;
when the impedance is set to 50 Ω, the settable range of offset is from -1.25 V
to +1.25 V.
2. Set the impedance
Press Impedance continuously to set the output impedance of the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator. It can be set to "HighZ" or "50Ω".
To Output Noise
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Noise". Press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen
to select it. At this time, you can set the amplitude/high level, offset/low level, and
impedance of the noise signal.
1. Set the amplitude or high level
First select Amplitude or High Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Amplitude" or "High Level". You can also press Amplitude or High
Level continuously to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to select it.
Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
amplitude or high level value of the current signal. Note that if you select
"Amplitude" for this menu, then the menu below the Amplitude is automatically
turns out to be "Offset"; if you select "High Level" for this menu, then the menu
below the High Level is automatically turns out to be "Low Level".
2. Set the offset or low level
First select Offset or Low Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Offset" or "Low Level". You can also press Offset or Low Level
continuously to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to select it.
Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option)
17-6 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
offset or low level value of the current signal.
3. Set the impedance
Press Impedance continuously to set the output impedance of the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator. It can be set to "HighZ" or "50Ω".
Sinc
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Sinc". Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. You can set the parameters for the Sinc waveform (as shown in the figure
below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output Sine".
Figure 17-3 Sinc
Exp.Rise
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Exp.Rise ". Press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen
to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the Exp.Rise waveform (as
shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output
Sine".
Figure 17-4 Exp.Rise
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 17-7
Exp.Fall
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Exp.Fall". Press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen
to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the Exp.Fall waveform (as
shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output
Sine".
Figure 17-5 Exp.Fall
ECG
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "ECG". Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the ECG waveform (as shown in
the figure below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output Sine".
Figure 17-6 ECG
Gauss
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Gauss". Press down the
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option)
17-8 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
knob to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen
to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the Gauss waveform (as
shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output
Sine".
Figure 17-7 Gauss
Lorentz
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Lorentz". Press down the
knob to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen
to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the Lorentz waveform (as
shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output
Sine".
Figure 17-8 Lorentz
Haversine
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Haversine". Press down
the knob to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch
screen to select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the Haversine
waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "To Output Sine".
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 17-9
Figure 17-9 Haversine
To Output the Arbitrary Waveform
MSO7000 series oscilloscope allows you to define the arbitrary waveform and save it
to the internal or external memory. The user-defined waveform can contain 2 to
16,384 data points (i.g. 2 pts to 16 kpts).
Press Wave, rotate the multifunction knob to select "Arb". Press down the knob
to select it. You can also press Wave continuously or enable the touch screen to
select it. At this time, you can set the parameters for the arbitrary waveform.
To Load the Channel and Waveform
1. Load the Channel
Press Load from CH to enter the channel loading menu. You can set the
channel signal required to be loaded.
⚫ Channel selection
Press Channel and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
channel (CH1-CH4), and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Channel continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Set the waveform range
Press Region continuously to set the waveform in the "Cursor" or "Screen"
region for load. When "Cursor" is selected, press Cursor A or Cursor B
and rotate the multifunction knob
to adjust the positions of the two
cursors respectively; or press Cursor AB and rotate the knob to adjust the
positions of cursors A and B at the same time to determine the waveform
range.
⚫ Load
Press Load to load the set channel signal.
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option)
17-10 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
2. Load the Waveform
Press Load Stored to enter the waveform loading interface. In the disk
management interface, select the waveform from the internal memory or the
external memory. The waveform file is suffixed with "*.arb". Then, press Load to
load the selected waveform. For details, refer to descriptions in "Store and
Load".
To Create the Waveform
You can create arbitrary waveforms according to your needs. Press Create to enter
the waveform creation menu. Meanwhile, the waveform editor is displayed on the
screen.
⚫ Set the frequency or period
First select Frequency or Period, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Frequency" or "Period". You can also press Frequency or Period
continuously to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to select it.
Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
frequency or period value of the current signal.
⚫ Set the amplitude or high level
First select Amplitude or High Level, then rotate the multifunction knob
to select "Amplitude" or "High Level". You can also press Amplitude or High
Level continuously to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to select it.
Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
amplitude or high level value of the current signal. Note that if you select
"Amplitude" for this menu, then the menu below the Amplitude is
automatically turns out to be "Offset"; if you select "High Level" for this menu,
then the menu below the High Level is automatically turns out to be "Low
Level".
⚫ Set the offset and low level
First select Offset or Low Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Offset" or "Low Level". You can also press Offset or Low Level
continuously to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to select it.
Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
offset or low level value of the current signal.
⚫ Set the initial number of points
The initial number of points indicates the number of editable points. By default,
the number of editable points of arbitrary waveforms created can be preset to 2.
Point 1 is fixed at 0 s and Point 2 is fixed at the middle of the period. Press Init
Points, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the number of editable points for the arbitrary waveform. The
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 17-11
maximum number of editable points supported by the system is 16,384 (16
kpts).
⚫ Linear interpolation
Press Linear Interp to enable or disable the linear interpolation between the
defined points of the waveform.
➢ ON: the waveform editor connects two points using a straight line.
➢ OFF: the waveform editor will keep a constant voltage level between two
points and create a ladder-like waveform.
⚫ Edit points
Press Edit Points to enter the point editing menu. You can specify the voltage
value for each waveform point to define the waveforms.
➢ Current Point
Press PointX, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to select the points to be edited. The available range is
from 1 to the number of initial points.
➢ Voltage
Press Voltage, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the voltage value of the current point. Its available
range is from -2.5 V to +2.5 V.
➢ Insert
Press Insert to insert a new editable point between the current editing
point and the next editing point. The number of initial points adds 1
automatically. You can press Insert continuously to increase the editable
points gradually.
➢ Delete
Press Delete to delete the current point from the waveform, and connect
the remaining points with the current interpolation method.
➢ Zoom
Press Zoom continuously to enable or disable the zoom function of
horizontal time base.
➢ Apply
Press Apply to apply the current settings for the currently edited arbitrary
waveforms and output the edited waveforms.
⚫ Save the arbitrary waveform
Press Save to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to descriptions in
"Store and Load" to save the currently edited waveform file to the internal or
external memory in "*.arb" format (you can overwrite the original file or save
the currently edited waveform again).
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option)
17-12 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Edit Waveforms
You can edit the waveforms in the current volatile memory. Press Edit to enter the
waveform editing menu.
⚫ Set the frequency or period
First select Frequency or Period, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Frequency" or "Period". You can also press Frequency or Period
continuously to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to select it.
Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
frequency or period value of the current signal.
⚫ Set the amplitude or high level
First select Amplitude or High Level, then rotate the multifunction knob
to select "Amplitude" or "High Level". You can also press Amplitude or High
Level continuously to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to select it.
Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
amplitude or high level value of the current signal. Note that if you select
"Amplitude" for this menu, then the menu below the Amplitude is
automatically turns out to be "Offset"; if you select "High Level" for this menu,
then the menu below the High Level is automatically turns out to be "Low
Level".
⚫ Set the offset and low level
First select Offset or Low Level, then rotate the multifunction knob to
select "Offset" or "Low Level". You can also press Offset or Low Level
continuously to select it. Also, you can enable the touch screen to select it.
Rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
offset or low level value of the current signal.
⚫ Linear Interpolation
Press Linear Interp to enable or disable the linear interpolation between the
defined points of the waveform.
➢ ON: enables the linear interpolation. The waveform editor connects two
defined points by using a straight line.
➢ OFF: disables the linear interpolation. The waveform editor will keep a
constant voltage level between two points and create a ladder-like
waveform.
⚫ Edit Points
Press Edit Points to enter the point editing menu. You can specify the voltage
value for each waveform point to define the waveforms.
➢ Current Point
Press PointX, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to select the points to be edited. The available range is
from 1 to the number of initial points.
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 17-13
➢ Voltage
Press Voltage, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the voltage value of the current point. Its available
range is from -2.5 V to +2.5 V.
➢ Insert
Press Insert to insert a new editable point between the current editing
point and the next editing point. The number of initial points adds 1
automatically. You can press Insert continuously to increase the editable
points gradually.
➢ Delete
Press Delete to delete the current point from the waveform, and connect
the remaining points with the current interpolation method.
➢ Zoom
Press Zoom continuously to enable or disable the zoom function of
horizontal time base.
➢ Apply
Press Apply to apply the current settings for the currently edited arbitrary
waveforms and output the edited waveforms.
⚫ Save the arbitrary waveform
Press Save to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to descriptions in
"Store and Load" to save the currently edited waveform file to the internal or
external memory in "*.arb" format (you can overwrite the original file or save
the currently edited waveform again).
Modulation
The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator of MSO7000 series oscilloscope
supports amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and
frequency-shift keying modulation (FSK). A modulated waveform consists of a carrier
waveform and a modulating waveform. The carrier waveform is the waveform output
from the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator, and the modulating signal can be
the built-in sine, square, triangle waveform, or noise signal.
Press Settings → Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select
"Modulation", and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Type
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
Press Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired modulation
type, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Type
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available modulation types
include AM, FM, and FSK.
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option)
17-14 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
AM
AM (Amplitude Modulation), namely the amplitude of the carrier waveform changes
with the amplitude of the modulating waveform, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 17-10 Amplitude Modulation
1. Select the Modulating Waveform
Press Waveform, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
modulating waveform, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Waveform continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available modulating waveforms include Sine, Square, Triangle, and Noise.
2. Set the Modulation Frequency
Press Frequency, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the frequency of the modulation signal. The available
range is from 1 Hz to 50 kHz.
3. Set the Modulation Depth
The modulation depth refers to the strength of the AM and is expressed in
percentage. Press AM Depth, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the AM depth of the modulating waveform. The
available range is from 0% to 120%. When it is set to 0%, the output amplitude
is half of the carrier amplitude. When it is set to 100%, the output amplitude
equals the carrier amplitude. When it is set to a value greater than 100%,
envelop distortion will occur, which must be avoided in actual circuit; at this
point, the output of the instrument will not exceed 2.5 Vpp (the load is 50 Ω).
Modulating
Signal
Carrier Signal
Modulated
Waveform
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 17-15
FM
FM (Frequency Modulation), namely the frequency of the carrier waveform changes
with that of the modulating waveform, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 17-11 Frequency Modulation
1. Select the Modulating Waveform
Press Waveform, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
modulating waveform, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also
press Waveform continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The
available modulating waveforms include Sine, Square, Triangle, and Noise.
2. Set the Modulation Frequency
Press Frequency, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the frequency of the modulation signal. The available
range is from 1 Hz to 50 kHz.
3. Set the Frequency Offset
Press Deviation, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the frequency deviation of modulating waveform from the
carrier frequency. The available range of the frequency deviation is from 1 Hz to
the frequency of the current carrier waveform.
FSK
FSK (Frequency-shift Keying) is a modulation method that uses the digital signal to
control the carrier frequency changes. It is one of the modulation methods that have
been early used in information transmission. Its advantages lie in good performance
in anti-noise and anti-attenuation, and it has been widely used in low and medium
Modulating
Signal
Carrier Signal
Modulating
Waveform
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option)
17-16 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
rate of data transmission.
1. Set the Modulation Polarity
Press Polarity continuously to select "Positive" or "Negative" of the modulating
waveform to control the frequency output.
2. Set the Modulation Rate
Press FSK Rate, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the frequency of the modulation signal. The available
range is from 1 Hz to 50 kHz.
3. Set the Hopping Frequency
Hopping frequency indicates the frequency of the modulating waveform. The
range of the hopping frequency is from 100 mHz to the maximum frequency of
the carrier waveform. By default, it is 10 kHz. Press Hop Freq, then rotate the
multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the hopping
frequency.
Sweep
The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator of MSO7000 series oscilloscope
supports the sweep function. In the sweep mode, the Function/Arbitrary Waveform
Generator outputs from the start frequency to the end frequency at a specified
sweep time. MSO7000 series supports 3 sweep modes: Linear, Log, and Step. You
are allowed to set the parameters such as Start Keep, End Keep, and Return Time.
Internal, External, and Manual trigger sources are supported. The sweep output is
available for Sine, Square, Ramp, and Arb (DC excluded) waveforms.
Press Settings → Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select "Sweep",
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Type continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Set the Sweep Type
Press Sweep Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
sweep type, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Sweep Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available
sweep types include Linear, Log, and Step.
⚫ Linear: the frequency of the signal changes linearly.
⚫ Log: the frequency of the signal changes in log form.
⚫ Step: the frequency of the signal changes with ladder-like step.
2. Sweep Settings
Press Settings to enter the sweep setting menu.
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 17-17
⚫ Set start frequency and end frequency
Start frequency and end frequency indicate the upper and lower limits of
the sweep frequency. The Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator always
sweeps from the start frequency to the end frequency, and then returns
back to the start frequency.
➢ When start frequency is smaller than the end frequency, the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator sweeps from low frequency to
high frequency.
➢ When start frequency is greater than the end frequency, the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator sweeps from high frequency
to low frequency.
➢ When start frequency is equal to the end frequency, the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator outputs at a fixed frequency.
Press Start Freq, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the start frequency. Press End Freq, then
rotate the multifunction knob
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set
the end frequency. By default, the start frequency is 100 Hz, and the end
frequency is 1 kHz. The ranges of start frequency and end frequency for
different sweep waveforms are different. After modifying the "Start Freq"
and "End Freq", the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator will restart to
output from the specified "Start Freq".
⚫ Start Keep
Start keep indicates the time that the output signal keeps outputting at the
"Start Freq" after the sweep starts. After the start keep time expires, the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator will continue outputting at a
different frequency based on the current sweep type.
Press Start Keep, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the start keep time. The default is 0 s, and
the range is from 0 s to 500 s.
⚫ End Keep
End keep indicates the time that the output signal continues outputting at
the "End Freq" after the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator sweeps
from "Start Freq" to "End Freq".
Press End Keep, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the end keep time. The default is 0 s, and the range
is from 0 s to 500 s.
⚫ Set the step
When the sweep type is set to "Step", this menu is enabled and can be
settable. Press Step number, then rotate the multifunction knob or
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option)
17-18 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the step value. By default, it is 2. Its
available range is from 2 to 1000.
⚫ Set the trigger source
The trigger sources of the sweep can be Internal, External, or Manual.
When the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator receives a trigger signal,
a sweep output is generated, and then it waits for another trigger signal.
Press Trig Source and rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired trigger source, and then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Trig Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available trigger sources include Internal and Manual.
➢ Internal: the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator outputs
continuous sweep waveforms.
➢ Manual: when you press Manual Trig for one time, one sweep is
immediately launched for the corresponding channel.
3. Set the Sweep Time
Press Sweep Time, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the sweep time. By default, it is 1 s. Its available range is
from 1 ms to 500 s. After modifying the sweep time, the Function/Arbitrary
Waveform Generator will restart to output from the specified "Start Freq".
4. Set the Return Time
Return time indicates the time that the output signal restores from "End Freq" to
"Start Freq" after the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator sweeps from
"Start Freq" to "End Freq" and the "End Keep" time expires.
Press Return Time, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to set the return time. By default, it is 0 s. Its available range is
from 0 s to 500 s.
Burst
The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator of MSO7000 series oscilloscope
supports outputting the burst waveforms with a specified number of cycles. It
supports using internal and manual trigger sources to control the output of the burst
waveforms. Two burst types are supported: N Cycle and Infinite.
Press Settings → Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select "Burst",
and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Type continuously or
enable the touch screen to select it.
1. Set the Burst Type
Press Burst Type, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired
burst type, and then press down the knob to select it. You can also press Burst
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (MSO7000 Option) RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 17-19
Type continuously or enable the touch screen to select it. The available burst
types include N Cycle and Infinite.
⚫ N Cycle: outputs the burst waveforms with a specified number of cycles
once receiving the trigger signal.
⚫ Infinite: sets the number of cycles to Infinite. It outputs continuous
waveforms once receiving the trigger signal.
2. Set the Number of Cycles
When the burst type is set to "N Cycle", you need to set the number of cycles.
Press Cycles, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the number of cycles. For the Infinite burst type, the Cycles menu
is disabled and grayed out.
3. Set the Burst Delay
Burst delay indicates the time from when receiving the trigger signal to starting
to output N Cycle of bursts or Infinite burst.
Press Delay, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up numeric
keypad to set the desired delay time. The range of the delay time related to the
burst cycles.
4. Burst Setting
Press Settings to enter the burst setting menu.
⚫ Set the trigger source
The trigger sources of the burst can be Internal or Manual. When the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator receives a trigger signal, a burst
output is generated, and then it waits for another trigger signal.
Press Trig Source and rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired trigger source, and then press down the knob to select it. You can
also press Trig Source continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
The available trigger sources include Internal and Manual. For the Infinite
burst type, the Trig Source menu is disabled and grayed out.
➢ Internal: the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator outputs
continuous N cycle bursts.
➢ Manual: when you press Manual Trig for one time, one burst output is
immediately launched for the corresponding channel. For the Infinite
burst type, the Cycles menu is disabled and grayed out.
⚫ Set the burst period
It is defined as the time from the beginning of one burst to that of another
burst.
Press Burst Period, then rotate the multifunction knob or use the
pop-up numeric keypad to set the desired burst period. Its available range
is from 2 ms to 500 s. By default, it is 10 ms.
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-1
Chapter 18 Store and Load
You can save the current settings, waveforms, screen image, and parameters of the
oscilloscope in internal memory or external storage device (such as USB storage
device) in various formats and load the stored settings or waveforms when needed.
You can also copy a new file of the specified type as well as delete and rename the
specified type of file in the internal memory or external USB storage device via the
disk management menu.
Note: MSO7000/DS7000 only supports the flash memory USB storage device of
FAT32 format.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Storage System
◼ Storage Type
◼ Load Type
◼ Internal Storage and Load
◼ External Storage and Load
◼ Binary Data Format (.bin)
◼ Disk Management
◼ Factory Settings
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Storage System
Press Storage on the front panel to enter the store and load setting interface. It
provides 3 USB HOST interfaces on the front panel and one USB HOST interface on
the rear panel, which can all be connected to the USB storage device for external
storage. The USB storage devices connected are marked as "Removable USB
Disk(D)", "Removable USB Disk(E)", "Removable USB Disk(F)", and "Removable USB
Disk(G)", respectively.
Storage Type
The file types for storage include image, waveform, and setups. The storage
descriptions of each type are as follows.
1. Image
Press Save Image → Format, and then use the multifunction knob to
select the image type. You can also press Format continuously or enable the
touch screen to select it. Save the screen image to the internal or external
memory in "*.png", "*.bmp", "*.jpg", or "*.tif" format.
After selecting this type:
➢ Press File Name to input the file name to be saved. For filename input,
refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder". Press Storage → More →
Auto Name to select "ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If
the filename that you input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt
message will be displayed, reminding you that the existing file will be
overwritten and asking you whether to continue or not.
➢ Press Invert to enable or disable the invert function.
➢ Press Color to select the desired storage color. It can be set to "Gray" or
"Color".
➢ Press NewFolder to create a new storage folder. For details, refer to
descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
➢ Press Window to display or hide the disk management interface.
➢ Press Save to save the set image file. Press Storage → More → Header
to select "ON" or "OFF". If you select "ON", the instrument model, firmware
version number, serial number, and the image creation date will be
displayed in the header of the image when you save the image file.
Tip
After a USB storage device (FAT32 format, flash memory) is connected, press
Quick on the front panel to save the file. You can select to save to the internal
memory or the external USB storage device. By default, it is saved to the external
memory.
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-3
2. Wave
Press Save Wave to enter the waveform storage setting interface. Save the
main setting information (e.g. "On/Off" state of the channel, vertical scale, and
horizontal time base) and waveform data of all enabled channels (analog
channel and digital channel) to the external memory.
After selecting this type:
➢ Press Data Source to select "Screen" or "Memory".
➢ Press Format to select the format of the waveform storage, such as "*.bin",
"*.cvs", and "*.wfm" (when "Memory" is selected under Data Source).
➢ Press File Name to input the file name to be saved. For filename input,
refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder". Press Storage → More →
Auto Name to select "ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If
the filename that you input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt
message will be displayed, reminding you that the existing file will be
overwritten and asking you whether to continue or not.
➢ Press Channel, and then the available storage channels include CH1-CH4
and D0-D15. Only when you select "Memory" under Data Source and the
format is "*.bin" or "*.cvs", can you set the storage channel.
➢ Press NewFolder to create a new storage folder. For details, refer to
descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
➢ Press Save to save the set waveform file.
➢ Press Window to display or hide the disk management interface.
➢ Press More → Time information to enable or disable the display of the
time information in the waveform data. If enabled, the time information for
the waveform data will be displayed. If disabled, the time information for
the waveform data will not be displayed.
3. Setup
Press Save Setup to enter the setup storage interface. Save the setups of the
oscilloscope to the internal or external memory in "*.stp" format. The stored
setups can be recalled.
After selecting this type:
➢ Press File Name to input the file name to be saved. For filename input,
refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder". Press Storage → More →
Auto Name to select "ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If
the filename that you input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt
message will be displayed, reminding you that the existing file will be
overwritten and asking you whether to continue or not.
➢ Press NewFolder to create a new storage folder. For details, refer to
descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
➢ Press Window to display or hide the disk management interface.
➢ Press Save to save the set setup file.
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Load Type
This oscilloscope provides two load types: waveform load and setup load. The
descriptions of each load type are as follows.
1. Waveform Load
Press Load Wave to load the waveforms from the internal memory or the external
USB disk. The default file type is "*.wfm", and no other options are available. Load
the file from the memory, then press Load to load the selected file.
2. Setup Load
Press Load Setup to load the setups from the internal memory or the external USB
disk. The default file type is "*.stp", and no other options are available. Load the file
from the memory, then press Load to load the selected file.
Internal Storage and Load
The internal memory supports the storage and load of the image file, waveform file,
setup file, reference waveform file, and pass/fail test mask file.
1. Save the Specified Oscilloscope Setups to the Internal Memory (Take
Save Setup as an Example)
1) Connect a signal to the oscilloscope and obtain the stable display of
waveforms.
2) Press Storage → Save Setup to enter the setup storage interface. The
disk management interface is displayed automatically. By default, "Local
Disk(C)" is selected.
3) Rotate the multifunction knob
or enable the touch screen to open the
internal memory storage interface.
4) Rotate the multifunction knob
to select the desired storage location,
and then press down the knob to open it. You can also enable the touch
screen to select the storage location. Rotate the multifunction knob
to
select
, then press down the knob or enable the touch screen to tap
to go to the previous location. Besides, you can also press NewFolder
to create a new storage folder. For details, refer to descriptions in "To
Create a Folder".
5) Press File Name to name the setup file for storage. For details, refer to
descriptions in "To Create a Folder". Press Storage → More → Auto
Name to select "ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If the
filename that you input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt
message will be displayed, reminding you that the existing file will be
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-5
overwritten and asking you whether to continue or not.
6) Press Save to save the set setup file to the selected folder in "*.stp" format.
Tip
1. After saving the reference waveform, press Ref → More → Export to enter
the disk management interface of reference waveform file storage.
2. Press Utility → PassFail to enable the pass/fail test function. Then press
Mask → Save to enter the disk management interface of pass/fail test mask
file storage.
2. Load the Setup File from the Internal Memory (Take Load Setup as an
Example)
1) Press Storage → Load Setup to enter the setup load interface. The disk
management interface is displayed automatically. By default, "Local Disk(C)"
is selected.
2) Rotate the multifunction knob
or enable the touch screen to open the
internal memory storage interface.
3) Rotate the multifunction knob
to select the desired storage location,
and then press down the knob to open it. You can also enable the touch
screen to select the storage location. Rotate the multifunction knob
to
select
, then press down the knob or enable the touch screen to tap
to go to the previous location.
4) Rotate the multifunction knob
to select the file to be loaded (the default
file type is in "*.stp" format). Then, the Load menu is enabled. Press Load
to load the selected file. You can also enable the touch screen to operate.
Tip
⚫ Press Ref → More → Import to enter the disk management interface of
reference waveform file load.
⚫ Press Utility → PassFail to enable the pass/fail test function. Then press
Mask → Load to enter the disk management interface of pass/fail test mask
file load.
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-6 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
External Storage and Load
Before external storage and recall, ensure that the USB disk is properly connected.
The external memory supports image saving, waveform saving, setup saving,
waveform loading, and setup loading.
1. Save the Specified Type of File in the External USB Storage Device
(Take Waveform Saving as an Example)
1) Connect a signal to the oscilloscope and obtain the stable display of
waveforms.
2) Press Storage → Save Wave to enter the waveform storage interface. The
disk management interface is displayed automatically.
3) Rotate the multifunction knob
to select one disk from "Removable USB
Disk(D/E/F/G…)". Press down the knob to open the external disk storage
interface. You can also enable the touch screen to select the storage location.
Rotate the multifunction knob
to select , then press down the knob
or enable the touch screen to tap
to go to the previous location.
Besides, you can also press NewFolder to create a new storage folder. For
details, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
4) To set the waveform saving, refer to descriptions of "Wave" in "Storage
Type".
5) Press Save to save the waveform file to the selected folder in the specified
save format.
2. Load the Specified Type of File from the External USB Storage Device
(Take Waveform Loading as an Example)
1) Press Storage → Load Wave to enter the waveform loading interface.
The disk management interface is displayed automatically.
2) Rotate the multifunction knob
to select one disk from "Removable USB
Disk(D/E/F/G…)". Press down the knob to open the external disk storage
interface. You can also enable the touch screen to select the load location.
Rotate the multifunction knob to select , then press down the
knob or enable the touch screen to tap
to go to the previous location.
3) Rotate the knob to select the file to be loaded, then the Load menu is
enabled. Press Load to load the selected file. You can also enable the touch
screen to operate.
Binary Data Format (.bin)
Binary data format stores waveform data in binary format and provides data headers
that describe these data. As data is displayed in binary format, its file size is much
smaller than the ASCII format. If several channels are enabled, then all the displayed
channels will be saved (save the first channel then save the second, and then it goes
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-7
on like this until all the displayed channels are saved).
In BIN file format, the data are displayed as follows:
― CH1 data
― CH2 data
― CH3 data
― CH4 data
― Digital Channel Data
― Math Waveform Data
Binary Header Format
1. File Header
There is only one file header in a binary file. The file header contains the
following information.
Cookie
Two-byte characters, RG, indicating that the file is the RIGOL
binary data file format.
Version
Two bytes, indicating the file version.
File Size
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the file. It
includes the header.
Number of
Waveforms
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveforms that are
stored in the file.
2. Waveform Header
It is possible to store several waveforms in the file. Each stored waveform has a
waveform header. When several channels are stored, each channel can be
considered as a separate waveform. The waveform header contains the
information about the type of waveform data that are stored following the
waveform data header.
Header Size
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the
header.
Waveform
Type
A 4-byte integer, indicating the type of the waveform stored
in the file.
0 = Unknown
1 = Normal
2 = Peak Detection
3 = Average
4 = Not Used
5 = Not Used
6 = Logic
Number of
Waveform
Buffers
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveform buffers
required to read the data.
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-8 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Number of
Points
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveform points in
the data.
Count
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of hits at each time
interval during waveform recording when using a certain
sample mode (e.g. Average) to create the waveforms. For
example, when averaging, a count of 4 indicates that each
waveform data point in the waveform recording has been
averaged at least 4 times. The default value is 0.
X Display
Range
A 4-byte float, indicating the X-axis duration of the waveform
that is displayed. For time-domain waveforms,
it indicates the duration of time across the display. If the
value is zero, then no data has been acquired.
X Display
Origin
A 8-byte double, indicating the X-axis value at the left edge of
the screen. For time-domain waveforms, it indicates the time
at the start of the display. The value is treated as a double
precision 64-bit float point number. If the value is zero, then
no data has been acquired.
X Increment
A 8-byte double, indicating the duration between data points
on the X axis. For time-domain waveforms,
it indicates the time between points. If the value is zero, then
no data has been acquired.
X Origin
A 8-byte double, indicating the X-axis value of the first data
point in the data recording. For time-domain waveforms, it
indicates the time of the first point. The value is treated as a
double precision 64-bit float point number. If the value is
zero, then no data has been acquired.
X Units
A 4-byte integer, indicating the unit of measurement for X
values in the acquired data.
0 = Unknown
1 = Volts (V)
2 = Seconds (s)
3 = Constant
4 = Amps (A)
5 = dB
6 = Hz
Y Units
A 4-byte integer, indicating the unit of measurement for Y
values in the acquired data. The possible values are listed
above under X Units.
Date
A 16-byte character array, not used
Time
A 16-byte character array, not used
Frame
A 24-byte character array, indicating the model number and
serial number of the oscilloscope in the format:
MODEL#:SERIAL#.
Waveform
Label
A 16-byte character array that contains the label assigned to
the waveform.
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-9
3. Waveform Data Header
A waveform may have multiple data sets. Each waveform data set has a
waveform data header. The waveform data header consists of information about
the waveform data set. The header is stored before the data set.
Header Size
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in
the waveform data header.
Buffer Type
A 2-byte integer, indicating the type of the
waveform data stored in the file.
0 = Unknown
1 = Normal 32-bit float data
2 = Maximum float data
3 = Minimum float data
4 = Not Used
5 = Not Used
6 = Digital unsigned 8-bit character data (for
digital channels)
Bytes Per Point
A 2-byte short integer, indicating the number of
bytes per data point.
Buffer Size
A 4-byte integer, indicating the size of the buffer
required to hold the data points.
Disk Management
Press Storage → Disk to turn on the disk management interface as shown in Figure
18-1. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired disk. The disk currently
selected is displayed in blue shading. Press down the knob
to open the selected
disk. You can also enable the touch screen to select the disk.
Figure 18-1 Disk Management Interface
Execute the following operations through the disk management menu:
⚫ To Select a File Type
⚫ To Create a Folder
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-10 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
⚫ To Delete a File or Folder
⚫ To Copy and Paste a File or Folder
⚫ To Rename a File or Folder
⚫ To Clear the Internal Memory Safely
To Select a File Type
Except the image storage, waveform storage, and setup storage, the oscilloscope
can also save the files of advanced applications.
Press Storage → Disk → File Type, rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired file type. The default is "*.*". In the current path, only the file whose suffix of
its file name matches that of the file type selected will be displayed in the current
path.
To Create a Folder
Before using the external disk, make sure that a USB storage device (FAT32 format,
flash memory) is connected correctly.
In the disk management interface, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the
storage location. By default, the internal memory "Local Disk(C)" is selected. Press
NewFolder to enter the interface, as shown in Figure 18-2.
Figure 18-2 To Create a Folder
This oscilloscope supports Chinese/English input method. The length of the folder
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-11
name is limited to 22 bytes (one Chinese character occupies two bytes). The
following part introduces how to input a folder name using Chinese/English input
method.
English Input Method
For example, create a folder with the name "Filename".
1. Select English Input Method
If the current input method is "En/中/繁", please go to Step 2. If the current
input method is "中/繁/En" or "繁/En/中", rotate the multifunction knob
to
select the input switch key and press the knob
continuously to switch to
"En/中/繁". "En" is located first and highlighted.
2. Clear the Name Input Area
If there is no character in the "Name Input Area", please go to Step 3. If there
are characters in the "Name Input Area", press rotate the multifunction knob
to select the Delete key
to delete all the characters in the name input area
in order.
3. Input the First Character "F"
1) If the current setting is uppercase input, please go to Step 2). If the current
setting is lowercase input, rotate the multifunction knob
to select
"Caps" and press down the knob to switch to the uppercase input.
Tip
During the name input, rotate the multifunction knob
to select the desired
contents. Press down the knob to input the desired contents, or enable the touch
screen and tap the desired contents to select it.
Name Input Area Letter Input Area Virtual Keypad
Upper/Lower
Case Switch
Input Method
Switch
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-12 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
2) Rotate the multifunction knob to select "F" and press down the knob.
The character is displayed in the English selection area.
3) In the English selection area, rotate the multifunction knob
to select "F"
and press it down. Then, "F" is displayed in the name input area, "F" is input
successfully. If the character is not found in the current page, press
to
go to the next page until you find the desired character.
4. Input the Other Characters
Use the same method to input the remaining letters "ilename" by referring to
Step 3. Pay attention to the upper-lower case of the letters when inputting them.
5. Modify or Delete the Unwanted Characters that Have Been Entered.
While entering a filename, you can modify or delete the unwanted character if
necessary. To delete the input characters, rotate the multifunction knob
in
the virtual keypad to select the delete key
. Press down the key to delete the
characters. To modify the input characters, delete the unwanted characters and
input the desired characters again. If the character to be modified is in the
middle, press the delete key
to delete the characters starting from the last
one to the character to be modified, then input the new character again.
If the touch screen is enabled, tap to directly move the cursor to the character
required to be modified or deleted, and then input the desired character again or
delete the unwanted character.
6. After finishing the input, rotate the multifunction knob
and press OK. The
oscilloscope will create a folder or a specified type of file with this name under
the current directory.
Simplified Chinese (or Traditional Chinese) Input Method
For example, create a folder with the name "文件名". Note that the input method of
traditional Chinese is the same as that of the simplified Chinese.
Tip
If characters already exist in the letter input area, when you rotate the
multifunction knob
to delete the characters in the name input area, the
characters in the letter input area will be deleted first.
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-13
1. Chinese Input Method
If the current input method is "中/繁/En", please go to Step 2. If the current
input method is "En/中/繁" or "繁/En/中", rotate the multifunction knob
to
select the input switch key and press the knob
continuously to switch to "
中/繁/En". "中" is located first and highlighted.
2. Clear the Pinyin Input Area and Name Input Area
If there is no character in the "Pinyin Input Area" and "Name Input Area", please
go to Step 3. If there are characters in the "Name Input Area" and "Pinyin Input
Area", press rotate the multifunction knob to select the delete key to
delete all the characters in the name input area in order.
3. Input the first Chinese character "
文"
1) Input the pinyin "wen" in the "Pinyin Input Area"
Rotate the multifunction knob
to select the first letter "w" in the pinyin
"wen" and press down the knob to input "w" in the "Pinyin Input Area". Use
the same method to input the remaining letters "en" in the pinyin "wen".
After finishing the input, the Chinese characters available are displayed in
the "Chinese Character Selecting Area".
2) Select the desired Chinese character from the "Chinese Character Selecting
Area"
Rotate the multifunction knob
to select "文", and press down the knob,
then "文" is input in the "Name Input Area". If the Chinese character is not
found in the current page, press to go to the next page until you find
the desired character.
4. Input the Other Characters
Refer to Step 3 and use the same method to input the remaining Chinese
characters "件名" in sequence.
Pinyin Input Area Chinese Character Selecting Area
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-14 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
5. Modify or Delete the Unwanted Characters that Have Been Entered.
When inputting the filename, you can modify or delete the filename characters
input in the "Name Input Area" as well as delete the pinyin characters input in
the "Pinyin Input Area". To delete the input characters, rotate the multifunction
knob
in the virtual keypad to select the delete key . Press down the key
to delete the characters. To modify the input characters, delete the unwanted
characters and input the desired characters again. If the character to be
modified is in the middle, press the delete key
to delete the characters
starting from the last one to the character to be modified, then input the new
character again.
If the touch screen is enabled, tap to directly move the cursor to the character
required to be modified or deleted, and then input the desired character again or
delete the character.
6. After finishing the input, rotate the multifunction knob
and press OK. The
oscilloscope will create a folder or a specified type of file with this name under
the current directory.
To Delete a File or Folder
1. Delete a File or Folder from the Internal Memory
1) Press Storage → Disk and rotate the multifunction knob to select the
internal memory "Local Disk(C)". Press down the knob to open it.
2) Rotate the multifunction knob
to select the file or the folder to be
deleted.
3) Press Delete, and then a confirmation dialog box is displayed. Tap to select
"Yes" to delete the file or the folder.
2. Delete a File or Folder from the External Memory
1) Press Storage → Disk and rotate the multifunction knob to select the
external memory. Press down the knob to open it.
2) Rotate the multifunction knob
to select the file or the folder to be
deleted.
3) Press Delete, and then a confirmation dialog box is displayed. Tap to select
"Yes" to delete the file or the folder.
Tip
If characters already exist in the Pinyin input area, when you rotate the
multifunction knob
to delete the characters in the name input area, the
characters in the Pinyin input area will be deleted first.
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-15
To Copy and Paste a File or Folder
1) Press Storage → Disk, rotate the multifunction knob to select the internal
or external memory. Press down the knob to select it.
2) Rotate the multifunction knob
to select the file or folder to be copied and
pasted.
3) Press Copy to copy the selected file or folder.
4) Select the destination disk, then press Paste to paste the selected file or folder.
To Rename a File or Folder
1) Press Storage → Disk, rotate the multifunction knob to select the internal
or external memory. Press down the knob to open it.
2) Rotate the multifunction knob
to select the file or folder to be renamed.
3) Press Rename, and then the filename input interface is displayed. For the
filename input method, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
To Clear the Internal Memory Safely
1) Press Storage → Disk, rotate the multifunction knob to select the internal
memory "Local Disk(C)".
2) Press SecurityClear, and then a prompt message for confirming security clear
Tip
⚫ When you delete a directory where a file or a folder exists, the directory
cannot be deleted.
⚫ The touch screen function only allows you to select the directory and open it.
You are unable to delete the directory with the touch screen function.
Tip
⚫ If the destination directory has the same file or folder that you want to paste,
then a prompt message "File or directory exists" is displayed. You are not
allowed to execute the copy and paste operation.
⚫ The touch screen function only allows you to select the directory and open it.
You are unable to copy the directory with the touch screen function.
Tip
The touch screen function only allows you to select the directory and open it. You
are unable to rename the directory with the touch screen function.
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-16 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
is displayed.
3) Press OK to clear all the files stored in the internal memory.
Factory Settings
Press Default on the front panel, then a prompt message "Restore default?" is
displayed. Press OK or tap OK to restore the oscilloscope to the factory default
settings, as shown in the table below.
Table 18-1 Factory Settings
Parameter
Factory Settings
Horizontal
Vertical
Acquire
Trigger
Display
Dual-channel Function/AWG (GI or GII)
Cursor
Storage
Utility
Math
Logic Analyzer (LA)
Protocol Decoding (Decode)
Ref
Horizontal
Horizontal Time
Base
1 μs
Horizontal Position
0 s
Delayed Sweep
Off
Timebase Mode
YT
Fine
Off
Horizontal
Expansion
Center
Vertical
Vertical Scale
100 mV
Vertical Offset
0 V
CH1
On
CH2
Off
CH3
Off
CH4
Off
Channel Coupling
DC
BW Limit
Off
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-17
Attenuation
1X
Input Impedance
1 MΩ
Invert
Off
Fine
Off
Channel Unit
[V]
Display Label
Off
Built-in Label
CH1
Ch-Ch Skew
0 s
Offset Cal
0 V
Acquire
Acquisition Mode
Normal
Memory Depth
Auto
Anti-Aliasing
Off
Trigger
Trigger Type
Edge Trigger
Source Selection
CH1
Edge Type
Rising
Trigger Mode
Auto
Trigger Coupling
DC
Trigger Holdoff
8 ns
Noise Rejection
Off
Display
Display Type
Vector
Persistence Time
Min
Intensity
50%
Grid
FULL
Brightness
30%
Show Scale
Off
Color Grade
Off
Waveform Freeze
On
Dual-channel Function/AWG (GI or GII)
[1]
GI
Off
GII
Off
Status Display
Off
GI/GII
Wave
Sine
Output
Off
Frequency
1 kHz
Amplitude
500 mV
Offset
0 V
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-18 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Start Phase
0°
Setting Type
Off
Impedance
HighZ
Cursor
Mode
Off
Manual
Select
Y
Source
CH1
AY
100 mV
BY
-100 mV
Vertical Unit
Source
Hori. Unit
s
Region
Main
Track
AX Source
CH1
BX Source
CH1
AX
-1 μs
BX
1 μs
Track
X
XY
AX
-233.3 mV
BX
100 mV
AY
-233.3 mV
BY
-100 mV
Storage
Auto Name
ON
Header
ON
Save Image
Format
*.png
Invert
OFF
Color
Color
Window
Show
Save Wave
Data Source
Screen
Format
*.bin
Window
Show
Save Setup
File Type
*.stp
Window
Show
Load Wave
File Type
*.wfm
Load Setup
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-19
File Type
*.stp
Disk
File Type
*.*
Utility
Sound
OFF
PassFail
Enable
OFF
Source
CH1
Operate
Stop
Range
Screen
X Mask
0.24 div
Y Mask
0.48 div
File Type
*.pf
File Type
*.pf
File Name
RigolDS0
Window
Show
Indicator
OFF
Aux Output
OFF
Output Event
Fail
Polarity
Positive
Pulse
1 μs
Err Action
None
Record
Record
OFF
Record
Play
Record
Interval
10 ns
Frames
1000
Max Frames
9175
Beeper
Current
0
Play
Mode
Sequence
Interval
100 ms
Current
0
Jump To
First
Save
First
1
System
Power On
Default
Power status
Switch Off
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-20 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Aux Out
TrigOut
Key Locker
Unlocked
HDMI Output
OFF
HDMI Resolution
1280x720
SelfCal
Window
Open
Auto Config
Peak to Peak
OFF
CH
All
Overlay
OFF
Coupling
OFF
Printer
Copies
1
Paper Size
A4
Ink Saver
ON
Printer
HP/Laserjet
Email
Attachment
Screen
Screen Saver
Screen Saver
Off
Quick Settings
Operation
Save Image
Format
*.png
Invert
OFF
Color
Color
Math
Invert
OFF
Expand
GND
Display Label
OFF
Library
ADD
Label Editing
ADD
A+B
Operation
OFF
Source A
CH1
Source B
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
A-B
Operation
OFF
Source A
CH1
Source B
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-21
A×B
Operation
OFF
Source A
CH1
Source B
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
A÷B
Operation
OFF
Source A
CH1
Source B
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
FFT
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 dB
Scale
2 dB
Unit
dBm/dBV
X
Start-End
Start Freq
0 Hz
Stop Freq
10 MHz
Window Function
Hanning
Mode
Trace
View
Full
Peak Search
OFF
Peak Number
5
Threshold
5.5 dB
Excursion
1.8 dB
Table Order
Amp Order
A&&B
Operation
OFF
Source A
CH1
Source B
CH1
Wave Size
Medium
Thre.CH1
0 V
Thre.CH2
0 V
Thre.CH3
0 V
Thre.CH4
0 V
Sensitivity
0.3 Div
A||B
Operation
OFF
Source A
CH1
Source B
CH1
Wave Size
Medium
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-22 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Thre.CH1
0 V
Thre.CH2
0 V
Thre.CH3
0 V
Thre.CH4
0 V
Sensitivity
0.3 Div
A^B
Operation
OFF
Source A
CH1
Source B
CH1
Wave Size
Medium
Thre.CH1
0 V
Thre.CH2
0 V
Thre.CH3
0 V
Thre.CH4
0 V
Sensitivity
0.3 Div
!A
Operation
OFF
Source A
CH1
Wave Size
Medium
Thre.CH1
0 V
Thre.CH2
0 V
Thre.CH3
0 V
Thre.CH4
0 V
Sensitivity
0.3 Div
Intg
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 v*s
Scale
500 mv*s
Bias
0
Invert
OFF
Diff
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 v/s
Scale
500 mv/s
Smooth
5
Invert
OFF
Sqrt
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
Invert
OFF
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-23
Lg
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
Invert
OFF
Ln
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
Invert
OFF
Exp
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
Invert
OFF
Abs
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mV
Invert
OFF
Low Pass
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
ωc
50 MHz
Invert
OFF
High Pass
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
ωc
50 MHz
Invert
OFF
Band Pass
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
ωc1
50 MHz
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-24 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
ωc2
100 MHz
Invert
OFF
Band Stop
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
ωc1
50 MHz
ωc2
100 MHz
Invert
OFF
AX+B
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
A
1
B
0
Invert
OFF
Logic Analyzer (LA)
[2]
Select
None
D7-D0
OFF
D15-D8
OFF
Wave Size
Medium
Arrange
D15-D0
Threshold
D7-D0
1.4 V
D15-D8
1.4 V
Label
Display
OFF
Select
D0
Label
D0
Protocol Decoding (Decode)
Bus Type
Parallel
Bus Status
OFF
Format
Hex
Label
ON
Event Table
OFF
Noise Reject
OFF
Clock
OFF
RS232
Bus Status
OFF
Baud
9.6 kbps
Tx
CH1
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 18-25
Threshold
0 V
Rx
OFF
Polarity
Endian
LSB
Data
8 bits
Stop Bit
1 bit
Parity
None
Package
OFF
Separator
0(NUL)
I2C
Bus Status
OFF
Clock
CH1
SCL Thre
0 V
SDA
CH2
SDA Thre
0 V
Exchange
SCL/SDA
R/W
Without
SPI
Bus Status
OFF
Mode
Timeout
Timeout
1 μs
CLK
CH1
Threshold
0 V
Slope
Rising
MISO
CH2
Threshold
0 V
MOSI
OFF
Polarity
Width
8
Endian
MSB
LIN
Bus Status
OFF
Source
CH1
Threshold
0 V
Baud
19.2 kbps
Parity
Without
Version
Both
CAN
Bus Status
OFF
Source
CH1
Threshold
0 V
Signal
CAN_L
Baud
1 Mbps
Sample Position
50%
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-26 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
FlexRay
Bus Status
OFF
Source
CH1
Threshold
0 V
Channel
Selection
A
Baud
10 Mbps
Signal
BP
Sample Position
50%
I2S
Bus Status
OFF
SCLK
CH1
SCLK Thre
0 V
SCLK Edge
Rising
WS
CH2
SCLK Thre
0 V
Data
CH3
Data Thre
0 V
Word Size
4
Receive
4
Alignment
I2S
WS Low
Left
Endian
MSB
Data Polarity
1553B
Bus Status
OFF
Data
CH1
Threshold
0 V
Ref
Current
Ref1
Source
CH1
VScale
1 V
VOffset
0 V
Color
Orange
Label Display
OFF
Library
Default
Label
REF1
Note:
[1]
This function is only applicable for the MSO7000 model installed with the
function/arbitrary waveform generator option.
Note:
[2]
This function is only applicable for the MSO7000 model.
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 19-1
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
In the system function setting menu, you can set the parameters for the remote
interface and the system-related parameters.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Remote Interface Configuration
◼ System-related
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Remote Interface Configuration
MSO7000/DS7000 series can communicate with the PC via the USB, LAN, or GPIB
(requiring to work with RIGOL's USB-GPIB interface converter) interface. Before
using the remote interfaces, configure the corresponding interface according to the
introductions in the following section.
LAN Configuration
Before using the LAN bus, use a network cable to connect the oscilloscope to your
local area network. The network interface of the oscilloscope is on the rear panel.
Press Utility → IO → LAN to open the LAN Settings interface, as shown in the
following figure. You can view the current network settings and configure the
network parameters.
Figure 19-1 Network Connection Setting Interface
Network Status
Different prompts will be displayed according to the current network connection
status.
⚫ Network Config Succeeded!
⚫ Acquiring IP...
⚫ IP Conflict!
⚫ Disconnected!
⚫ DHCP Config Failed!
⚫ Read Status Fail!
Network Status
Current IP Config.
Type
MAC Address
VISA Descriptor
IP Config. Type
Network Parameters
Web Control
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 19-3
⚫ Connected!
⚫ Invalid IP!
⚫ IP lost!
⚫ Please wait...
IP Configuration Type
The configuration type of the IP address can be DHCP, Auto IP, or Static IP. For
different IP configuration types, the configurations for IP address and other network
parameters are different.
DHCP
Press IP Config Type, then rotate the multi-function knob or press IP Config
Type continuously to select "DHCP". Press down the knob to select it. You can
also enable the touch screen to select it. When DHPC is valid, the DHCP server in the
current network will assign the network parameters (e.g. IP address, Subnet,
Gateway, and DNS) for the oscilloscope.
Auto IP
Press IP Config Type, then rotate the multi-function knob or press IP Config
Type continuously to select "Auto IP". Press down the knob to select it. You can
also enable the touch screen to select it. In auto IP mode, the oscilloscope will get
the IP address (ranging from 169.254.0.1 to 169.254.255.254) and the subnet mask
(255.255.0.0) automatically according to the current network configuration. Only
when "DHCP" is not selected or failed to be connected, can "Auto IP" be valid.
Static IP
Press IP Config Type, then rotate the multi-function knob or press IP Config
Type continuously to select "Static IP". Press down the knob to select it. You
can also enable the touch screen to select it. When this type is valid, disable DHCP
and Auto IP manually, then "IP", "SubMask", "Gateway", and "DNS" are added to the
menu. At this time, you can self-define the network parameters (e.g. IP address) of
the oscilloscope.
1. Set IP Address
The format of the IP address is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first segment
(nnn) of the address is from 0 to 255 (except 127); wherein, the valid range is
from 0 to 223. The range for the other three segments is from 0 to 255. You are
recommended to ask your network administrator for an IP address available.
Press IP, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric keys to
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
input the desired IP address. This setting will be saved to the non-volatile
memory; if "Power On" is set to "Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are disabled at
the next power-on. The oscilloscope will load the preset IP address
automatically.
2. Set the Subnet Mask
The format of the subnet mask is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn; wherein, the range of "nnn"
is from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for a
subnet mask available.
Press SubMask, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric
keys to input the desired subnet mask. This setting will be saved in the
non-volatile memory; if "Power On" is set to "Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are
disabled at the next power-on. The oscilloscope will load the preset subnet mask
automatically.
3. Set the Gateway
You can set this parameter in Static IP mode.
The format of the gateway is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first segment
(nnn) is from 0 to 223 (except 127), and the range for the other three segments
is from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for a
gate address available.
Press Gateway, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric
keys to input the desired subnet mask. This setting will be saved in the
non-volatile memory; if "Power On" is set to "Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are
disabled at the next power-on. The oscilloscope will load the preset gateway
automatically.
4. Set the DNS
You can set this parameter in Static IP mode.
The format of the DNS address is "nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn". The range for the first
segment (nnn) of the address is from 0 to 223 (except 127); and the range for
the other three segments is from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your
network administrator for an address available.
Press DNS, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric keys to
input the desired DNS address. Generally, you do not need to set the DNS,
therefore this parameter setting can be ignored.
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 19-5
Apply the Network Parameter Setting
Press Apply to apply the current network parameter setting.
MAC address
For each oscilloscope, the MAC address is unique. When assigning the IP address for
the oscilloscope, the system uses the MAC address to identify the instrument.
VISA Address
Displays the VISA address currently used by the oscilloscope.
Online control information
Displays the user name and password for network configuration of the oscilloscope
through the LXI webpage.
Tip: Connect the oscilloscope to the local area network. Start up Ultra Sigma, and
then right-click the resource name and select "LXI-Web" to load the LXI webpage.
You can also directly input the IP address of the oscilloscope into the address bar of
the browser to load the LXI webpage.
To Set mDNS
Press mDNS continuously to enable or disable the multicast Domain Name System
(mDNS). This system is used to provide the function of DNS server for service
discovery in a small network without a DNS server.
To Set Host Name
Press Host Name to input the host name. For the hostname input method, refer to
relevant descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
Tip
⚫ When the three IP configuration types are all turned on, the priority of the
parameter configuration from high to low is "DHCP", "Auto IP", and "Static
IP".
⚫ The three IP configuration types cannot be all turned off at the same time.
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-6 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
To Set the GPIB Address
Before using the GPIB bus to control the oscilloscope, use the USB-GPIB interface
converter (an option that requires to be ordered separately) to extend the GPIB
interface, and then use the GPIB cable to connect the instrument to the PC. Press
Utility → IO → GPIB, then rotate the multifunction knob directly to set the
GPIB address or use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the GPIB address. Its
settable range is from 1 to 30. By default, it is 1.
To Set HDMI
Sets the status and parameters of the HDMI video output interface on the rear panel.
Note that only when the HDMI interface is connected, can this menu be enabled.
Press HDMI to enter the HDMI setting menu.
⚫ Press Output continuously to enable or disable the video output.
➢ ON: You can connect the instrument to an external display via this interface
to better observe the waveform display clearly from the external display.
➢ OFF: disables the interface.
⚫ Press Resolution to set the screen resolution. The available resolution includes
640x480, 720x480, and 1280x720.
USB Connection
The oscilloscope can communicate with a PC via the USB DEVICE interface on the
rear panel. No parameters are required to be configured.
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 19-7
System-related
Beeper
When the beeper is enabled, you can hear the sound of the beeper when you
perform the following operations:
⚫ Press a key or a menu key on the front panel
⚫ Enable the touch screen
⚫ When a prompt message is displayed
Press Utility and then press Beeper continuously to select "ON" ( ) or "OFF" ( ).
By default, it is OFF.
Language
This oscilloscope supports menus in multiple languages. Both Chinese and English
are available for the display of the help information, prompt messages, and interface.
Press Utility → Language and rotate the multi-function knob to select the
desired language; then, press down the knob to select the language. You can
also press Language continuously to select the language or enable the touch screen
to tap the desired language and select it.
System Information
Press Utility → System → About to view the system information of the
oscilloscope, including the manufacturer, product model, serial number, etc.
You can also view the system information of the oscilloscope in the "Help" system
menu.
Power On
You can set the system configuration to be recalled when the oscilloscope is powered
on again after power-off.
Press Utility → System, and then press Power On continuously to select "Last" or
"Default". By default, it is "Default".
⚫ Last: returns to the setting of the system at last power-off.
⚫ Default: returns to the factory setting of the system.
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-8 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Power Status
Use the power line to connect the oscilloscope to the AC power and then turn on the
power switch to power on the instrument. You can set the power status after it is
powered on.
Press Utility → System, and then press Power status to select "Switch On" or
"Switch Off".
⚫ Switch Off: after the oscilloscope is connected to power, you need to press the
Power key on the front panel to power on the instrument.
⚫ Switch On: After the oscilloscope is connected to power, it will be powered on
immediately.
Note: Whatever the option you select, you still can press the Power key on the front
panel to turn on or off the instrument.
Aux Output
You can set the type of the signal output from the [TRIG OUT] connector on the
rear panel.
Press Utility → System, and then press the AUX Out key continuously to select
"TrigOut" or "PassFail".
⚫ Trigger Output
After this type is selected, at each trigger (hardware trigger), the oscilloscope
outputs a signal from the [TRIG OUT] connector on the rear panel that can
reflect the current capture rate of the oscilloscope. Connect this signal to a
waveform display device, measure the signal frequency. It is found that the
measurement result is the same as the current capture rate.
⚫ Pass/Fail
When this type is selected, the instrument can output a positive or negative
pulse via the [TRIG OUT] connector when a successful or failed event is
detected. Refer to descriptions in "To Set the Output Form of the Test
Results". When you enable the Aux output, the AUX Out menu is
automatically set to "PassFail". When the AUX Out menu is set to "TrigOut",
then in the pass/fail test menu, the Aux Out function is automatically disabled.
Help
Press Utility → System → Help to enter the "Help" function menu. You can also
enable the touch screen and then tap the function navigation icon at the
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 19-9
lower-left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, tap the "Help"
icon to open the "Help" function menu.
⚫ Press About to view the system information of the oscilloscope.
⚫ Press Content to enter the built-in help system.
⚫ Press Option list to view the name of the installed option and other detailed
information about the option from the option list.
⚫ Press Option install to install the desired option. For detailed installation
procedures, refer to descriptions in "To View the Option Information and
the Option Installation".
⚫ Press Online upgrade to perform online upgrading for the system software.
For the method of online upgrade, refer to "Tip" in "Rear Panel Overview"
section.
⚫ Press Local upgrade, then a dialog box "Upgrade system firmware?" is
displayed. Tap OK to perform local upgrading for the system software (required
to insert the USB disk that contains the software installation package); tap
Cancel to cancel local upgrading operation.
Self-calibration
The self-calibration program can quickly make the oscilloscope to work in an optimal
state to get the precise measurement results. You can perform self-calibration at any
time, especially when the changes of the ambient temperature reach or above 5℃.
Make sure that the oscilloscope has been warmed up or operating for more than 30
minutes before the self-calibration.
Disconnect all the input channels, then press Utility → System → SelfCal, and the
self-calibration interface is displayed, as shown in the following figure.
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-10 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Figure 19-2 Self-calibration Interface
⚫ Press Start, and then the oscilloscope will start to execute the self-calibration
program.
⚫ After the self-calibration program is launched, the Exit menu is no longer grayed
out and is enabled. Press Exit to give up the self-calibration operation at any
time.
⚫ Press Window continuously to open or close the self-calibration information
window. You can also enable the touch screen to tap the
icon at the
upper-right corner of the self-calibration information window to close the
window.
Note: Most of the keys are disabled during the self-calibration.
Auto Config
You can set the parameters for the AUTO menu.
Press Utility → More → Auto Config, and set the parameters for the AUTO key.
For detailed settings, refer to descriptions in "Quick Measurement after AUTO".
Print Setting
Connect the oscilloscope to the local area network via the network cable. The
MSO7000/DS7000 series supports printing the whole screen to the USB printer or
network printer. You can connect the oscilloscope to the printer directly via the USB
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 19-11
DEVICE interface on the rear panel. Then, you can set the print parameters on the
oscilloscope to control the printer to output the corresponding picture.
Press Utility → More → Printer to enter the printer setting menu. After the printer
is properly connected, you need to set the network configurations for printing, and
then set the printer parameters.
1. Network Configuration
Press Setting to enter the network configuration menu.
⚫ Select the Printer
Press Printer, and rotate the multifunction knob to select the printer
model. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Printer
continuously or enable the touch screen to select it.
⚫ Set the IP Address
Press Printer IP, then rotate the multifunction knob to set each
segment of the IP address for the printer. Press down the knob to confirm
the setting for each segment of the address. At this time, the cursor is
moved to the next segment automatically. You can also press Printer IP
continuously to switch the segment position, and then rotate the
multifunction knob
to set it. You can also enable the touch screen to
switch the address segment.
⚫ Set the Port
Press Printer Port, rotate the multifunction knob to adjust the port
number or use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the port number.
⚫ Network Test
Press Test to test whether the network is connected. If connected, a
prompt message "Network connected" is displayed.
⚫ Print Test Page
Press Print test page to carry out the print test. The print progress is also
displayed on the screen.
2. Set the Printer Parameters
⚫ Print
After the printer parameters are set, press Print to execute the print
operation.
⚫ Copies
Press Copies, then rotate the multifunction knob to set the number of
copies to be printed or use the pop-up numeric keypad to set it. The settable
range is from 1 to 99.
⚫ Paper Size
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-12 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
The Paper Size menu is grayed out and disabled. The paper size supported
by the oscilloscope is only A4.
⚫ Ink Saver
Press Ink Saver continuously to enable or disable the ink saver setting. If
disabled, you need to set Color. Press Color continuously to select "Gray"
or "Color".
Email
This oscilloscope supports sending files via emails. Press Utility → More → Email
to enter the email setting menu.
1. Set the Email Server
Press Settings to enter the email server login setting menu. The following
window is displayed. After the setting, enable the touch screen to tap OK to
complete the server login. To cancel login, tap Cancel to exit or tap the icon
at the upper-right corner of the window to exit. If you exit the server setting
window, you can press SMTP, UserName, or PassWord to reopen the
window.
⚫ Set SMTP
Press SMTP to set the mail transmission protocol. For detailed settings of
mail transmission protocol, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
⚫ Set the port
Press Port to set the protocol port in the pop-up numeric keypad. Its range
is from 1 to 65535.
⚫ Set the user name
Press UserName to set the user name of the server. For detailed setting
methods for the user name, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
⚫ Set the password
Press PassWord to set the password of the server. For detailed setting
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 19-13
methods for the password, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
⚫ Email test
Press Test to test whether the e-mail server is properly set.
⚫ Restore default settings
Press Default to restore the settings of receiver and mail settings to
defaults.
2. Set the Receiver
Press Receiver to display the receiver input interface, and you can edit the
email address of the receiver. For detailed input methods of the receiver email
address, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
3. Upload Attachment
Press Attachment, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
attachment type to be uploaded, and then press down the knob
to select it.
You can also press Attachment continuously to select or enable the touch
screen to tap the attachment. The available attachments include "Screen",
"Setup", and "Other". If you select "Other", you also need to press File Select
to select the file to be uploaded.
4. Send the Mail
Press Send Mail to send the edited email to the receiver.
Key Locker
You can set whether to lock the front-panel keys.
Press Utility → More → Key Locker to select "Locked" or "Unlocked".
⚫ Locked: indicates that all keys of the oscilloscope (except the Key Locker key)
are locked.
⚫ Unlocked: unlocks the front-panel keys.
Quick Operation
You can set the shortcut functions for the Quick key on the front panel.
Press Utility → More → Quick settings to enter the quick key operation menu.
1. Image Saving
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Image", press Quick on the front
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-14 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
panel to capture the screen.
⚫ Operation Type
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Save
Image". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation
continuously to select among the options, or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired operation type.
⚫ Image Format
Press Format and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
image format. You can also press Format continuously to select among the
options, or enable the touch screen to tap the desired image format. The
image formats include "*.png", "*.bmp", "*.jpg", and "*.tif".
⚫ Invert
Press Invert continuously to enable or disable the invert function.
⚫ Color
Press Color continuously to set the color of the saved image to "Color" or
"Gray".
2. Waveform Saving
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Wave", press Quick on the front
panel to save the waveform.
⚫ Operation Type
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Save
Wave". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation
continuously to select among the options, or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired operation type.
⚫ Data Source
Press Data Source continuously to select "Memory" or "Screen" as the
source of the saved waveform.
⚫ Format
Press Format and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
waveform format. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Format continuously to select or enable the touch screen to tap the format.
When Data Source is "Screen", the available formats are "*.bin" and "*.csv".
When Data Source is "Memory", the available formats are "*.bin", "*.csv",
and "*.wfm".
⚫ Storage Channel
If "Memory" is selected under Data Source, you need to set the storage
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 19-15
channel. Press Channel and then rotate the multifunction knob to select
the storage channel. You can also press Channel continuously to select the
channel or enable the touch screen to tap the desired channel. The available
storage channels include CH1-CH4 and D0-D15.
3. Setup Saving
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Setup", press Quick on the front
panel to save the setup of the oscilloscope.
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Save
Setup". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation
continuously to select among the options, or enable the touch screen to tap the
desired operation type. You do not need to set relevant parameters.
4. All Measurement
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "All Measure", press Quick on the front
panel to measure all the parameters of the current measurement source.
⚫ Operation Type
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "All
Measure". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation
continuously to select among the options, or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired operation type.
⚫ All Measurement
Press All Measure, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired measurement channel. You can also press All Measure continuously
to select or enable the touch screen to tap the desired channel. The available
measurement channels include OFF and CH1-CH4.
5. Statistics Reset
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Stat Reset", press Quick on the front
panel to make statistics reset of measurement or pass/fail test reset.
⚫ Operation Type
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Stat
Reset". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation
continuously to select among the options, or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired operation type.
⚫ Statistics Reset
Press Stat Reset and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
function that requires statistics reset. Press down the knob to select it. You
can also press Stat Reset continuously to select among the options, or
enable the touch screen to tap the desired option. You can select "Measure"
or "PassFail".
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-16 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
6. Print
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Print", press Quick on the front panel to
print the screen image of the oscilloscope.
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Print".
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation continuously to
select among the options, or enable the touch screen to tap the desired
operation type.
7. Email
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Email", press Quick on the front panel to
send the file through email.
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Email".
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation continuously to
select among the options, or enable the touch screen to tap the desired
operation type.
8. Record
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Record", press Quick on the front panel
to record the waveform.
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Record".
Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation continuously to
select among the options, or enable the touch screen to tap the desired
operation type.
9. Save Group
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Group", press Quick on the front
panel to save group.
⚫ Operation Type
Press Operation and then rotate the multifunction knob to select "Save
Group". Press down the knob to select it. You can also press Operation
continuously to select among the options, or enable the touch screen to tap
the desired operation type.
⚫ Storage Option
Press Group and then rotate the multifunction knob to select the
desired storage option. Press down the knob to select it. You can also press
Group continuously to select among the options, or enable the touch screen
to tap the desired operation type. The storage options include "Save Image",
"Save Wave", and "Save Setup".
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 19-17
Screen Saver
When the oscilloscope enters the idle state and holds for a certain period of time, the
screen saver program will be enabled. The screen saver program is disabled by
default.
Press Utility → More → Screen Saver to enter the screen saver setting menu.
Press Screen Saver, then rotate the multifunction knob to select the screen
saver type, and then press down the knob
to select the type. You can also press
Screen Saver continuously or enable the touch screen to select the desired type.
The available screen saver types include "Off", "Picture", and "Text".
1. Select the Screen Saver
⚫ If you select "Off" under Screen Saver, it indicates that the screen saver is
disabled.
⚫ If you select "Picture" under Screen Saver, press Select Picture to select
the file. The file types include "*.png", "*.bmp", "*.jpg", and "*.tif".
⚫ If you select "Text" under Screen Saver, press Text, and then the
filename input interface is displayed, e.g. inputting "RIGOL Scope". For
details, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
2. Set the Wait Time
Press Time to Start, rotate the multifunction knob or use the pop-up
numeric keypad to input the screen saver time. The available range is from 1
min to 999 min.
3. Preview
Press Preview to view the set screen saver.
4. Restore Defaults
Press Default to restore the screen saver to the default settings.
Self-check
The oscilloscope supports a variety of self-check functions, including key test, screen
test, and touch test.
Press Utility → More → More → Self Check to enter the self-check menu.
1. Key Test
Press Key Test to enter the keyboard test interface (virtual keypad of the front
panel). At this time, you can press the keys on the front panel to check whether
the virtual keys are highlighted. If yes, it indicates that the keys work normally;
if no, it indicates that there's something wrong with the keys. Press RUN/STOP
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-18 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
for three consecutive times to exit the keyboard test interface.
2. Screen Test
Press Screen Test to enter the screen test interface and check whether the
defective pixel exists. There are 15 screen test interfaces. Press SINGLE to
switch to the next screen test interface. Press RUN/STOP for three consecutive
times to exit the screen test interface.
3. Touch Test
Press Touch Test to enter the touch screen test interface first, as shown in the
figure below. Slide with your finger on the screen. If there is a line displaying at
the empty area where you slide on the screen and the box that you tap turns out
to be filled with green background, it indicates that the touch function of this
area is normal.
The press SINGLE to switch to the next touch screen test interface, as shown
in the figure below. At this time, you can pinch or stretch the RIGOL logo on the
screen to zoom it out or in to check whether the gestures work normally. Press
RUN/STOP for three consecutive times to exit the touch screen test interface.
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 19-19
System Time
The system time is displayed at the lower-right side of the screen in "hh:mm
(hour:minute)" format. When you save the waveform, the output file will contain the
time information.
Press Utility → More → More → Time to open the time setting menu.
1. Set the System Time
(1) Press Show Time to open or close the system time interface.
(2) Set "year": Press Year, rotate the multifunction knob directly to set it
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the numeric value to set it.
(3) Set "month": Press Month, rotate the multifunction knob directly to
set it or use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the numeric value to set it.
(4) Set "day": Press Day, rotate the multifunction knob directly to set it or
use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the numeric value to set it.
(5) Set "Hour": Press Hour, rotate the multifunction knob directly to set it
or use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the numeric value to set it.
(6) Set "Minute": Press Minute, rotate the multifunction knob directly to
set it or use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the numeric value to set it.
The setting range of each item of the system time conforms to the convention.
⚫ Year: 2017 to 2099
⚫ Month: 01 to 12
⚫ Date: 01 to 31 (28, 29, or 30)
⚫ Hour: 00 to 23
⚫ Minute: 00 to 59
⚫ Second: 00 to 59
2. Apply the Currently Set System Time
Press Apply to validate the current settings. The time at the lower-right side of
the screen will be updated.
Default Option
Used for configuring the Default key.
Press Utility → More → More → Default Option, then enter the default option
menu. Press Keep Impedance to enable or disable the impedance keep function. If
you select ON, after you press Default, the impedance value that you set remains
unchanged and other settings will be restored to the default settings. If you select
OFF, after you press Default, the impedance value will be restored to its default
value 1 MΩ.
Chapter 20 Remote Control RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 20-1
Chapter 20 Remote Control
The oscilloscope can be remotely controlled in the following three methods:
User-defined programming
You can program and control the oscilloscope by using the SCPI (Standard
Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands. For details about the
relevant commands and programming, refer to
MSO7000/DS7000 Series
Programming Guide
.
PC software
You can use the PC software to send commands to control the oscilloscope remotely.
RIGOL Ultra Sigma is recommended. You can download the software from RIGOL
official website (www.rigol.com).
Operation Procedures:
(1) Set up communication between the instrument and PC.
(2) Run Ultra Sigma and search for the instrument resource.
(3) Open the remote command control panel to send commands.
Web Control
MSO7000/DS7000 series digital oscilloscope supports Web Control. When the
instrument is connected to the internet, Web Control can display the waveform
interface of the oscilloscope in a real-time manner. You can migrate the instrument
control and waveform analysis to the control terminals (e.g. PC, mobile, and iPad)
through Web Control to realize remote control of the instrument. When you log in to
the Web Control for the first time, use the user name "admin" (without quotation
marks) and the password "rigol" (without quotation marks).
The oscilloscope can communicate with the PC via the following interfaces:
◼ Remote Control via USB
◼ Remote Control via LAN
◼ Remote Control via GPIB
This chapter will illustrate how to use RIGOL's Ultra Sigma software to remotely
control the oscilloscope via various interfaces.
CAUTION
Before setting up communication, please turn off the instrument to avoid
causing damage to the communication interfaces.
RIGOL Chapter 20 Remote Control
20-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Remote Control via USB
1. Connect the device
Use a USB cable to connect the oscilloscope (USB DEVICE interface) with the PC
(USB HOST interface).
2. Install the USB driver
This oscilloscope is a USB-TMC device. After you connect the oscilloscope to the
PC properly and power it on for the first time (the oscilloscope will be
automatically configured with the USB interface). In this case, "Found New
Hardware Wizard" dialog box appears on the PC. Please install "USB Test and
Measurement Device (IVI)" according to the instructions. The steps are as
follows:
1
2
RIGOL Chapter 20 Remote Control
20-4 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
3. Search for the device resource
Start up Ultra Sigma and the software will automatically search for the resource
currently connected to the PC via the USB interface. You can also click
to search for the resource.
4. View the device resource
The searched instrument resource will be under the directory of "RIGOL Online
Resource", with the model of the instrument and the USB interface information
being displayed as follows.
7
Chapter 20 Remote Control RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 20-5
5. Control the instrument remotely
Right-click the resource name "MSO7054
(USB0::0x1AB1::0x0514::MSO70141234567890::INSTR)" and select "SCPI
Panel Control" to turn on the remote command control panel, through which you
can send commands and read data.
RIGOL Chapter 20 Remote Control
20-6 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Remote Control via LAN
1. Connect the device
Use the network cable to connect the oscilloscope to your local area network
(LAN).
2. Configure network parameters
Configure the network parameters of the oscilloscope according to "LAN
Configuration".
3. Search for the device resource
Start up Ultra Sigma and click
to open the panel as shown in the
figure below. Click and the software searches for the instrument
resource currently connected to LAN. The resource found is displayed at the
right of the panel. Click to add it.
4. View the device resource
The resources found will appear under the "RIGOL Online Resource" directory.
For example, MSO7054 (TCPIP::172.16.3.14::INSTR).
5. Control the instrument remotely
Right-click the resource name "MSO7054 (TCPIP::172.16.3.14::INSTR)" and
select "SCPI Panel Control" to turn on the remote command control panel,
through which you can send commands and read data.
6. Load LXI webpage
As this oscilloscope conforms to LXI CORE 2011 DEVICE standards, you can load
LXI webpage through Ultra Sigma (right-click the instrument resource name and
select "LXI-Web"). Various important information about the instrument
(including the model, manufacturer, serial number, description, MAC address,
and IP address) will be displayed on the webpage. You can also directly input
the IP address of the oscilloscope in the address bar of the PC browser to load
the LXI webpage.
Chapter 20 Remote Control RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 20-7
Remote Control via GPIB
1. Connect the device
Use the USB-GPIB interface converter to extend the GPIB interface for the
oscilloscope, and then use the GPIB cable to connect the oscilloscope to the PC
to realize remote control.
2. Install the driver of GPIB card
Correctly install the driver of the GPIB card which has been connected to the PC.
3. To Set the GPIB Address
Set the GPIB address of the oscilloscope according to the description in "To Set
the GPIB Address".
4. Search for the device resource
Start Ultra Sigma, and then click
. A window is displayed as shown in
Figure (a). Click
and the software searches for the instrument
resource currently connected to the PC via the GPIB interface. The resource
found is displayed at the right of the window as shown in Figure (b). Click
to add it.
(a)
(b)
Note: If you want to remove the resource, select the resource and then click
to remove it.
RIGOL Chapter 20 Remote Control
20-8 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
If the resource cannot be searched automatically:
⚫ Select the GPIB card address of the PC from the drop-down box of
"GPIB0::" and select the GPIB address set in the oscilloscope from the
drop-down box of "0::INSTR".
⚫ Click
to check whether the GPIB communication works
normally; if not, please follow the corresponding prompt messages to
handle it.
5. View the device resource
The searched instrument resource will be under the directory of "RIGOL Online
Resource", as shown in the following figure.
6. Control the instrument remotely
Right-click the resource name "MSO7054 (GPIB0::18::INSTR)", and select "SCPI
Panel Control" to open the remote command control panel. Then you can send
commands and read data through the panel.
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 21-1
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting
The commonly encountered failures of the oscilloscope and their solutions are listed
below. If the following problems occur, locate and resolve the problems according to
the following steps. If the problems still persist, contact RIGOL and provide your
instrument information to us.
1. The instrument cannot be launched normally.
(1) Check whether the power cord is correctly connected.
(2) Upgrade the software.
(3) Press Default on the front panel, and restore the instrument settings to its
factory default settings.
(4) Restart the instrument again.
(5) If the problem still persists, contact RIGOL.
2. After the instrument is connected to the power source, the Power key
is still not illuminated.
(1) Check whether the fuse is blown. If you need to replace the fuse, use only
the specified fuse that conforms to the product.
(2) If the problem still persists, contact RIGOL.
3. No waveform of the signal is displayed on the screen.
(1) Check whether the probe is properly connected to the item under test.
(2) Check whether there are signals generated from the item to be tested (you
can connect the probe compensation output signal to the faulty channel to
locate the problem, and then determine whether the channel or the item to
be tested has a problem).
(3) Resample the signal.
4. The display of waveform is ladder-like.
(1) The horizontal time base might be too low. Increase the horizontal time
base to improve the display effects.
(2) If the display type is "Vector", the lines between the sample points may
cause ladder-like display results. Press Display → Type to select "Dots".
5. The USB storage device cannot be recognized.
(1) Check whether the USB storage device can work normally.
(2) Make sure the USB storage device used is FAT32-format Flash storage type,
as this instrument does not support USB3.0 storage device and hardware
storage type.
(3) Check whether the capacity of the USB storage device is too large. It is
recommended that the capacity of the USB storage device should not
exceed 8 GB for this oscilloscope.
(4) Restart the instrument and insert the USB storage device to check it.
(5) If the USB storage device still cannot work normally, please contact
RIGOL Chapter 21 Troubleshooting
21-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
RIGOL.
6. The touch functions cannot be used normally.
(1) Check whether you have enabled the touch screen. If not, please press the
touch screen switch key Touch Lock to enable the touch screen function.
(2) Check whether the screen or your finger is stained with oil or sweat. If yes,
please clean the screen or dry your hands.
(3) Check whether there is a strong magnetic field around the instrument. If
the instrument is close to the strong magnetic field (e.g. a magnet), please
move the instrument away from the magnet field.
(4) If the problem still persists, please contact RIGOL.
Chapter 22 Appendix RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 22-1
Chapter 22 Appendix
Appendix A: Accessories and Options
Order Information
Order No.
Model
MSO7054 (500 MHz, 10 GSa/s, 100 Mpts, 4+16 CH MSO)
MSO7054
MSO7034 (350 MHz, 10 GSa/s, 100 Mpts, 4+16 CH MSO)
MSO7034
MSO7024 (200 MHz, 10 GSa/s, 100 Mpts, 4+16 CH MSO)
MSO7024
MSO7014 (100 MHz, 10 GSa/s, 100 Mpts, 4+16 CH MSO)
MSO7014
DS7054 (500 MHz, 10 GSa/s, 100 Mpts, 4CH DS)
DS7054
DS7034 (350 MHz, 10 GSa/s, 100 Mpts, 4CH DS)
DS7034
DS7024 (200 MHz, 10 GSa/s, 100 Mpts, 4CH DS)
DS7024
DS7014 (100 MHz, 10 GSa/s, 100 Mpts, 4CH DS)
DS7014
Standard Accessories
Power cord conforming to the standard of the destination country
-
USB Cable
CB-USBA-USBB-F
F-150
4 Passive Probes (500 MHz)
RP3500A
1 Logic Analyzer Probe (only for MSO model)
RPL2316
Front Panel Cover
DS7000-FPC
Quick Guide (hard copy)
-
Recommended Accessories
Active Differential Probe (1.5 GHz BW)
RP7150
Rack Mount Kit
DS7000-RM
USB-GPIB Interface Converter
USB-GPIB
Near-field Probe
NFP-3
Power Analysis Phase Deviation Correction Jig
RPA246
Digital Oscilloscope Demonstration Plate
DK-DS6000
Bandwidth Upgrade Option
Bandwidth upgrades from 100 MHz to 200 MHz
DS7000-BW1T2
Bandwidth upgrades from 100 MHz to 350 MHz
DS7000-BW1T3
Bandwidth upgrades from 100 MHz to 500 MHz
DS7000-BW1T5
Bandwidth upgrades from 200 MHz to 350 MHz
DS7000-BW2T3
Bandwidth upgrades from 200 MHz to 500 MHz
DS7000-BW2T5
Bandwidth upgrades from 350 MHz to 500 MHz
DS7000-BW3T5
Memory Depth Option
Maximum memory depth up to 250 Mpts
DS7000-2RL
Maximum memory depth up to 500 Mpts
DS7000-5RL
Bundle Option
RIGOL Chapter 22 Appendix
22-2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Function and application bundle option, including DS7000-COMP,
DS7000-EMBD, DS7000-AUTO, DS7000-FLEX, DS7000-AUDIO,
DS7000-AERO, MSO7000-AWG, and DS7000-PWR
DS7000-BND
Serial Protocol Analysis Option
PC serial bus trigger and analysis (RS232/UART)
DS7000-COMP
Embedded serial bus trigger and analysis (I2C and SPI)
DS7000-EMBD
Auto serial bus trigger and analysis (CAN and LIN)
DS7000-AUTO
FlexRay serial bus trigger and analysis (FlexRay)
DS7000-FLEX
Audio serial bus trigger and analysis (I2S)
DS7000-AUDIO
MIL-STD-1553 serial bus trigger and analysis (MIL-STD-1553)
DS7000-AERO
Measurement Application Option
Dual-channel 25 MHz Arbitrary Waveform Generator (only for MSO model)
MSO7000-AWG
Built-in Power Analysis
DS7000-PWR
Note: For all the accessories and options, please contact the local office of RIGOL.
Chapter 22 Appendix RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 22-3
Appendix B: Warranty
RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. (hereinafter referred to as RIGOL) warrants that
the product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship within the
warranty period. If a product proves defective within the warranty period, RIGOL
guarantees free replacement or repair for the defective product.
To get repair service, please contact with your nearest RIGOL sales or service office.
There is no other warranty, expressed or implied, except such as is expressly set
forth herein or other applicable warranty card. There is no implied warranty of
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Under no circumstances shall
RIGOL be liable for any consequential, indirect, ensuing, or special damages for any
breach of warranty in any case.
Index RIGOL
MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide 1
Index
+Duty ...................................... 6-31
+Rate ...................................... 6-35
+Width .................................... 6-30
Acquisition Mode ........................ 4-5
AM ........................................ 17-14
Anti-Aliasing ............................. 4-11
Area ........................................ 6-35
AutoIP ..................................... 19-3
Aux Output .............................. 19-8
Average ..................................... 4-5
Bandwidth Limit .......................... 2-6
Blackman-Harris ......................... 6-9
Built-in Waveform ..................... 17-6
Channel Coupling ........................ 2-5
Channel Label ................... 2-11, 2-12
DC .......................................... 17-5
DC offset voltage ...................... 17-2
Default Gateway ....................... 19-4
Delay ....................................... 6-32
Delay Calibration ....................... 2-10
Delay Trigger ............................ 5-27
Delayed Sweep .................... 3-2, 3-4
Digital Channel ......................... 10-1
Domain Name Server ................ 19-4
Dots ........................................ 16-2
Duration Trigger ....................... 5-19
Duty ........................................ 17-4
-Duty ....................................... 6-31
ECG ......................................... 17-7
Edge Trigger ............................... 5-9
Edge Type ................................ 5-32
Edit Waveforms ...................... 17-12
End of Frame Error ................. 11-13
Exp.Fall .................................... 17-7
Factory Settings ...................... 18-16
Fall Time .................................. 6-30
Falling Edge Count .................... 6-32
Flattop ....................................... 6-9
FM .............................. 17-15, 17-16
Frequency ........................ 6-30, 17-2
Gauss ...................................... 17-8
GPIB ........................................ 19-6
Hamming ................................... 6-9
Hanning .................................... 6-9
Haversine ................................. 17-9
Horizontal Expansion ................. 4-11
Horizontal Position ...................... 3-3
I2C Decoding .......................... 11-14
I2C Trigger ............................... 5-36
I2S Trigger ............................... 5-47
Idle Time .................................. 5-33
Impedance ............................... 17-3
IP Address ................................ 19-3
Lorentz ..................................... 17-8
MAC ........................................ 19-5
mDNS ...................................... 19-5
Memory Depth ........................... 4-9
Modulating Waveform .... 17-14, 17-15
Modulation ............................. 17-13
Modulation Depth .................... 17-14
Modulation Deviation ............... 17-15
Modulation Frequency ... 17-14, 17-15,
17-16
Negative Pulse Count ................. 6-31
Network Status ......................... 19-2
Noise ....................................... 17-5
Noise Rejection .......................... 5-7
Normal ...................................... 4-5
Nth Edge Trigger ....................... 5-32
Overshoot................................. 6-35
Parallel Decoding ....................... 11-2
Pattern Setting ................. 5-18, 5-20
Peak Detection ........................... 4-6
Period ...................................... 6-30
Period Area ............................... 6-35
Persistence Time ....................... 16-2
Phase ....................................... 6-32
Picture ..................................... 18-2
Polarity ............................ 5-11, 5-52
Positive Pulse Count .................. 6-31
Preshoot ................................... 6-35
Probe Ratio .......................... 2-6, 2-7
Pulse ........................................ 17-4
Pulse Condition ......................... 5-11
Pulse Polarity ............................ 5-24
Pulse Trigger ............................. 5-10
RIGOL Index
2 MSO7000/DS7000 User Guide
Pulse Width Setting................... 5-11
Qualifier .................................. 5-24
Ramp ...................................... 17-4
-Rate ....................................... 6-35
Rectangular ............................... 6-9
Rise Time ................................ 6-30
Rising Edge Count .................... 6-31
Roll ........................................... 4-4
RS232 Decoding ....................... 11-7
RS232 Trigger .......................... 5-33
Runt Trigger ............................. 5-23
Sample Point 5-42, 5-46, 11-30, 11-34
Sample Rate .............................. 4-7
Setup&Hold Trigger................... 5-29
Setups ..................................... 18-3
Sine ........................................ 17-2
Slope Condition ........................ 5-13
Slope Time Setting ................... 5-13
Slope Trigger ............................ 5-12
SPI Decoding .......................... 11-18
SPI Trigger ............................... 5-38
Square .................................... 17-3
Start Keep .............................. 17-17
Start Phase .............................. 17-3
Static IP .................................. 19-3
Subnet mask ............................ 19-4
Sweep ......................... 17-16, 17-18
Sweep Trigger Source ... 17-18, 17-19
Symmetry ................................ 17-4
Sync ........................................ 5-16
To Create the Waveform ........... 17-10
Triangle ..................................... 6-9
Trigger Coupling ......................... 5-6
Trigger Holdoff ........................... 5-6
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level ..... 5-3
Trigger Mode .............................. 5-4
Trigger Position ......................... 5-26
tVmax ...................................... 6-31
tVmin ....................................... 6-31
Vamp .............................. 6-34, 17-2
Vavg ........................................ 6-34
Vbase ...................................... 6-34
Vector ...................................... 16-2
Vertical Offset ............................. 2-4
Vertical Scale .............................. 2-3
Video Polarity ........................... 5-15
Video Standard ......................... 5-15
Video Trigger ............................ 5-15
VISA ....................................... 19-5
Vlower ..................................... 6-34
Vmax ....................................... 6-34
Vmid ........................................ 6-34
Vmin ........................................ 6-34
Vpp ......................................... 6-34
Vrms ........................................ 6-35
Vtop ........................................ 6-34
Vupper ..................................... 6-34
Waveform Aliasing ....................... 4-8
Waveform Distortion .................... 4-8
Waveform Leakage ...................... 4-8
Waves ...................................... 18-3
-Width ..................................... 6-31
Window trigger ......................... 5-25
Windows Type .......................... 5-26
XY ............................................. 4-2
YT ............................................. 4-2
